Pro Concrete v 18

ProConcrete 3D

ProConcrete 3D Manual Release 18.0 Bentley Systems

ProConcrete 3D

No part of this manual may be reproduced or copied and distributed by any form of electronic means (copy, microfilm, etc.) without written permission of Bentley Systems. Bentley Systems does not guarantee, either explicitly or implicitly, the suitability for sale or the capability for particular applications of these materials which are supplied only in the existing form Bentley Systems does not assume any liability for collateral, accidental or indirect damages arising from the purchase and the application of these materials. Where a liability is assumed Bentley Systems, such liability is limited to the purchase price of the materials described herein. Bentley Systems reserves the right to revise or to modify this product at their discretion. This user’s guide describes the product at the time of publication. This description may not be applicable to future versions of this product. Please note: all indicated trade names are registered trade marks of the companies concerned. Content (responsible persons) G. Reibel and M Rees Illustrations and Layout G. Reibel © 2008 Bentley Systems

ProConcrete 3D

Table of Contents

A INTRODUCTION ................................ .......................... 1

A.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 1 A.1.1 General information.......................................................................1 A.1.2 Installation of ProConcrete 3D .......................................................3 A.1.3 System Requirements .................................................................11

A.2 Input Options......................................................................... 1 A.2.1 ProConcrete / ProSteel 3D toolbars and icons................................1 A.2.2 ProConcrete 3D / ProSteel 3D Menus............................................2 A.2.3 Input Options in Input Fields ..........................................................3 A.2.4 Input Options at Object Selection...................................................4 A.2.5 Special Key-Commands ................................................................5

A.3 Project Manager .................................................................... 1 A.3.1 Working with Projects....................................................................2 A.3.2 Create New Projects .....................................................................4

A.4 Global Settings...................................................................... 1

A.5 ProConcrete Options............................................................. 1

B MODELING AND SCHEDULING................................ .1

B.1 Layer Functions..................................................................... 1

B.2 Construction Utilities ............................................................ 1 B.2.1 Construction lines .........................................................................1 B.2.2 Measure of distances ....................................................................5

B.3 3D Component Part Views .................................................... 1 B.3.1 Object View / Object-UCS .............................................................1 B.3.2 Surface View / Surface-UCS..........................................................3 B.3.3 Global View ..................................................................................4 B.3.4 Top View ......................................................................................5 B.3.5 Free View .....................................................................................5 B.3.6 Cutting Plane ................................................................................6 B.3.7 Perspective View ..........................................................................8

ProConcrete 3D

B.4 Move and Copy Parts .............................................................1 B.4.1 Move/Copy ...................................................................................2 B.4.2 Turn..............................................................................................3 B.4.3 Mirror............................................................................................4 B.4.4 Align .............................................................................................5 B.4.5 Clone............................................................................................7 B.4.6 Rotate...........................................................................................9 B.4.7 Settings ......................................................................................10

B.5 Display / Assign parts............................................................1 B.5.1 Hide..............................................................................................1 B.5.2 Regenerate...................................................................................2 B.5.3 Display Classes ............................................................................3 B.5.4 Area Classes ................................................................................5 B.5.5 Part Families.................................................................................6 B.5.6 Search Parts...............................................................................10

B.6 Work Frames ..........................................................................1 B.6.1 ProConcrete Work Frames ............................................................1 B.6.2 Building a Single Work Frame........................................................3 B.6.3 Create Views ................................................................................5 B.6.4 Elements ......................................................................................7 B.6.5 Columns and Beams.....................................................................8 B.6.6 Floors and Walls .........................................................................11 B.6.7 Foundations................................................................................13 B.6.8 Axis Names ................................................................................14 B.6.9 Options.......................................................................................16 B.6.10 User Defined Blocks ...............................................................17 B.6.11 Assignment ............................................................................18 B.6.12 ProSteel Work Frames............................................................19 B.6.13 Rectangular Work Frame........................................................20 B.6.14 Cylindrical Work Frame...........................................................24 B.6.15 Wedge-Shaped Work Frame...................................................25 B.6.16 Pyramidal Work Frame ...........................................................26 B.6.17 Create Views..........................................................................27 B.6.18 Axes Names...........................................................................29 B.6.19 Options ..................................................................................32 B.6.20 User-defined Blocks................................................................34

B.7 Selecting ProConcrete Views ..............................................35 B.7.1 ProConcrete 3D Location Center .................................................35 B.7.2 Location......................................................................................36 B.7.3 Options (for Location Center).......................................................37

B.8 Select View .............................................................................1

ProConcrete 3D

B.9 Groups ................................................................................... 1 B.9.1 General Information about Groups.................................................1 B.9.2 Creation and Processing of Groups ...............................................2 B.9.3 Check Groups...............................................................................6 B.9.4 Settings ........................................................................................8

B.10 Positioning............................................................................. 1 B.10.1 Automatic Positioning ...............................................................2 B.10.2 Manual Insertion.....................................................................15 B.10.3 Automatic Insertion (Distribution).............................................19 B.10.4 Other Auxiliary Commands .....................................................24 B.10.5 Depiction of Position Flags......................................................26 B.10.6 Management of Styles ............................................................30

B.11 Drawing Information.............................................................. 1

B.12 Bar Bending Schedules ........................................................ 1 B.12.1 Extract Cage Database.............................................................2 B.12.2 Print Cage Data........................................................................3 B.12.3 Select Print Options..................................................................4

C CONCRETE ELEMENTS................................ ............. 1

C.1 Creating Concrete Elements................................................. 1 C.1.1 Foundations..................................................................................1 C.1.2 Beams and Columns.....................................................................6 C.1.3 Slabs ..........................................................................................14 C.1.4 Walls ..........................................................................................26 C.1.5 Custom Concrete Elements.........................................................46

C.2 Reinforcing Concrete Elements............................................ 1 C.2.1 Foundations..................................................................................1 C.2.2 Reinforcing Bars for Strip Footings ................................................8 C.2.3 Beams and Columns...................................................................20 C.2.4 Slabs and Walls ..........................................................................41 C.2.5 Custom Concrete Elements.........................................................58

C.3 Editing Concrete Elements ................................................... 1 C.3.1 Extend/Trim ..................................................................................3 C.3.2 Divide/Connect .............................................................................5 C.3.3 Other ............................................................................................7 C.3.4 Polycuts......................................................................................11 C.3.5 Modify Shapes ............................................................................13

ProConcrete 3D

C.3.6 Modify Plates ..............................................................................17 C.3.7 Walls ..........................................................................................19 C.3.8 Options.......................................................................................21 C.3.9 Cope ..........................................................................................23 C.3.10 Outlet .....................................................................................27 C.3.11 Boolean Operations ................................................................31

C.4 Editing Reinforcement ...........................................................1

C.5 Reinforcement Tools..............................................................3 C.5.1 End Conditions..............................................................................8 C.5.2 Create Rebar ..............................................................................15

D DETAILING................................ ................................ .. 1

D.1 DetailCenter............................................................................1 D.1.1 The 2D-Detailing ...........................................................................1 D.1.2 Detailing with the Detail Center......................................................3 D.1.3 General Information – Scale and Dimension Styles ........................9 D.1.4 Intelligent 2D-Details ...................................................................11 D.1.5 Display of Construction Component Lists .....................................13 D.1.6 Component Overview..................................................................19 D.1.7 Views Overview ..........................................................................33 D.1.8 Detail Block Overview (Insert)......................................................41 D.1.9 Global Settings............................................................................47 D.1.10 Automatic Translation .............................................................53 D.1.11 Transfer Drawing Paths ..........................................................57 D.1.12 Drawing Verification................................................................59 D.1.13 Direct Detailing .......................................................................65 D.1.14 Modification Management .......................................................67

D.2 Detailing Style ........................................................................1 D.2.1 Working with Detailing Styles.........................................................1 D.2.2 General Info..................................................................................3 D.2.3 Global Settings..............................................................................5 D.2.4 2D-Display ..................................................................................11 D.2.5 Dimensioning ..............................................................................29 D.2.6 Label Settings .............................................................................53 D.2.7 Example – Detailing of a Single Part ............................................59

D.3 DetailCenter Express .............................................................1 D.3.1 Start the DetailCenter Express.......................................................3 D.3.2 Selection Pages ............................................................................5 D.3.3 Single Sheet Output ....................................................................19

ProConcrete 3D

D.4 Automatic 2D-Cut .................................................................. 1

D.5 Cranked 2D-View ................................................................... 1

D.6 North symbol ......................................................................... 1

D.7 Manual Dimensioning Points ................................................ 1

D.8 Manual Component Part Link ............................................... 1

D.9 Global Scale........................................................................... 1

D.10 Drawing Border ..................................................................... 1

D.11 Manual Cut............................................................................. 1

D.12 Manual Dimensioning............................................................ 1

D.13 Elevation Flags...................................................................... 1

D.14 Short2d .................................................................................. 1

D.15 2D-Cutout............................................................................... 1

E MISCELLANEOUS ................................ ...................... 1

E.1 User-Defined Component Parts ............................................ 1 E.1.1 Special Parts ................................................................................1

E.2 BlockCenter ........................................................................... 1 E.2.1 Structure of the BlockCenter..........................................................3 E.2.2 Creation and Edition of Blocks.......................................................5 E.2.3 Insert Blocks .................................................................................7 E.2.4 Display of Block Structure..............................................................9 E.2.5 Database of Block Data...............................................................13

E.3 Dispatch Blocks .................................................................... 1 E.3.1 Insertion of Blocks.........................................................................1 E.3.2 Further Options and Data Base .....................................................3

E.4 Auxiliary Tools....................................................................... 1

ProConcrete 3D

E.4.1 Collision Check .............................................................................1 E.4.2 Center of Gravity...........................................................................3 E.4.3 Move Objects................................................................................5 E.4.4 Convert ADT shapes .....................................................................7

E.5 Notes.......................................................................................1

ProConcrete 3D

A INTRODUCTION

[?replace this page in pdf file with Chapter image page?]

ProConcrete 3D

Introduction

ProConcrete 3D Page A.1 - 1

A.1 Introduction

A.1.1 General information

Welcome to ProConcrete 3D Thank you for choosing the ProConcrete 3D program to help you deal with your daily tasks faster and in a more reliable way. The future is in using a CAD software package based on a successful platform, which is well used and tested all over the world. We are pleased that you have selected a product from our company and we believe we will form a reliable partnership for a long time.

Contents of this Manual This manual provides a complete description of all commands available with the ProConcrete 3D construction software package. Some of the individual descriptions contain examples, which facilitate the recreation of the different command applications by providing graphics and screenshots.

Not Provided in this Manual Working with ProConcrete 3D and this manual requires that you are already familiar with the use of AutoCAD. The chapters of this manual require knowledge of AutoCAD and Windows. If that is not the case, you should familiarize yourself with the most important basic AutoCAD commands to be able to work effectively with the new software. Although the program will help you to overcome many of the three-dimensional AutoCAD construction hurdles, you should be familiar with such terms as object snap, user coordinate system (UCS), blocks, etc.

Introduction

ProConcrete 3D

Introduction


A.1.2 Installation of ProConcrete 3D

Insert the installation-CD into your CD-ROM-drive. If the installation doesn’t start automatically, move to the root directory on the CD and then start the program ProConcrete Setup.exe. Important Note: To install ProConcrete 3D successfully, you need administrator rights for your computer. Step 1 – Starting the Installation Process

Introduction

ProConcrete 3D

The installation recognizes which platform of AutoCAD is available Step 2 – Select the Platform to be Supported

Introduction


Step 3 - Select if ProConcrete 3D is to be installed

Now, you can choose whether you want to install ProConcrete 3D for AutoCAD 2006 or for several platforms simultaneously. Then press the “Next” button to continue the installation. In the following example, we assume an installation for AutoCAD 2006.

Introduction

ProConcrete 3D

Step 4 – Installation Directory

You are now prompted to define the installation folder for the installation. Normally, ProConcrete 3D will be installed in the directory C:\Program Files\Bentley\ProSteel 3D\R18.0\; If you press the “Browse” button, you can define the folder where ProConcrete 3D V1 (here for AutoCAD 2006) can be installed.

Introduction


Step 5 – License Agreement

Introduction

ProConcrete 3D

The installation shows the license agreement between you and Bentley Systems. Read through the license agreement carefully. If you agree with the conditions, press the “I accept” option then “Next” button. If you don’t agree and you want to cancel the installation, press the “Cancel” button. Step 6 – Target of Configuration Files A configuration file for the application is generated by the installation. Alternatively, it can be generated either in the current program directory or in the user’s directory C:\Documents and Settings\.... If you generate the configuration file in the user’s directory, you have to make a copy for each user of the operating system. This means that each user of the workstation can work with his individual settings. If you store the configuration in the program directory, you can parallel install several ProConcrete installations and each one can be provided with individual settings. The configuration file is a text file and can easily be edited using the Windows-Notepad.

Introduction


Step 7 – Component Selection

Now the installation permits you to select certain components, such as shape catalogues, COM-examples, roof-wall shapes and special shapes. After a component has been selected, the files of the component will be installed. On the right of the dialog, a size value is displayed, which approximately corresponds to the volume of the files to be installed. After having selected the desired components, press the “Next” button. Step 8 – Installation of the Files Now, the selected components are installed. A warning message is displayed if some files to be installed on the target directory already exist. You can indicate whether this file has to be overwritten or not. If you select “No all”, no file will be overwritten in the installation. If alternatively you select “Yes all”, the result will be that the already existing files will always be overwritten.

Introduction

ProConcrete 3D

Step 9 – End of Installation

Finally, you specify what is going to be the name of the icon on the Desktop. Then, the installation of ProConcrete 3D for AutoCAD 2006 is finished. If you selected further platforms, you have to repeat the above-mentioned steps. For concluding information concerning the installation please refer to the readme.txt file, displayed in the text editor. It can be exported to a printer, if necessary.

Introduction


A.1.3 System Requirements

The system requirements are based on an installation running under AutoCAD. For other platforms these requirements can be different and they are dependant of the selected CAD platform. In principle, ProConcrete 3D can run on any PC, where the CAD platform, such as AutoCAD 2006 is running well. Therefore, the system requirements for AutoCAD 2006 are suitable. Hardware-Performance (Minimum Requirement) Processor Pentium 4 with 1,5 GHz Working Memory 512 MB Fixed Disk Storage 300 MB Hardware-Performance (Recommended) Processor Pentium 4 with 3,0 GHz Working Memory 1,5 GB Fixed Disk Storage 2,0 GB The requirements for the graphics card correspond to the recommendations of AutoDesk for 3D-mode. In addition, a CD-ROM-drive for the installation is required and – depending on the software protection – a floppy disk drive, USB port or parallel port. Operating System and Additionally Installed Software Microsoft Windows 2000/XP Professional AutoCAD 2006 - 2008 Adobe Reader 6.0 Microsoft Excel

Introduction

ProConcrete 3D

Input Options


A.2 Input Options

A.2.1 ProConcrete / ProSteel 3D toolbars and icons

All toolbars and icons reflect a similar appearance to that used in AutoCAD 2006 / 2007. Recommended ProConcrete 3D toolbars to have turned on include:

The ProConcrete 3D Main Toolbar shown above has many flyout menus. These flyout menus contain almost all other ProConcrete 3D toolbar buttons. If you prefer, you can turn off all other ProConcrete 3D toolbars, and still have access to most command via this toolbar.

Note: This is the ProConcrete 3D Bending Schedule toolbar

Input Options

Page A.2 - 2 ProConcrete 3D

A.2.2 ProConcrete 3D / ProSteel 3D Menus

THE PULLDOWN MENU: Two additional pull-down menus display at the top of your AutoCAD screen when ProConcrete 3D is installed. One pull-down menu is for ProConcrete 3D, the other for ProSteel 3D. Just like AutoCAD 2006 / 2007, icons are displayed under the pulldown menu. This will make it easier for users who prefer icon use, to learn and understand what icons are associated with ProConcrete and ProSteel commands. RIGHT-CLICK MENUS: Context sensitive right-click menus are an ideal way of modifying ProConcrete 3D / ProSteel 3D objects that have already been created in your building model. Just highlight an object (or many objects) first, right-click after selection is complete (a longer right-click if AutoCAD’s time sensitive right-click is ON) and you will receive a menu that is relative to the object that you are dealing with. There may be one ProConcrete / ProSteel relevant command or many ProConcrete / ProSteel relevant commands available from the menus. See below for examples of right click menus.

ProSteel / ProConcrete 3D Right-Click Menu examples shown above

ProConcrete 3D pulldown menu shown above

Input Options


A.2.3 Input Options in Input Fields

Some additional functions are available in all fields where you can enter a length, distance or coordinate. These commands are not available for fields where you enter texts, angles, or general digits such as factors or scaling values. The corresponding function is started by a combination of double-click and CTRL- and/or SHIFT-key. You may choose an alternative assignment in the settings/dialog since in Windows, double-click also marks the field and collides with the normal settings. Standard assignment of the Keys double-click Pick Length double-click + SHIFT Pick Length without Z double-click + CTRL Pocket calculator Alternative assignment of the Keys double-click + CTRL Pick Length double-click + CTRL +SHIFT Pick Length without Z double-click + SHIFT Pocket Calculator Pick Length If you select this function, the dialog is hidden and you can

pick two points in the drawing. The distance from one point to the other is calculated and the result is entered into the corresponding dialog field. Then, the dialog is displayed again.

Pick Length without Z If you select this option, the Z-coordinates are removed at distance calculation. Running is the same as described above.

Pocket Calculator A small pocket calculator is displayed when you use this option. When selected, the calculator takes over the content of the current field and you can directly calculate with this value. When the calculation is finished and you want to copy the result into the current input field, just quit the calculator using the COPY button.

Input Options


A.2.4 Input Options at Object Selection

When the program prompts an object selection, you can select the desired component parts via window or via selection. In this case there are two functions, which can be rather useful. Comparison In most of the functions, and in the case you want to select all

parts, you can select all parts of the current drawing by using selection with RETURN and at the same time pressing the SHIFT-key.

Filter When you interrupt the selection with ESC and SHIFT, the filter function is selected and the function is not left.

In this case you would filter your input for all parts being longer than 2000 mm. If you press the OK-button, the parts are selected on which the filtering is based. Then, the original function is carried out together with the filter result. For a detailed description of the filter possibilities, please refer to the description of PS_SEARCH command.

Input Options


A.2.5 Special Key-Commands

In some other cases, you can select another function by simultaneously pressing ALT, CTRL or SHIFT-key. The available options are displayed in the following list. Use of CTRL-Key Bolted Joint The bolted joint command saves the last created bolt to avoid

searching through the database if the next bolt is a bolt of the same type and length, etc. When you keep the CTRL-key pressed during bolted joint command, the stored data are deleted and the program is forced to read the bolt data from a file.

Select View At Select View command you can set whether double-clicking quits the dialog. This setting is turned upside down when the CTRL-key is pressed simultaneously.

Display Class You can move the dialog of display and area classes lengthways. To return to the original status, keep the CTRL-key pressed while the corresponding dialog is opened.

NC-Data If you keep the CTRL-key pressed while selecting component parts for NC-creation, the Debug-mode is switched on. Diverse graphical outputs are generated for NC-creation. They are rather meant for development, but sometimes they help to solve problems as well.

Positioning If you enter the starting value of positioning, the next following value will be calculated. If you have alphanumerical values, which have to start with A, this is not possible, because you have to enter a 0 and the result will be an <A> displayed. A pressed CTRL-key creates an <a>.

Work Frame If you want to delete the list values of a dimension, you have to put the focus on it and keep the CTRL-key pressed. Using the ALT-key allows elegantly editing of the field.

Positioning At automatic positioning the subsequent calculation of component parts can be switched off using the CTRL-key.

Input Options


Use of ALT-Key General The pressed ALT-key avoids working off the link update. No

updates due to modifications are carried out. You can e.g. use this function to move parts without causing a reaction of the connected parts.

Render Export After the parts for Render-Export have been selected, a standard file name is used. The ALT-key permits file name selection.

Object View The object view first creates a non-aligned view on the part. Alignment is made via RETURN-button. If you press the ALT-key at selection of view direction, an aligned view will be directly created.

Free View This is not carried out using Clipping. If the ALT-key is pressed, the global clipping distances will be used.

Osnap A pressed ALT-key during Object Snap selection inserts the reference points as well, if existing.

Handrail At shape selection, the selection of the previous type can be taken over if you keep the ALT-key pressed while selecting the shape class (post, hand rail, knee-high guard rail, etc.). The same function is valid at modification of shape status, i.e. whether the corresponding shape is used or not.

Edit Drill Holes At modification of drill holes, you can cancel the blocking of bolt fields by means of the ALT-key. These then can be deleted as well. Use this option carefully!

Lattice/Truss Girders Same function as for the selection of handrail shapes.

Select View at Select View command, double-clicking on it activates the selected view. The ALT-key only moves to the corresponding UCS.

Hangar Frame At insertion, the frame is created with the entered width. The ALT-key creates a frame with the width of the entered points.

Haunch If you press the ALT-key while seizing the connection shape, a ceiling joist is carried out.

If you press the ALT-key while seizing the supporting shape, the plate thicknesses are adapted to the supporting shape.

Input Options


Ladder The ALT-key causes that the ladder length is calculated from the third point.

Insert Shapes If you choose Select Position, a pick into the drawing causes a rotation by 90°. The ALT-key causes a rotation by -90°.

Stiffeners If you keep the ALT-key pressed during selection, the program is forced to an input via angles.

Copy At selection via menu points instead of via dialog, the ALT-key causes a conversion of the setting, whether the operation is valid for group or not.

Working Areas Activating the focus from one of the three list fields for distances permits comfortable input of the area. If the CTRL-key is pressed, the distances are deleted.

Line Cut Pressing the ALT-key at selection causes not only a cut but, if need be, an adaptation, too.

Connect Pressing the ALT-key at selection of the second shape avoids type check and everything is connected.

ArcShape Osnap and Center: The ALT-key causes that the endpoints can be seized as well.

Bolt Grips If a bolt is modified using its grips, the ALT-key causes that the endpoints can be moved freely in space, otherwise only in bolt direction.

Purlin Connect. If the frame is modified, moving of the grips along a line causes the movement of the line without modifying the size. If the ALT-key is pressed, the line is moved and the size is modified depending on the neighbouring lines.

Plate Grips Same effects as purlin connection object.

Shape Osnap uad Center. The ALT-key causes that the endpoints can be seized as well.

2D Details In groups, the movement of an accessory part doesn’t cause new drawing of the main part. The modification will only be visible after regeneration. Pressing the ALT-key forces re-structuring of the group even without regeneration.

Grips For shapes, you can specify whether the length modification has only to be effected in shape direction or freely. Using the ALT-key turns this setting upside down.

Input Options


Project Manager


A.3 Project Manager

Command Name: PS_Project In all ProSteel 3D versions it is possible to store drawing files, parts list files or similar things on the folder you like. This feature is often very useful; on the other hand, however, the problem is to keep all files of a project together. Up to now, it was not possible to store the pre-settings, templates or even configurations related to the project. In the current version, a project manager has been implemented offering exactly these options.

File Management Related to the Project You can choose for your temporary, template, style and format files whether these have to be managed related to the project or related to the work station. Related to the work station means that you only have a data record of the settings. In contrast, related to the project means that your settings may differ for each project and will be stored within the project. If you work e.g. with detailing styles and formats related to the customer, but use always the same settings and templates, you set the temporary and template files to ‘not related to the project’, the style and format files, however, are related to the project.

Project Manager


A.3.1 Working with Projects

In the upper line, you see the set project path where the projects are filed and from which the stored projects are displayed. In the list, all available projects are displayed, the lines on the right show the information stored for the corresponding project.

Use this button to load the currently highlighted project and to

carry out all desired modifications of the configuration. The available possibilities are displayed under Create Project. Alternatively, you can activate a project by double-clicking on it.

Load Project... If this option is activated, the current project is automatically activated when you start ProSteel 3D. The prerequisite is, however, that ProSteel 3D has been quit as usual.

Click on this button to finish the current project and to return to the basic configuration.

This option permits to create a new project. The available possibilities are displayed below.

Project Manager


Use this option to delete the currently highlighted project as well as all included files. Also, you have the possibility to close this function, and then the files will be deleted. The current project cannot be deleted.

This option allows the modification of project data and settings. Please refer to Create New Project.

This option permits the creation of a DwgInfo-table (drawing information) throughout the project. In each project drawing, these files can be taken over later into the corresponding DwgInfo-table.

The change of the AutoCAD main dialog informs you whether a project has been loaded. Name and file path of the loaded project are displayed there, instead of the information that you are working with a certain AutoCAD version. Open this dialog to see the name of the current project displayed in the bottom line as well.

Project Manager


A.3.2 Create New Projects

The following dialog appears when you want to create a new project. Use this dialog to enter the project data.

Project Name Enter the desired name of your project. The remaining paths

are modified as well according to your inputs. However, they can be overwritten individually.

Model Files Enter the path to be used for storing your model files. In contrast to the other paths, it is not possible to force AutoCAD to use this path as previously set. Therefore at storing, you have to take care manually that this path will be used to store your model files there.

This button allows interactive path selection if you don’t want to use the proposed path.

This button deletes your individual input and activates the previously set path again.

Project Manager


Detail Files This is the path for your detail drawings. The Detail Centre takes over the selection made here as pre-setting.

Parts Lists This is the path for your parts list files. The file for the creation of parts lists takes over the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at the last selection of the parts list creation, the path still is the one set for this project.

NC Files This is the path for your NC files. The NC-creation takes over the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at the last selection of the NC-creation, the path still is the one set for this project.

PPS Files This is the path for your PPS files. The PPS-function takes over the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at the last selection of the PPS-function, the path still is the one set for this project.

Export Files This is the path for your export files. The export function takes over the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at the last selection of the NC-creation, the path still is the one set for this project.

Temp Project If this option is activated, you can store the temporary files separated from the standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project. In the temporary files e.g. the last active dialog content, the dialog position, etc. are stored.

Temp Files Enter the path for your temporary files.

Copy from Enter the path from which all existing temporary files have to be copied into the new directory. You don’t have to work with a bare installation, but you will find the usual environment, even if from now on it will only be valid for this project.

Templates Proj... If this option is activated, you can store the template files separated from the standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project. In the template files, all data are stored which have been created via the template management.

Template Files Enter the path for your template files.

Project Manager


Copy from Enter the path from which all existing template files have to be copied into the new directory. You don’t have to work with a bare installation, but you will find the usual environment, even if from now on it will only be valid for this project.

Styles Project If this option is activated, you can store the style files separated from the standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project. This option is valid for all 5 types of style files (detailing style, position flags, weld marks, elevations, bolts).

Style File Enter the path for your style files. This path is used to file the corresponding subdirectories for the 5 types of style files.

Copy From Enter the path from which all existing style files have to be copied into the new directory. You don’t have to work with a bare installation, but you will find the usual environment, even if from now on it will only be valid for this project.

DWG Project If this option is activated, you can store the Dwg format templates separated from the standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project.

DWG Frame Enter the path for your frame files.

Copy From Enter the path from which all existing Dwg frames have to be copied into the new directory.

Project Descr. Here you have the opportunity to describe your project in 10 lines. The data are displayed at project selection and have to facilitate selection.

Global Settings


A.4 Global Settings

Command Name: PS_GLOBAL_SETTINGS This dialog box and its pages allow you to enter the standard settings for several functions. You access the dialog by selecting the ‘ProSteel 3D/Options item via the context menu of the right mouse button when no objects are selected. Identical values for the corresponding ProSteel 3D components resulting from these settings can be modified at any time for each part via the “Change PS Properties” command. Most entries are explained with the individual functions; therefore just some settings will be explained in the following. Options General settings

Grips Settings for grips and stretching; when no grip is entered for an object, the AutoCAD-command “Stretch” cannot be used.

Shapes Settings for shapes

Straight Plates Settings for any kind of plate (poly-plates)

Bolts Settings for bolt display

Work Frame Settings for work frame

Values Settings for resolution of circular volumes for volume patterns

LogLinks Settings for links between elements

Display Settings for display

Colours 1+2 Settings for the element and other highlighting colours

Dialogs Settings for all dialogs are specified.

Files Access to the most important system files; this is only visible in expert mode (see Dialog settings).

Global Settings


Options

Process Status: An additional page is added to the properties dialog boxes

when clicking elements with context menu ‘Change PS Properties’, where you can enter data concerning production status of an element (manufactured, galvanized, delivered, etc). As this might not be of interest for your application, this function can be switched off.

Analysis View: For shape properties, an additional tab for the static view is available. If this option is not required, you can deactivate it here generally.

Double Click: The part properties can be processed by double clicking the part.

Unit Dialog: You are asked at the beginning of a new drawing in which unit system you want to work (metrical or imperial). Otherwise, the current AutoCAD-setting will be adopted.

As the consequent use of the same unit system within a drawing is indispensable for the correct display of shapes, the modification of the system variable MEASUREMENT that is responsible for this can cause unwanted results.

Global Settings


This option grants that the once selected unit system is kept and a corresponding hint will be displayed in case of (mostly unwanted) modifications.

Enable DSTV The shape and bolt designations in a parts list are named according to the latest DSTV standard.

Remove Modifications Drill holes e.g. which lie outside of the shape after a length modification has been performed, are deleted automatically.

Remove Links Logical links, which haven’t any meaning any more, are deleted when parts are deleted. During normal operation, this option should be turned on.

Remove References When the drawing is cleaned with the AutoCAD command “Purge”, in order to reduce the drawing size, unused shape references can be deleted after confirmation.

Check DWG Each time the drawing is opened, it is verified with regard to invalid group entries. In some cases, unexpectedly big drawings could be created which is avoided using this option.

Recalculate Parts Internal calculations are not carried out by ProSteel each time a part is „touched“, but only if it is really necessary. This shortens the processing time of some functions.

Group as a Whole This option permits selection of groups as a whole if the AutoCAD system variable “Pickstyle” has been set accordingly.

Convert Boolean In case of Boolean volume operations, the solid, which is responsible for the processing, will be parameterized. Thus it is possibly to modify the dimensions of the processing later, even if the solid responsible for the processing doesn’t exist any more (in the case it was e.g. only an auxiliary object and has been deleted again).

Check Shape Lengths The shape lengths are automatically verified when a shape is inserted.

Check Hole Edges The admissible edge distances are automatically verified if drill holes are inserted.

Description Layer Component parts are placed on the corresponding layer indicated in the description file

Execute Boolean When logical links are processed, the Boolean volume operations within the parts are carried out before a cut is made. The display of component parts can change by using this option.

Global Settings


Shapes as ACIS New created shapes are generated using the ACIS-modeller.

Plates as ACIS New created shapes are generated using the ACIS-modeller.

LogDwgInput Each time a drawing is loaded, a minute’s file will be created in the same directory.

Grips

Shapes

Modify Length A grip is created for length change (or for position change) and all measurements can be altered.

Move Cuts A grip is created for the section. You might now have one grip for changing the length and one for changing the section.

Please note: When you move a section grip in a way to shorten the length of the shape, the length grip is moved simultaneously. When you move the length grip over the section grip, the shape will be cut off at the same spot, because you have not moved the sectional plane. When you move the section grip over the length grip, you eliminate the section from the shape (although the sectional plane remains at the section grip) the section grip “seizes” the sectional plane, while the length grip “seizes” the shape length. When you stretch a cut shape, the section angle within the shape remains the same, just like in reality.

Global Settings


Move Holes Drill holes receive a grip and can be moved. Otherwise they remain where inserted when the shape is stretched.

Move Polycuts Poly-sections receive a grip and can be moved (the original form of the poly-line is stored; therefore you only move the line). Otherwise, the section remains where inserted when the shape is stretched.

Only Along Centreline Shapes can only be stretched along their axis, i.e. a change of position is not possible.

Layout When you have entered a value > 0 in this input field, the length of the shape can only be changed via grips in preset modular steps. When you have entered 0, any kind of change can be performed.

Plates

Modify Plate Size A grip for changing thickness is displayed, in all other cases only form changes can be performed.

Move Cuts All other plates fields have same definition as the shape fields. Please refer to this chapter for more detailed information.

Global Settings


Shapes

With the exception of the additional dialogs and some specifications, most of the settings can be found under the section describing the shape properties. Offset Centreline Here, you specify the length beyond which the centre line has

to exceed the shape ends.

Maximum Shape If you enter a value bigger than 0 and you have checked the entry ‘Verify Shape Lengths’ under ‘Options’, and shapes are inserted, a message is displayed drawing your attention to the fact that the maximum delivery length is exceeded by some shapes. A hint dialog appears and the corresponding shapes are highlighted in colour.

Global Settings


Shapes...Labels

In the 3D-model a shape labelling can be displayed additionally, the configuration of which is set here. Text Size Enter the text size of the shape labelling.

Distance Enter the distance between labelling and the upper side of the shape. However, don’t forget that the actual size depends on the set global scale of the drawing.

Label The name of the shape is additionally added to the labelling.

Position Number The position number is additionally added to the labelling.

Length The length of the shape is additionally added to the labelling.

Note2 The content of the note2 field is output as well. If the ‘Below’ field is also checked, it will be displayed in a second line.

Dynamic The text of shape labelling is dynamically adjusted to the view for depictions in paper area if the “Viewport- support” has been activated. The advantage is that the text has the same size independent of the scale in the view window. Select the AutoCAD text style to be used for the labelling in the selection list Text Style.

Global Settings


Shape Type not to be labelled In this input field you enter the shape types, which have to be excluded from labelling. The advantage is that only shape sizes differing from a default value will be output individually.

Shapes...Sketch Display

Sketch Size

Sketch Length You can enter the length of sketch display from the centre in the ‘Value’ input field below to outline the shape as solid. If you enter the value 0, the result will only be a cross-section display at the centre.

Relative Length You can enter the relative size of sketch display related t o the overall length of the shape in the ‘Value’ input field below.

End Offset You can enter the distance of the end points of the displayed system line towards the actual insertion points in the ‘Value’ input field below.

Layout

Insertion Line The insertion line of the shape is displayed as system line of the shape (which could for example be the upper edge).

Middle Line The middle line of the shape is displayed as system line.

Global Settings


Here, you can see an example for a sketch display as well as some corresponding dimensions:

Global Settings


Shapes...Name Conventions

Input Fields Here, you can indicate a general default consisting of format

variables and constant designations for the indicated shape type in question. All format variables are placed in round brackets and start with a $-symbol outside the brackets. Thus they can be identified as variables at once. This is followed by the format specification for the desired dimension.

Format Specifications:

$(W) shape width $(H) shape height $(T) shape thickness $(D) outside diameter in case of round shapes or edge length at square shapes

Global Settings


Straight Plates

With the exception of the additional dialogs and some specifications, most of the settings can be found under the section describing the shape properties. Grid lengthwise Here, you enter the lengthwise grid distances if a grid is to be

displayed.

Grid cross-wise Here, you enter the cross-wise grid distances if a grid is to be displayed.

Grid Length This is where you specify the maximum grid length running from the outer edge of the plate or from existing inner contours. If you enter the value 0, the plate will be displayed with a complete grid. This option permits you to display the plate without complete grid. The display is limited to the contour edges. Shapes which are situated below remain visible by this way.

Grid Height Enter the grid height here.

Offset Middle Line If you selected the display as middle line, this is where you enter a projection of the middle line over the two plate surfaces. In contrast to shapes, the centre line of plates is not running along the longitudinal direction but along the plate thickness.

Global Settings


Plates...Labels

Since the dialog is identical with the shape labelling, please refer to this chapter for the meaning of the input fields.

Global Settings


Plates...Description

Description of Name Here, you specify the format default of the plate name as

it is used e.g. at labelling and in the property fields.

Position Flags Here, you specify the format default of the plate name in position flags.

Export Here, you specify the format default of the plate name at the export of parts list data. Format Default Structure:

The names like e.g. $(N) serve as variable for the current value of the corresponding plate and are explained in the dialog itself. The ‘Name’ of the plate is the constant part like plate, grating, etc. In the input fields of the corresponding description, you can enter a text consisting of the variables and any other characters. When the program is running, the variables are replaced by the current values e.g. for the length and the other characters will be kept as in the original input.

Global Settings


Round at... Here, you specify the accuracy to which the specifications concerning dimensions of the plate name have to be rounded. This doesn’t have any influence on the actual dimensions of the plate model.

Length greatest... The greatest value of dimensions is always regarded as plate length. This doesn’t depend on how you inserted the plate.

Plates...Calculation

Here, a dialog opens where you can determine the method for calculating the weight of the plate resp. the surface to be painted. These specifications influence the result in the parts list output.

The values can be defined according to the exact form, according to the rubber tape-method (as if a rubber tape was tightened around the plate) or according to the smallest surrounding rectangle. For plates having a grid (e.g. to display a gridiron) you can reduce the weight to the percentage value indicated in the input field Weight at Grid.

Global Settings


Bolts

Layout Bolts can be inserted into the drawing with different display

settings: as Middle Line, Line with Circle, Extruded Circles or in real Display.

Back to Back permits automatic bolted connections back-to-back; the bolts are guided through all parts (penetrating bolts).

Global Workloose It is not possible to set an individual clearance in the dialogs, but a uniform value is used instead.

Round...to When the bolt is attached, the found clamping length is rounded to a clamping length which can be divided through the indicated value.

Round bigger... The rounding is set to the next bigger value. The found clamping length is not decreased, but always increased.

Search smaller... If a bolt cannot be created with the found size, the next smaller bolt will be searched and used.

Global Settings


Work Frame

Frame In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the outer frame

will be displayed.

Diagonal In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the diagonal will be drawn.

Cut Plane In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the cutting planes are displayed.

Origin In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the coordinate system of the working area (ECS) will be displayed

Area Name In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the frame text will be displayed.

Dynamic... In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the frame text will be displayed dynamically.

Size Adjustment In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the frame text will be adjusted to the size of the display.

Left/Right Designation In the case of work frames to be inserted, the left resp. the right axis designation will be displayed.

Global Settings


Values

Resolution: The input fields are used to specify the resolution for creating

circular volumes. The higher the resolution, the more detailed the display but the computer processing speed decreases. Use high-resolution settings only for large scales and important details. Due to some special features in the volume-modeller, you should only specify odd numbers here.

2D Subpart Specify the size of the pick helper symbol for detailed construction groups. You need the pick helpers to access the individual parts of construction groups in the workshop drawing after the detailing.

Clip Plane Distance Specify the front and rear section plane distances of the object view.

Rounding Stiffener Thickness Here, you specify the accuracy the plate thickness of the calculated stiffener thickness has to be rounded at stiffeners in connections. An unnecessary accuracy can thus be avoided resp. only certain plate thicknesses, which are available in the workshop, will be used.

Global Settings


Logical Links

Create Passive The active or passive links referencing the corresponding

components are created.

No Update Any changes made to a component are not passed on to its associated components using an update.

On Request You are prompted to indicate if any changes made to a component are to be passed on to its associated components using an update.

Automatic Update Any changes made to a component are immediately passed on to its associated components using an update.

Structural Elements... The automatic update of all structural elements such as bracing, staircases, etc. is suppressed.

Global Settings


Display

Viewport Here you can set the support of optimum depiction when

working with view windows in the paper area. Without Support – No adaptations are made within the depiction. Only for normal output – The depiction of the shape labelling is e.g. adapted to the depiction scale if dynamic adjustment option has been activated. Complete Support – A complete support of the depiction takes place.

Shape Clipping The active UCS plane (top view) displays the cross-section of the object tapered to it theoretically. This option should be turned on. When this option is switched off, you do not get a correct cross-section top view of an object if it starts below and ends above sectional plane.

Plate Clipping This option is identical with ShapeClipping, but it is only valid for plates.

Suppress... Any shape labelling inserted into the model is hidden if the AutoCAD function “Hide / Shade” is selected.

Global Settings


Cache 2D The result of all line calculations effected by the volume-modeller (e.g. at a 2D-depiction, object snap, etc) is written into an intermediate storage. A new calculation is only made in case of modifications. Thus the processing speed for the determination of auto- object snap-points especially in case of complex construction groups is considerably increased.

Real...shaded Bolts or curved shapes (arcs) are displayed as real objects when the AutoCAD-function “Hide/Shade” is selected. This option should be turned on during normal operation.

Position Flags at Shade All position flags placed in the model will not be hidden when the AutoCAD-function “Hide/Shade” is selected.

Additional Lines at Shade All lines in the model, like center lines, gravity lines or other construction lines will not be hidden when the AutoCAD-function “Hide/Shade” is selected.

Workframe at Shade All work frames within the model will not be hidden when the AutoCAD-function “Hide/Shade” is selected.

Global Settings


Colours 1

Here, you set the colours to be used for the different display

markings and objects of the program by indicating the AutoCAD colour number. Please refer to the corresponding commands for the meaning of the different markings. You can also select the colour in a comfortable way by clicking the corresponding input field and then loading the AutoCAD dialog for colour selection by clicking the SELECT button.

Global Settings


Colours 2

Here, you set the colours to be used for the different display

markings and objects of the program by indicating the AutoCAD colour number. Please refer to the corresponding commands for the meaning of the different markings. You can also select the colour in a comfortable way by clicking the corresponding input field and then loading the AutoCAD dialog for colour selection by clicking the SELECT button.

Global Settings


Dialog Settings

Expert Mode Here, you can configure different display properties in the

dialogs. The following options are available for selection: Beginner, Middle and Expert. This setting has an influence on the display of constructional graphics in the dialogs and more.

Accuracy Here you specify the default settings for the display of lengths, angles and other values. If you enter –1, the AutoCAD-defaults settings will be used.

RollOver Here, you switch on RollOver for the dialogs.

Suppress ToolTips Here, you switch off the auxiliary ToolTips.

Input of Hole Dia You can specify any hole diameter. If this field is not checked, you can only specify hole diameters from a given list.

Dynamic Point Input This option permits dynamic zoom and pan during the picking of points or lines.

Tabs one after the other If there isn’t enough place, the selection tabs for the pages of a dialog are displayed one after the other instead of next to each other.

Global Settings


Key Assignment This field controls the key abbreviations for selecting different commands in the dialogs. Two alternatives are available for selection.

Field is switched off Pick Length DoubleClick Length without Z DoubleClick with SHIFT Pocket Calculator DoubleClick with CTRL Field is switched on Pick Length DoubleClick with CTRL Length without Z DoubleClick with CTRL and SHIFT Pocket Calculator DoubleClick with SHIFT

No Update Switches off the dynamic update in the dialogs. The advantage is during operation in the case of very complex calculating processes. To permit a manual release of update an additional button with an exclamation mark is displayed in the command line of some dialogs.

Coloured Icons For some symbols different colours are displayed instead of the symbols of one colour (blue).

Global Settings


Dialog Settings...Properties

In this dialog, you can specify the default settings for the properties of individual object types in ProSteel 3D. Select the object type in the Selection List. The depiction of the dialog tab will be adopted. Please refer to the descriptions of the different object types for the meaning of the entries.

Global Settings


Configuration Files

The basic configuration of ProSteel 3D is effected via different files which you can see by corresponding selection and which you can edit using the integrated text editor. DELETE TEMPORARY FILES

Click this button to delete any existing files in the temporary directory. By deleting the temporary files, you reset all command dialogs to the original state at delivery.

DELETE TEMPLATES

Click this button to delete all existing data in the template directory. However, please remember that in this case all dialog templates created by you will be irrevocably deleted. Important templates such as

e.g. certain company standards should be saved elsewhere.

ProConcrete Options


A.5 ProConcrete Options

Command Name: PC_OPTION This dialog box and its pages allow you to enter the standard settings for several functions. You access the dialog by selecting the ‘ProConcrete 3D Options button on the ProConcrete 3D Main toolbar.

General Options

Cover Options

Naming Conventions

ProConcrete Options


Concrete Options

Reinforcement Options

Rebar

ProConcrete Options


Stirrup

Colour Options

ProConcrete Options


Bending Schedule

ProConcrete Options


B MODELING AND SCHEDULING

[?replace page in pdf file with Modelling and Scheduling image page?]

ProConcrete Options


Layer Functions

ProConcrete 3D Page B.1 - 1

B.1 Layer Functions

Command Name: PS_LAYER The program is equipped with an automatic layer control. Normally you don’t have to take care of this. If you use the program commands to create different objects such as shapes, dimensions, welding symbols, etc., these are created on their own layer. The activation, deactivation, and switching of layers is one of the most frequently performed tasks when using AutoCAD. ProSteel 3D supplies its own switching functions for this purpose. Switching to the most important layers can be done with just one click, and without long searches. Select the command by clicking its associated button or enter PS_LAYER from the keyboard with the indicated parameter. Work Frame On: LFRAMEON

The layer with the frame for the work area is activated.

Work Frame Off: LFRAMEOFF

The layer with the frame for the work area is deactivated.

Element Layer On: LELEMON

The layers for the main elements are activated. These are the layers for shape, roof/wall shapes, plates, construction lines, and bolts.

Element Layer Off: LELEMOFF

The layers for the main elements are deactivated. These are the layers for shape, roof/wall shapes, plates, construction lines, and bolts.

Layer Functions

Page B.1 - 2 ProConcrete 3D

Additional Layer On: LADDION The layers for the additional elements are activated. These are the layers for dimensioning, midlines, position flags, relative heights, welding symbols, etc.

Additional Layer Off: LADDIOFF

The layers for the additional elements are deactivated. These are the layers for dimensioning, midlines, position flags, relative heights, welding symbols, etc.

Object Layer Current: LOBJECT

The layer for a freely selectable element becomes the current layer. You can select the element by clicking it.

Object Layer Off: LOBJECTOFF

The layer for a freely selectable element is deactivated. You can select the element by clicking it.

Construction Lines Current: LCONSTAKT (black lines)

The layer for the construction lines becomes the current layer.

Construction Lines On: LCONSTON (brown lines)

The layer for the construction lines is activated.

Layer Functions


Construction Lines Off: LCONSTOFF

The layer for the construction lines is deactivated. Layer 0 Current: LNULL The AutoCAD-Layer ‘0’ becomes the current layer.

Layer Functions


Construction Utilities


B.2 Construction Utilities

B.2.1 Construction lines

The program offers several options to create construction lines, divide distances evenly or measure distances which all serve as design and constructional aids. These lines are created on their own layer (default is Ps_const), so that all of them can be jointly hidden or deleted as well.

Direction Determines how the direction of the construction line is

defined.

2 Points You have to pick 2 points.

Line You pick a line.

Point Line You pick a line for direction and a point for position.

Line Type You can either use standard lines the length of which is determined by projection or X-lines which always run up to the edge of the screen.



Distance The distance of the construction line(s) from the displayed line in case of parallel or vertical construction lines; resp. the distance of one line to the other if several lines have been generated.

Scale Distance / spacing information is converted to the scale of your drawing indicated here. This allows actual dimensions to be used.

Angle The construction lines are rotated by the angle indicated here.

Number The number of construction lines or divisions created simultaneously when using the Divide function.

Offset The construction lines are extended at both ends by this value with respect to the displayed reference line.

Only in Plane All construction lines are only created on the current UCS (user coordinate system)-plane. In addition, possible picked points are projected to the current UCS-plane as well.

Create Reference Line A construction line is drawn on the reference line as well (even for a non-existing line indicated with only 2 points).

This creates a construction line parallel towards the current UCS-X-axis, either at the picked point or with the selected distance to the picked reference.

This creates a construction line parallel towards the current UCS-Y-axis, either at the picked point or with the selected distance to the picked reference.

This creates parallel construction lines for a reference line selected or displayed via pick points.

This creates vertical construction lines for a reference line selected or displayed via pick points.

The reference line created by two pick points is divided into equal sections with the help of construction lines running perpendicular to this distance.

A 3D distance is measured and displayed in different variations (see →’Measure’). All construction lines created up to now on the layer are deleted.



Direct Use of Some Settings You may also use selected settings to create construction lines directly and to create construction lines much more rapidly. The number and type of the lines depends on the Number and Line Type settings as described in the previous dialog window regarding construction lines command PS_CONST. The commands remain active until terminated by pressing the ESC-key or the right mouse button. HINT: The construction lines are created only within the current user coordinate system plane. It is best to use them only in the views. PS_CONST_HOR

This command creates a horizontal construction line. Click a point the construction line is to intersect.

PS_CONST_VER

This command creates a vertical construction line. Click a point the construction line is to intersect.

PS_CONST_PAP

This command creates a construction line running parallel with a reference line. First click the reference line and then on a point the construction line is to intersect.

PS_CONST_PAE

This command creates a construction line running parallel with a reference line using a specified distance. First enter the desired distance and then click the reference line. Finally, click the side of the reference line along which the parallel line is to be created.

PS_CONST_SAP

This command creates a perpendicular construction line for a reference line. Click the reference line and then on a point the construction line is to intersect.



PS_CONST_SAE

With distance: This command creates a perpendicular construction line for a reference line using a specified distance from the reference point. First enter the desired distance and then click the reference line. Finally, click the reference point and then on the side of the reference point where the perpendicular line is to be created.

PS_CONST_DVD

This command divides a reference line into equal segments and creates corresponding perpendicular construction lines along this line (also utilizing the start and end point). First enter the number of sections and then click the reference line.

PS_CONST_DEL This command deletes all construction lines drawn up to then on the layer created for the construction lines.



B.2.2 Measure of distances

Choose the Measure command if you would like to measure a distance. Then click two points, which returns the following dialog box showing a few measurement results.

The area ‘UCS Coordinates’ shows the measuring results regarding the current user coordinate system!

Start or End X, Y, Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points.

Dist X, Y, Z is the distance in the direction of the respective coordinate axis.

Dist Direct is the direct distance of the points.

Angle is the angle from the start to end point in reference to the user coordinate x-axis.

The section ‘WCS Coordinates’ shows the measuring results regarding the current world coordinate system.

Start or End X, Y, Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points in the WCS and Cos X, Y, Z is the so-called ‘directional cosine’ of the vector from start to end point (a mathematical size which normally hasn't any further meaning for you).



3D Component Part Views


B.3 3D Component Part Views

B.3.1 Object View / Object-UCS

The object view is a very important tool because it allows you to look at nearly any ProSteel 3D-object from a certain direction. The object view command is used to align the UCS plane on an object, which results in a perpendicular view on this plane. The origin of the UCS can either be perpendicular from the pick point to the centerline or be situated at the pick point itself. This depends on the selected setting ‘Object View’ or ‘Centered Object View’. The object is aligned in such a way as to center the pick point on the screen and align its insertion direction parallel to the X-axis, which means that a shape inserted into a work frame at a slant is displayed as running horizontally, and the surrounding work frame is rotated accordingly. HINT: If the view does not match the model position select the command again (e.g., using the right mouse button with the context menu) and confirm immediately with RETURN. The view is aligned. Alternatively, you can keep the ALT-key pressed while selecting the view direction. Thus, the view is forced to align as well. The command ‘Object-UCS’ runs similar to the command ‘Object-View’. In contrast to object view however, this command only sets the UCS on the selected view direction. The view itself is not modified.



The following message appears in the command line after the command ‘Object View’ has been selected: Pick the steel component defining the view or hit RETURN to align the view. After part selection, coloured coordinate crosshairs are displayed on the selected component and the following message appears in the command line: Select the desired axis. Now use your mouse to click the corresponding coloured circle and the object view is displayed with the selected direction.

You want an object view on front. Pick the shape while keeping the ALT-key pressed, clicking one of these lines on the front,...

..and coordinate crosshairs appear at the pick point. You can now select the matching colour by clicking it.

The view is displayed, the UCS’s origin is aligned and parallel with the front.



B.3.2 Surface View / Surface-UCS

In principle, this command is an object view; thus you can refer to the above chapter for the basic description. In contrast to the object view that only allows 6 possible view directions (rectangular or parallel to shape direction), the surface view offers you the option to look on each surface of the component part. In case of special shapes with sloping surfaces it is easier to obtain the suitable view. The picture below shows you an example of a surface view: By clicking the displayed line (component edge), you can get a view on the surface 1 or 2.

When you select the function, you first have to click the desired component part at a bordering edge between two surfaces. Then the coordinate crosshairs are displayed at this position and you can select the desired view by clicking an axis. If you have selected the command PS_FACE_VIEW_CEN, the origin of the view is situated in the middle of the clicked line.

Change only UCS Similar to the command Object-UCS you can only set the current UCS on the desired surface view as well without modifying the actual view. Here, too you can choose between the picked and the centred origin.



B.3.3 Global View

This command shows the 3D model in a global view display. The default is an isometric display of the model diagonally from the right front. However, four other global view variants with their own direct calls are possible as well: PS_GLOBAL_VIEW2 ... PS_GLOBAL_VIEW5. The global views are freely definable similar to the AutoCAD input “Apoint” for the view in the program configuration file ps_st3d.cfg and initially indicated with default values. Configuration File Excerpt ...(other entries)

1VIEWX=0.66 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR X AXIS 1VIEWY=-1.33 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Y AXIS 1VIEWZ=0.66 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Z AXIS 2VIEWX=-0.46 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR X AXIS 2VIEWY=-1.33 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Y AXIS 2VIEWZ=0.66 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Z AXIS

(other entries)... The numbers placed in front of the view refer to the number of the command or button, i.e., _VIEW, _VIEW2 to _VIEW5.



B.3.4 Top View

The top view command is identical with the AutoCAD command “vpoint 0,0,1” , i.e. you are viewing the current UCS-plane vertically. This command switches to the true model top view from within the global view. It does not have a function in the other views because you already view the plane vertically. Remember the difference between this top view and the top view used for a work frame with roof:

B.3.5 Free View

The ’Free View’ command creates a model view where you select a source and target point. The view then presented appears to be from your source point to the target point. The following message appears in the command line after the command ‘Free View’ has been selected: Select the target point of the line of vision direction. Now you determine the target point by entering the coordinates or by clicking it. The following message appears in the command line: Select the source point of the line of vision direction. Specify the source point by entering the coordinates or by clicking it and the view is visible on the screen. The cutting plane command is activated. Changing the distances is not possible here and can only be done using the global settings of ProSteel 3D.



B.3.6 Cutting Plane

Working with a 3D model can quickly turn complex, especially if many parts are spatially stacked. ProSteel 3D offers a command to hide parts in front of and behind the current work plane – the cutting plane. This facilitates the design process since only those objects are visible that are close to the same work plane and prevents the accidental manipulation of stacked shapes. When selecting one of the defined views or an object view, such objects are automatically hidden, provided that you have not turned off this command globally. Sometimes it is however also reasonable to look at all component parts of the model in the depth – to have an overall orientation. This is the reason why this function can be switched on and off.

Principle of Cutting Planes When the function ‘Cut Plane’ is active, only those parts of the work frame are shown that are located within the limits of the cut plane distance. The cut plane distance is the distance between imaginary delimitation in front of and behind the active UCS plane.

Off The cut plane command is deactivated.

All component parts are shown. When switching to another view, the command is activated again, provided that it has not been turned off globally.



On The cut plane command is activated. Only those component parts that are located within the delimitation are shown. If the command has been turned off globally, it is turned on again when switching to another view.

Flip The cut plane command is alternately switched on or off globally. This command makes sense when you do not want to work with the cut plane command for a long time.

Distance Input of the cut plane distances First enter the rear distance and then the front distance. When you enter the distance 0, no cut planes are created. When switching to one of the standard views, these values are overwritten.

3D-model of a stage construction in the global view (Object-) view on the upper stage frame with switched on cut plane command (standard setting) (Object-) view on the upper stage frame with switched off cut plane command



B.3.7 Perspective View

3D-design usually utilizes the isometric 3D depiction. This means that a line located very far back appears to be as long on the screen as the distance located further to the front. In reality, however, distances appear to shrink the farther they are removed from an object. This effect can be simulated with the perspective view. The perspective view is a form of free view using a fictional camera. You are prompted for the position of source point (camera) and target point (motif, centre of picture) and this determine the line of vision. The parameter Focal Distance is used to indicate - as in photography - the focus of the camera. Larger values are used to zoom the object as if using a telephoto lens. Smaller values create a wide-angle effect. The parameter Distance is used to subsequently change the distance to the target point and move back and forth along the indicated line of vision. If you select the command, the following message appears in the command line: Select the desired function Off/Distance/Focal Distance/ <Set>. You can now select a function or select the command directly using the corresponding button: Set The perspective view is activated.

This requires that you first enter the target and source point of the view and then the focal distance of the camera. The program switches now to the perspective view.

Off The perspective view is deactivated. The program switches now back to the isometric view.

Focal Distance Here you can change the focal distance of the camera.

Distance Here you change the distance of the camera from the target point.

Lines of vision changes are only possible using coordinates and the pick function is deactivated. Changing to the model global view does not yield the desired result until the perspective view is deactivated again.



Remember that the perspective view is only a display view and does not allow any changes. For that, switch back to the isometric display. In the following, you will see some examples of the difference between the perspective and the isometric display as well as the effect of the focal distance on the isometric display: Isometric Display

3D Global View Isometric Display The point down on the left (0,0,0) is also the point of origin of the world coordinate system.

Front View Isometric Display You see a view with the settings Target point = (5000,0,5000) Source point = (5000,-100,5000)



Perspective Display

Front View Perspective View Focal distance = 50 The source and target points are first set identically to the points of the isometric view. However, since the picture is much too large, the distance from camera to target is increased to 30000. This corresponds with the source point (5000,-30000,5000).

Front View Perspective View Focal distance = 100 The focal distance of the camera is increased but the picture shows only a section of the results.

Move and Copy Parts


B.4 Move and Copy Parts

The notes about the AutoCAD standard commands mention the fact that ProSteel 3D objects are treated as AutoCAD elements, and can be copied or moved the same way. This is correct, but the ProSteel 3D copy and move commands offer you additional help by offering the option of limiting the direction of the move. Apart from that, you can specifically take the group structure into consideration. Using AutoCAD object snaps in a view may result in points being selected that are not in the proper plane. The ProSteel 3D copy and move commands prevent this by limiting the direction of the move to the current user coordinate system plane or even to one axis direction. If several individual components have been assembled into construction modules or groups, this command can be used to process the entire group by selecting just one part of the group. This will eliminate unnecessary searching and collecting of the parts within a selection set. After the command has been selected, a dialog box will become available featuring the following options, each single tab permitting a certain action.

This button carries out the selected action for single parts

without taking into consideration a possible group.

This button carries out the action for complete groups. In the options, you can specify whether this selection has to be made only when the main part is picked or for each part of the group.

Move and Copy Parts


B.4.1 Move/Copy

Alignment Here, you select the move direction of the actions. A cone shows you the move direction. 3D – The selected elements can be moved in all three dimensions. 2D – The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the current UCS-plane. This means that shapes are only moved within this UCS-plane. X-Axis - The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the X-axis of the current UCS-plane. This means that shapes are only moved parallel to the X-axis within this UCS-plane. Y-Axis - The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the Y-axis of the current UCS-plane. This means that shapes are only moved parallel to the Y-axis within this UCS-plane. Z-Axis - The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the Z-axis of the current UCS-plane. This means that shapes are only moved in vertical direction to this UCS-plane. Free – You can move the selected elements in any of the three dimensions. The elements “drag” with the crosshairs and thus can be visibly moved.

Multiple The elements can be moved several times.

Move and Copy Parts


B.4.2 Turn

Axis Here, you select the desired rotation axis.

Free Axis – The rotation axis can be determined by clicking two points. Object Axis – One of the (parallel) coordinate axes of the element UCS is specified as the rotation axis. By specifying a starting point after selection of the parts you can move it in parallel direction.

Object Axis Here, you select the desired part axis if the ‘Object Axis’ option has been specified. The selected axis is displayed at the object selected first in colour for your orientation.

Angle Specify the rotation angle. Select either one of the defined angles or the ‘Free’ field for indication of any rotation angle you like.

Turn+Copy A copy of the component parts is created first which then will be turned. Otherwise, the original parts are rotated to the new position.

Move and Copy Parts


B.4.3 Mirror

Method Enter the desired mirror plane here.

2-Points – You can determine the plane by clicking two points. The mirror plane is then perpendicular to the current view and aligned with this line (for this purpose, it is best to use a perpendicular view of the component). 3 Points – The plane is indicated by clicking three points in space.

Mirror+Copy A copy of the component parts are created first which then will be mirrored. Otherwise, the original parts will be mirrored.

Move and Copy Parts


B.4.4 Align

Use this command to align a component or an entire construction group in respect to a certain plane or coordinate system. Specify two coordinate systems, which are then aligned congruently with one another. The calculated required movement and rotation are applied to the selected parts. You can determine the coordinate systems either by specifying three points for each one or via element surfaces. There, the point of origin is always regarded as the bottom point of the surface.

Method Determine the two planes either by specifying three points or

via part surfaces.

Align+Copy A copy of the component parts is created first which will be aligned afterwards. Otherwise, the original parts will be aligned.

Surface Method When applying the surface method, you can only make use of one element. Select the element at an edge neighbouring the desired surface. Then, you obtain a coloured display of the surfaces available for selection. The target surface is selected similar.

Move and Copy Parts


3 Point Method If ‘3-Point’ was selected, specify the original position after object selection by clicking the origin as well as a point on the X- and Y-axis as a reference position. Then indicate the desired new position by clicking the origin as well as a point on the X- and Y-axis. The parts are then aligned according to the specifications with the origin points being identical. The example below shows how the left shape was aligned on the right shape as a copy. It is moved and rotated at the same time.

Move and Copy Parts


B.4.5 Clone

Use this command to transfer the manipulations performed on a component or an entire construction group to other components. A prerequisite for cloning is that the parts have a position number and that these match. The manipulations are transferred in such a way that all components are identical again after the transfer has been concluded. However, there is the option to limit the manipulations to be transferred to certain types such as only drill holes, etc. For example, use this command to apply the same modifications within a model at a later time. For example, if a hangar has been constructed with many identical supports and holes have to be added later to each support, they may be added to just one support and then transferred to all of the others.

Cuts All normal cuts are transferred. This includes the mitred cuts

as well.

Drill Holes All drilled holes are transferred.

PolyCut All poly-cuts are transferred.

Notches All outlets are transferred.

Boolean All Boolean operations are transferred.

Move and Copy Parts


When you start this action, you first have to select the component with the manipulations to be transferred. Then select the components, which are to accept the manipulations. However, only parts with the same position number as the original part will be considered. Please remember that the transfer of the manipulations refers to the coordinate system of the parts. For example, if you look at a shape whose parts coordinate system has its origin on the right side and you would like to transfer a drill hole to a part 100 mm from the right but its parts coordinate system originates from the left, this component will receive the new boring 100 mm from the left as well.

Move and Copy Parts


B.4.6 Rotate

This command permits a rotated copy with vertical offset to distribute e.g. the steps of a spiral staircase. Two methods can be applied. The number of steps and the angle between the steps, or by an angle area and the steps to be distributed within this area either/or defines the rotation.

Method Defines the kind of distribution.

Number Either the total amount or the number via the angle area.

Angle Either the angle between the steps or the complete angle.

Vertical Offset Vertical offset between the different elements.

The construction on the left has been created by rotating the flat steel around the central tube.

Move and Copy Parts


B.4.7 Settings

Swap Effect The meaning of the ALT-key during selection of the parts is changed. If these functions are directly selected via the menu, normally the selection as single parts is activated. If you keep the ALT-key pressed during selection, this has the effect that as group is selected.

Group only... The selection as complete group is only effected if the main part has been selected. Otherwise the selection is made at any part of a group.Display / Assign parts

Display / Assign parts


B.5 Display / Assign parts

B.5.1 Hide

This command can be used to hide components or whole groups, which means that the parts are made invisible, and cannot be selected. This command permits you to hide only selected components or to show only selected components and to hide all others. This provides a clearer view of the model. HINT: This command is most practical if individual parts are to be hidden from view. To hide/show entire groups of parts it is better to use display classes feature. PS_Hide

Select the parts to be hidden after selecting the command. The parts are no longer visible after pressing the ENTER key or using the right mouse button. The command →’Regenerate’ (not to be confused with the AutoCAD-command “Regenerate”) will switch all parts back to visible.

PS_Hide_Exclude

This function is working just the other way round than the previous one. After selecting the command, you can choose the parts which you don’t want to hide. After pressing the ENTER key or using the right mouse button, all other parts are hidden.

PS_Hide_Group

This function is working like PS_HIDE. The only difference is that the whole group is hidden, if you only selected one part of the group.

PS_Hide_Group_Exclude

This function is working like PS_HIDE_EXCLUDE. The only difference is that the whole group remains visible, if you only selected one part of the group.



B.5.2 Regenerate

Command Name: PS_REGEN This command shows all components hidden by the user or hidden automatically by the program. You have to use this command, for example, to generate a parts list since all processed parts are automatically hidden there for control purposes. This command is not identical with the AutoCAD-command “Regenerate” since the AutoCAD command does not reactivate the components again.



B.5.3 Display Classes

You can organize ProSteel 3D-objects from different layers into ”Display Classes”, which are independent of the AutoCAD layers. Contrary to the command →’Hide’ , which forces you to select all parts individually, here you can select entire object groups and make them visible or hidden. This will simplify the view of the model displayed on screen. For example, bracings, bay rails, curtain walls, etc. could each be assigned to a display class and displayed or hidden as needed. Each element can exist in only one class at a time. This means that it will be removed from one class if it is assigned to another. After selection of the command, the following dialog opens.

Class Name The available display classes are listed and the desired class

may be selected. The value of Status indicates if the elements are currently shown (On) or hidden (Off).

You can edit the content by double-clicking the field Class Name.



Status Here, you see the current status of a display class. You can modify the status by double-clicking on it. It is also possible to highlight several lines and to carry out the modification for all highlighted lines.

This button permits to hide parts without creating an assignment to a display class. See PS_HIDE

Click this button to show all individually hidden parts again. See PS_REGEN.

The elements of the selected display class are hidden.

This command shows the elements of the selected display class.

This command hides the elements of all other display classes except for the selected ones.

This command shows the elements of all other display classes except for the selected ones.

Click on this button to assign elements to a display class. The desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the button, select the elements to be assigned to the display class in the model.

Click on this button to remove elements from a display class. The desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the button, select the elements to be removed from the display class in the model.

Complete Groups If this field is checked, the complete group will be selected at selection of elements, even if you select only one part of this group.



B.5.4 Area Classes

ProSteel 3D objects may also be assigned to one of the “Area Classes” in addition to the display classes. While the display classes serve to present the 3D constructions in a clearly arranged manner, the area classes are better suited for a logical structuring of the model into construction sections or similar divisions. These “Area Classes” can be used as selection and sorting criteria during the detailing process. Each element can exist in only one of these area classes. This means that it will be removed from one class if it is assigned to another. Area and display classes are completely independent from one another. The function works similar to the display classes. Area classes can be hidden as well. Please note that in case of overlapping with the display classes the last carried out action will be valid. This means if you hide parts with display classes, they can be displayed again by means of assigned and displayed area classes.



B.5.5 Part Families

The part families are another structuring variant of the construction. The belonging to family classes permits an automatic allocation of position number prefixes as well as a differentiation of the constructive groups by different colours. In addition, components belonging to one family class can have a common detail style for detailing. Each element can exist only in one family class. This means if it is assigned to another family class, it will be removed from its former family class. New is the possibility to assign certain colours and line types for detailing to the members of a part family. For example, you can assign another colour to the girders of a 2D-depiction than that assigned to the supports.

Display List The currently available family classes are listed as well as the

linked defaults of colour, prefix etc.

Single Parts If you click on a button of this line, the parts are treated as single parts at selection. In this mode, all data of the family classes will be adopted into the components.

Groups If you click on a button of this line, only the component groups are treated at selection of the parts. In this mode, only the prefixes of the family classes will be adopted for the position number of the group.

Both If you click on a button of this line, both the single parts and the groups are treated at selection of the parts.



Click on these buttons to assign elements to a part family. The desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the buttons, select the elements to be assigned to the family class in the model.

Click on these buttons to remove elements from a part family. The desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the buttons, select the elements to be removed from the family class in the model

Click on these buttons to transfer the modifications of the entries in the part family to the component parts. After clicking the buttons, select the elements to be updated in the model.

By double-clicking on a line, you can modify the definition of the part family.



Defining Part Families or Changing Properties Up to 64 different family classes may be defined, to which the components may be assigned. To create a class, just double-click an empty list entry. A dialog opens where you can define the properties. The same method applies to changing the properties of an existing entry.

Description: Enter the name of your part family here. The entry appears in

the selection list and the part properties.

Pos Prefix: Here, you enter the pos. prefix, which appears in front of each position number itself if the part belongs to this family.

Colour Enter the colour of the part family here. Indicate the AutoCAD colour number or select it by clicking the SELECT button.

Detail Style Enter the detail style to be assigned to a component part belonging to this family. Enter the name of the detail style or select it by clicking the SELECT button. Note that assigning detail styles normally should be done inside the Detail Center. If the Detail Center is open, the component part list has to be updated after modification of shape properties.



Select Line Type Here, you specify the line type determined for the 2D-depiction. The settings can be defined individually for visible, invisible and center lines.

Detail Colour Here you specify the colour to be used for 2D-depiction of the selected line.

Line Type Here, you specify the line type to be used for 2D-depiction of the selected line.

Please note that the 2D line settings are only activated if the component parts are displayed in 2D. These settings don’t have any effects on the model display.



B.5.6 Search Parts

Command Name: PS_SEARCH Use this command to search for parts and components within a model, which meet certain requirements. You can define several conditions, which have to be met at the same time. If these conditions are met, the part is either marked or all parts not meeting the requirements are hidden.

Fields This list displays the search terms available to you by clicking

them.

Operator Select the respective condition operator between search term and comparison value.

Compare Value Here you indicate the value that has to be filled. Only values existing in the drawing are offered. In case of names, you can also indicate an asterisk (*) for any other characters such as e.g. HE* for HEA,HEB etc.

Buttons Use the following buttons to combine the filter condition with different logical operators.

Complete Filter Condition Here, the complete filter expression is displayed after insertion of all filter conditions. You can reset or restore the last step using the buttons or you can delete the complete filter condition.



Specifications Select the action which has to be carried out with the found parts.

Mark If this field is checked, all parts satisfying the search condition are marked in colour. Use the command ’Global Settings / colours’ to specify what colours to apply.

Hide If this field is checked all parts not satisfying the search condition are hidden. The hidden parts become visible again using the command ‘Regenerate‘.

Zoom If this field is checked, all parts satisfying the search condition are automatically zoomed. A dialog opens permitting you to indicate the display size (zoom factor) and to make an iteration of the different found parts using the keys << and >>.

Condition List This list displays the current search conditions linked with

AND.

Click this button to add a search condition formed from the selected search term, operator and comparison value to the condition list.

Click this button to start the search. First, you have to select all objects to be included in the search, then the result will be highlighted or hidden, depending on your choice.



Define Search Condition A search condition always consists of the search term (e.g. length), the condition operator (e.g. >= for “greater than or equal”), and a comparison value (e.g. 2000). For example, if you would like to find all IPE shapes with a length between 1000 and 3000 millimeters, you need to define the following search condition: NAME = IPE* (for IPE80,IPE100 etc.) (and) LENGTH >= 1000 (Length greater than or equal 1000) (and) LENGTH <= 3000 (Length smaller than or equal 3000) Placeholders when Searching for Descriptions * Any other characters (blank spaces as well)

? Exactly one character you like in this specific position

# Exactly one numerical character you like in this specific position (0-9)

@ Exactly one alphabetical character you like in this specific position (aA-zZ)

Work Frames


B.6 Work Frames

B.6.1 ProConcrete Work Frames

Command Name: PC_WORKFRAME Any ProConcrete 3D model generation is started with the creation of one or several Work Frames. These Work Frames aid 3D orientation because they can display the basic system dimensions (e.g. axes dimensions) as design aid objects, and automatically create the associated UCS systems of the views created by defining the Work Frame. A simple click of the mouse will change the view.

Work Frames


Basic Type ProConcrete 3D for AutoCAD offers the parametric creation of rectangular Work Frames (grid system) that can include typical concrete structures. Automatically created ProConcrete 3D Work Frames can currently only be of a rectangular shape, but can include as many gridlines as needed. Gridlines must be at 90 degree angles to each other. The Work Frame grid dimensions can be typed into the relevant parts of the ProConcrete 3D Work Frame dialog box, or you can pick previously drawn AutoCAD lines to form the Work Frame. Basic structures can be added automatically when using the ProConcrete 3D Work Frame command. This structure can include all concrete Columns (at Grid intersections), Beams, Floors, Walls, Footing Pads and Strip Footings. You have full control over the size of these concrete members. All concrete members as well as the Work Frame grid lines are automatically placed on suitable Layers, giving you full control over what is actually visible on the screen and in your finished drawings. Individual elements within a completed ProConcrete 3D Work Frame can be edited or deleted after completion of the Work Frame.

Work Frames


B.6.2 Building a Single Work Frame

Structure Name It is possible to create multiple ProConcrete 3D Work Frames

and their associated UCS systems within one model drawing. This requires a different group name (Structure name) for each Work Frame system.

Dimensions and Grids

Length Specify the length of the Work Frame and its longitudinal division. If the Length input field is activated, you define the length by means of the overall length and the number of regular fields. If the field is not activated, the fields can be defined individually by specification of the width for each individual field. Please also refer to the hints at the end of this section.

Width The Work Frame width is determined in a similar manner as was the length.

Height The Work Frame height is determined in a similar manner as was the length.

Create by Line

Work Frames


View Name Allows input of a view name when manually creating a Work Frame by line method.

Options

Create by Line Selecting this option allows you to manually create a Work Frame by line method.

Ascending Level

Display Main Grids Selecting this option displays grid lines and grid bubbles, created automatically by the Work Frame command. These are placed on the AutoCAD layer PS_OBJECT.

Display Auxiliary Grids Selecting this option displays grid lines and grid bubbles, created manually when selecting the Create by Line option. These are placed on the AutoCAD layer PS_OBJECT.

Work Frames


B.6.3 Create Views

Use this command to create views on all surfaces directly. You can directly select them later using the command PS_SETUCS. Depending on the selected form, some options are not available.

Create Views

Front View A view on the front view is created.

Left Side A view on the left side view is created.

Top View A view on the horizontal roof area is created.

Back View A view on the back side is created.

Right Side A view on the right side view is created.

Bottom View An underside view is created.

Longitudinal Views A view is created for each X-direction grid.

Transverse Views A view is created for each Y-direction grid.

Plan Views A view upon the plan area is created.

Height Axis A view is created for each Z-direction grid.

Work Frames


Dimensions with Coordinates For the grids, the values are additionally added to the name.

Plan View Label Since several work frames may be inserted into one drawing, these have to be equipped with their own code. The Plan View label is placed in front of all views.

Elevation View Label Since several work frames may be inserted into one drawing, these have to be equipped with their own code. The Elevation View label is placed in front of all views.

Clipping Plan Distances

The views can automatically hide all elements situated outside a certain distance.

Front Specify the distance from the front clipping plane to the work frame.

Back Specify the distance from the back clipping plane to the work frame.

Work Frames


B.6.4 Elements

Use this tab to specify the creation of required elements within the work frame.

Create Elements

Create External Columns Select this option when external columns are required.

Create Internal Columns Select this option when internal columns are required.

Create External Beams Select this option when external beams are required.

Create Internal Beams Select this option when internal beams are required.

Create Floors Select this option when floors are required. This option is only available when external beams are to be created.

Create Walls Select this option when walls are required.

Create Pad Footings Select this option when pad footings are required. This option is only available when columns are to be created.

Create Strip Footings Select this option when strip footings are required. This option is only available when walls are to be created.

Work Frames


B.6.5 Columns and Beams

Columns

External Columns

Width Enter the column width here.

Depth Enter the column depth here.

Start Offset Enter the start offset here.

End Offset Enter the end offset here.

Rectangular Specify the cross section type as rectangular.

Circular Specify the cross section type as circular.

Material Select the material of the external columns here.

Cast Type Select the method by which the concrete is cast.

Center-Line Select this option to centralise the columns on the work frame lines.

Work Frames


Internal Columns

Width Enter the column width here.

Depth Enter the column depth here.

Start Offset Enter the start offset here.

End Offset Enter the end offset here.

Rectangular Specify the cross section type as rectangular.

Circular Specify the cross section type as circular.

Material Select the material of the external columns here.


Beams

External Beams

Width Enter the beam width here.

Depth Enter the beam depth here.

Material Select the material of the external beams here.

Work Frames



Insert Options Select the insertion position of the beam relative to the work frame lines.

Internal Beams

Width Enter the beam width here.

Depth Enter the beam depth here.

Material Select the material of the internal beams here.

Cast Type Select the method by which the concrete is cast

Construction Related Values

Seating Specify the length of beam seating on the column.

Work Frames


B.6.6 Floors and Walls

Floors

Upper Floors

Thickness Enter the upper floor thickness here.

Offset Specify the offset distance from the work frame line.

Material Select the material of the upper floor here.

Base Floor

Thickness Enter the ground floor thickness here.


Walls

Work Frames


Walls

Thickness Enter the wall thickness here.

Material Select the material of the walls here.


Work Frames


B.6.7 Foundations

External Pad Footings

Width Enter the footing pad width here.

Depth Enter the footing pad depth here.

Length Enter the footing pad length here.

Top of Pad Enter the distance from the work frame line to the top of the pad.

Material Select the material of the footings here.

Internal Pad Footings




Top of Pad Enter the distance from the work frame line to the top of the pad.

Work Frames


Strip Footings

Width Enter the strip footing width here.

Depth Enter the strip footing depth here.


Top of Footing Enter the distance from the work frame line to the top of the footing.

Material Select the material of the footings here.

B.6.8 Axis Names

The settings for the axis names can be made separately for X- and Y-axis. We will only describe one axis here. The names can be generated automatically or you can add a name to each axis individually.

Work Frames


Layout

Depiction 123/ABC - Choose the axis name type. The designations may either be numerical (123) or alphanumerical (ABC). Text, Circle... – Here you specify the depiction of the text. The text can either be displayed just as it is or with the selected border. If you have selected ‘Block’ depiction, you may use an own text design. Please refer to Blocks for more detailed information.

Connection Line A line is drawn from the corresponding edge of the work frame to the text.

Position

Descending Normally, axis labelling is effected in increasing order, e.g. 1,2,3, etc. This option has the opposite effect.

Back The axes can be attached either in front or at the back, or on the left or on the right.

Values

Start Value indicates the start of automatic axes names.

Size The text size is specified. At blocks it is defined by the attribute size.

Distance indicates the distance of the text to the edge of the work frame.

Ignore first axis When frames are used, the axes names can overlap. This option suppresses the display of the first axis.

Ignore last axis When frames are used, the axes names can overlap. This option suppresses the display of the last axis.

Avoid O and I When alphanumerical axes names are used, you can refrain from using I and O to avoid any possibility of confusion.

Options

2 Lines Main and subordinate axes are displayed in 2 lines.

Dynamic The axes names are always adapted to the corresponding view direction. Thus, good readability will be guaranteed at any time.

Work Frames


B.6.9 Options

No Lines The work frame doesn’t create any inner lines.

Lock Layer The layer for the view elements is locked.

Text Style Select the text style for axis labelling.

Line Type Select the line type for the connection lines of work frame edges and axes names.

Text Scale The axes names are scaled using this factor.

Colours The colours of the different work frame elements can be selected freely. Either enter the colour number directly or check the corresponding field and use the left button for dialog selection. All colours are reset to default with the right button.

Work Frames


B.6.10 User Defined Blocks

You can also use your own block definitions instead of circles and rectangular for bordering the axis names. They have to be equipped with attributes, which then are replaced by the actual axes names. For more detailed information about creation of user-defined blocks, please refer to the chapter Adaptations in this manual.

From File Only blocks are used which have already been defined in this

drawing.

DWG Blocks Blocks of external drawings are used. They are loaded unless existing.

Block path The path from which the blocks can be loaded.

Block name X The selected block for the axes names in X-direction.

Block name Y The selected block for the axes names in Y-direction.

Work Frames


B.6.11 Assignment

Element Select the required element type here. You will need to specify

the element assignments from the list, for each element type you have selected on the Elements tab.

Detail Style If detailing styles have been defined, you can set them here.

Display Class If display classes have been defined, you can set them here.

Area Class If area classes have been defined, you can set them here.

Part Family If family classes have been defined, you can set them here. The selection of the family class can influence the colour of the part.

Description If general parts descriptions have been defined, you can set them here. The selection of the description can influence the colour and the layer.

Layer Here, you can specify on which layer the shapes have to be filed.

Work Frames


B.6.12 ProSteel Work Frames

Any ProSteel 3D model generation is started with the creation of one or several work frames. These work frames aid 3D orientation because they can display the basic system dimensions (e.g. axes dimensions) as design aid objects, and automatically create the associated UCS systems of the views created by defining the work frame. A simple click of the mouse will change the view.

Basic Types Before defining a work frame, first decide basic shape desired. The following choices are possible: - Rectangular work frames - Cylindrical (also conical) work frames - Wedge-shaped work frames - Pyramidal work frames

Work Frames


B.6.13 Rectangular Work Frame

Workframe-Layout Here you specify the design of the desired work frame.

Length Specify the length of the work frame and its longitudinal division. If the Length input field is activated, you define the length by means of the overall length and the number of regular fields. If the field is not activated, the fields can be defined individually by specification of the width for each individual field. Please also refer to the hints at the end of this section.

Width The work frame width is determined similar to the length.

Height The work frame height is determined similar to the length.

Absolute Normally, you enter the height of the different fields. If this field has been checked, the list data define absolute height values.

Axis Descriptions Axes labels are added according to the settings in the text pages.

Insert Position Defines the insertion position of the work frame related to the insertion point.

Roof Angle If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work frame, you can enter the roof slope in degrees.

Centre Height If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work frame, you can enter the ridge height.

Work Frames


Ridge Width If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work frame, you can enter the ridge width. If it is 0 or equal to the width of the work frame, only a roof surface will be created.

Asymmetrical Divisions To simplify the input of asymmetrical work frames, you can choose a special kind of input. The following dialog opens when you keep the ALT-key pressed while activating one of the three list values:

In the input field, you can either indicate the different fields separated by a comma or repeated sections by number*distance. This simplifies the input of complex divisions. Keeping CTRL-key pressed while activating one of the three list fields, you will delete the whole field definition in this dimension. Existing field definitions cannot be modified using this method. They will be completely overwritten.

Insert Work Frame After selecting the ’Work Frame’ command, click the point of origin of the work frame or enter this value in the form of coordinates. Just pressing the right mouse button causes the point (0,0,0) to be accepted as point of origin. Finally, indicate the spatial position by specifying the X-axis of the work frame. Pressing the right mouse button causes the current UCS X-axis to be accepted as alignment. The dialog box for the work frame opens and you can select one of the different types.

Work Frames


The entries of the dialogs above result in the following display of a ProSteel 3D work frame in AutoCAD (no additional rotation):

Several Work Frames within One Model You can define as many different work frames within one model as desired, which are then distinguished from each other by their group names. This group name is a prefix preceding the view name, e.g. hangar_TOP and platform_TOP (with 'hangar' and 'platform' being the group names specified by you). This makes it possible to set and specify all-important areas of the project even before the 3D model is built and access them easily using the PS_SETUCS view selection.

With asymmetrical length division L=15000, B=8000,H=5000 X-axis: axis 1 Y-axis: axis A Z-axis: perpendicular to axis A/1 Origin: Axis A/1, Height H=0

A platform with the dimensions 3000 x 3000 and the height 1500 is to be inserted as displayed. The coordinates of the origin are set to y=0, x=5000, z=0 and the group name is ‘platform’ – the other settings match the size and sections. The axes are not displayed although this is possible.

Work Frames


When selecting the views to be created, the overlapping views of the same work plane of other work frames may be omitted because normally they are of no further use for you (when selecting the corresponding plane, you will see the whole view). In connection with the object-oriented feature of ProSteel 3D there are good reasons for creating these views. It is e.g. possible to move the complete work frame and this view is perhaps missing. However, if the above picture corresponds to the reality, you can omit the front and right side view of the platform because the ‘hangar’ work frame already provides them.

Work Frames are Objects One of the great strengths of ProSteel 3D is its object-orientation; and work frames are good examples of this! This means that previously created work frames can be modified and manipulated using the standard AutoCAD commands. You can move, rotate, etc. the work frame or even just partial views – the displayed work planes - and the correct UCS settings ‘listen to every word’. If a view is selected, you will see the expected view. The associated UCS system has adjusted itself to the movement of the object. Additionally, you can subsequently set up individual cutting planes for each work plane and effect other modifications using the context menu “Change PS Properties”. Please remember: The frame layer has to be unlocked for any changes to take effect!

The platform is moved and the entire work frame 'hangar' and 'platform' is rotated. Click on the 3D-grid via "Change Properties", and the divisions or even the basic shape of the frame can be modified.

Work Frames


B.6.14 Cylindrical Work Frame

Base Bottom cylinder radius

Top Radius Top cylinder radius

Height You can specify the height of the work frame similar to the height of the rectangular dimension.

Segmentation This input field indicates the number of circle segments into which the cylinder is divided.

All further options correspond to those of the rectangular work frame. Please refer to this chapter for more detailed information.

Work Frames


B.6.15 Wedge-Shaped Work Frame

At left The top of the triangle is modified to the left.


Work Frames


B.6.16 Pyramidal Work Frame

Roof Length indicates the length of the roof.

Ridge Width indicates the width of the ridge.


Work Frames


B.6.17 Create Views

Use this command to create views on all surfaces directly. You can directly select them later using the command PS_SETUCS. Depending on the selected form, some options are not available.

Front View A view on the front view is created.

Side View R A view on the right side view is created.

Side View L A view on the left side view is created.

Back View A view on the back side is created.

Top View A view on the horizontal roof area is created.

Underside View An underside view is created.

Roof View R A view upon the right roof area is created, if this option is activated.

Roof View L A view on the left roof area is created, if this option is activated.

Length Axis A view is created for each created axis into the depth.

Width Axis A view is created for each created axis into the width.

Height Axis A view is created for each created axis into the height.

Work Frames


Use Axis Descriptions You can either select standardized names such as X_1,X_2 for length and width axes or you can use the specified axes names.

Height with Coordinates For the height axes, the heights are additionally added to the name.

Group Name Since several work frames may be inserted into one drawing, these have to be equipped with their own code. The group name is placed in front of all views. In this case, it is R1_X2.

Distances Cut.Surfaces The views can automatically hide all elements situated outside a certain distance. Here, you specify these distances for all views of this work frame, separated in front and back.

Work Frames


B.6.18 Axes Names

The settings for the axes names can be made separately for X- and Y-axis. We will only describe one axis here. The names can be generated automatically or you can add a name to each axis individually.

Depiction 123/ABC - Choose the axis name type. The designations may

either be numerical (123) or alphanumerical (ABC). Text, Circle... – Here you specify the depiction of the text. The text can either be displayed just as it is or with the selected border. If you have selected ‘Block’ depiction, you may use an own text design. Please refer to Blocks for more detailed information.

Connection Line A line is drawn from the corresponding edge of the work frame to the text.

Start Value indicates the start of automatic axes names.

Size The text size is specified. At blocks it is defined by the attribute size.

Scale You can enter a scale for the blocks.

Distance indicates the distance of the text to the edge of the work frame.

Work Frames


Main Axis When several work frames are involved, you can here enter the name of the main work frame, if the current frame is rather considered to be a subordinate frame. It can also be used as prefix.

Suppress First Axis When frames are used, the axes names can overlap. This option suppresses the display of the first axis.

Suppress Last Axis When frames are used, the axes names can overlap. This option suppresses the display of the last axis.

Avoid I,O When alphanumerical axes names are used, you can refrain from using I and O to avoid any possibility of confusion.

Decreasing Normally, axis labelling is effected in increasing order, e.g. 1,2,3, etc. This option has the opposite effect.

Position The axes can be attached either in front or at the rear, or on the left or on the right.

2 Lines Main and subordinate axes are displayed in 2 lines.

Dynamic The axes names are always adapted to the corresponding view direction. Thus, a good readability will be guaranteed at any time.

Axis Gap Here, the distance of the actual grid to the connection line of axis name is indicated. This entry is only displayed if you edit the grid in a 2D-detail.

Here is the example of an anchor plan with preset axis gap.

Work Frames


Individual Axes Names

EDIT

Click on this button to edit the different grid axes individually.

Here, you can enter the name and the main axis for each single axis. In addition, you can specify whether the axis name has to be overwritten manually (manual) and whether this axis has to be displayed (invisible). Switch over by double-clicking the entries in the first two columns. The entries of the last two columns can be edited by double-clicking.

Work Frames


B.6.19 Options

No Lines The work frame doesn’t create any inner lines.

Axis on Edges This option has the effect that the axes names are not displayed in a fixed distance to the work frame edges, but always at the outer edge of the displayed view. You are informed about the corresponding position, even if the work frame edges are invisible. This option reacts to each command except for the use of dynamic Pan/Zoom commands. To update the display you can release a normal zoom or ‘Regenerate’. It is helpful to switch on the 'Dynamic' option.

Show Axis Lines The connection lines of the work frame edges are drawn up to the designations and even within.

Height Grid Lines In side or front views the height axes indicating the corresponding height are displayed as well.

3D Pattern The work frame is displayed as 3D-object.

Lock Layer The layer for the view elements is locked.

Segmentation The circles of cylindrical work frames are displayed in segments.

Text Style Select the text style for axis labelling.

Line Type Select the line type for the connection lines of work frame edges and axes names.

Work Frames


Text Scale The axes names are scaled using this factor.

Colours The colours of the different work frame elements can be selected freely. Either enter the colour number directly or check the corresponding field and use the left button for dialog selection. All colours are reset to default with the right button.

Different Display Variants

With Lines Without Lines

On Screen Edge With Axis Lines

Work Frames


B.6.20 User-defined Blocks

You can also use your own block definitions instead of circles and rectangular for bordering the axis names. They have to be equipped with attributes, which then are replaced by the actual axes names. For more detailed information about creation of user-defined blocks, please refer to the chapter Adaptations in this manual. From File Only blocks are used which have already been defined in this

drawing.

DWG Blocks Blocks of external drawings are used. They are loaded unless existing.

Block Path The path from which the blocks can be loaded.

Block Name X The selected block for the axes names in X-direction.

Block Name Y The selected block for the axes names in Y-direction.

Selecting ProConcrete Views


B.7 Selecting ProConcrete Views

B.7.1 ProConcrete 3D Location Center

Command Name: PC_PROJECTCENTER Use the Location Center command to set the views defined by the ProConcrete 3D Workframe command, or to set your UCS to the views defined by that command. Clicking the “Location Center” icon located on the ProSteel 3D main toolbar presents the user with the ProConcrete 3D Location Center dialog box as shown below. It has 2 tabs, a Location tab, and an Options tab.



B.7.2 Location

When opening the ProConcrete 3D Location Center dialog box, the Location tab will display the named views that have been generated by the ProConcrete 3D Workframe command for your current model. The view names are listed in a tree structured display. Double click on any view name that appears in the dialog box, and that view will be displayed square to your screen, or the UCS will be toggled to the chosen view. (This depends on the selected button at the bottom of the dialog box) Selecting this button sets the Location Center dialog box such

that it displays views of your current model on the screen (after you double click the selected view name in the view list)

Selecting this button sets the Location Center dialog box such that it sets your UCS to a view of your current model (after you double click the selected view name in the view list)



Selecting this button will return you to a default isometric view

Selecting this button expand the list of view names shown.

Selecting this button collapses the tree list such that you only see the name of the ProConcrete Workframes

B.7.3 Options (for Location Center)

Double Click Close Dialog Box If this option is selected, double clicking a

view on the list will set the view or UCS correctly, and then close the Location Center dialog box.

Zoom Extents Setting this option will provide a zoom extent to your complete model when selecting views

Use Display Clip Planes Setting this option will force the clipping plane settings from the ProConcrete 3D Workframes to be set



Select View


B.8 Select View

Command Name: PS_SETUCS Use this command to select the views defined by the work frames command or by adding new views. Once you select a view, ProSteel 3D places the UCS into the selected work plane and displays the 3D model looking at the plane vertically. The specified cut planes are activated at the same time so that only the objects within this area are visible.

In addition, you have access to all other auxiliary functions for view control using this dialog. This dialog shows you the views, which are the result of the settings for a work frame with the area name ’R1’. The views available in the model are sorted and displayed in this list. Please note that you can modify the name of a view manually via Change Properties.

Select View


Zoom Extents After a view has been activated a Zoom Extents is carried out at once to have a complete look on the model.

Clipping-Plane If a view is activated, the clipping-planes are activated as well. This means: All elements in front of or behind the view reaching beyond the defined distances are not displayed.

Double Click If you double click an entry, the selected view is automatically activated and the dialog is closed. If this option is deactivated, only the view is displayed. If you keep the CTRL-key pressed during double clicking, you can inverse this setting.

If this option is selected, the selected view is activated and the dialog is closed.

If this option is selected, the UCS of the selected view is activated and the dialog is closed. The view is not modified.

If this option is selected, the selected view is deleted from the model. The program prompts you whether you are sure.

This option allows the creation of another view. You are asked for the name and then you have to indicate a rectangle. After that, this view will be created in the current UCS and entered into the list.

This option allows the view via 2 points. The dialog is closed and you have to specify the target point of the view as well as the camera point of the view.

This option permits a view on an object. The dialog is closed and you are prompted to select an object. Then, you can select the desired view via coloured arrows.

This option permits an UCS on an object. The dialog is closed and you are prompted to select an object. Then, you can select the desired UCS-alignment via coloured arrows. See also PS_ObjectUCS.

This option permits to edit the properties of the selected view. See also chapter Change Properties/Views.

Groups


B.9 Groups

B.9.1 General Information about Groups

Command Name: PS_GROUP Various single components, bolts and special parts can be combined to form groups - i.e. a support with welded endplates and stiffeners. Certain functions apply to the complete group, even if you only select one part of the group. The group structure is taken into account for the parts lists and when the model is automatically detailed and transformed into 2D workshop drawings. Many of the settings can be done separately for material groups and single components. After the command has been selected, the main window opens where the available functions can be selected. Click on the corresponding button to apply them. Most of the commands can be directly selected via a separate menu command. To permit rapid processing of several groups one after the other, some functions are self-loading (loop version). If you want to cancel the function, you have to press the ESC-key or the right mouse button. In the settings, you can specify for which group commands a loop version is required and for which not.

Structure ProSteel 3D-material groups consist of a main part and the associated accessory parts. You can choose any assignment, or it is automatically set for some commands on request. In practise, these groups mostly correspond to the dispatched parts that are delivered to the site in a preassembled condition. Such a combination is recommended but not mandatory. You can decide how to best combine the parts.

Groups


B.9.2 Creation and Processing of Groups

Parts can be combined to form groups, and you can detach such groups by using the functions described here. It is also possible to store material groups as block and to take them over into other drawings – the structure will remain unchanged. Please note that special functions are needed in this case. The AutoCAD standard commands for blocks cannot be used.

Create and Delete

CREATE Click on this button to assign individual parts to material groups. Click on the main part of the material group and then select the parts to be assigned. The accessory parts to be assigned can also be selected in a field. The parts that may have been selected twice are ignored. Only steel or special parts can be selected for a group.

Main Part Data... The parts list data of the main part are accepted as group data for the parts lists.

Release Click on this button to dissolve a group. To do so, click any part of the group.

Groups


DELETE Click on this button to delete all parts of the selected group from the drawing. To do so, click any part of the group.

EDIT Click on this button to add or edit the parts list data. After the group has been clicked, the following dialog opens:

You can enter the parts list data of the selected group in the

input fields. The position in the field Posnum has been taken over from the main part provided the “Take Main Part Info” field was selected. In addition, the outer dimensions and the overall weight of the group will be displayed. This input field can also be accessed via the context menu ‚Change PS Properties“, when you select a part that belongs to the group.

Groups


Processing of Structure Subsequent adding of parts to a group or removal from a group is possible as well. ADD Click on this button to add new parts to a group.

The complete group will be selected when you click any part of the group. Further accessory parts can be added by clicking them.

REMOVE Click on this button to remove existing parts from a group. The complete group will be selected when you click any part of the group. Then, click the parts to be removed.

Export and Import

EXPORT Click on this button to store a group as external block (like an AutoCAD-‘WBLOCK’) in a file. It can be inserted into another drawing by using Import Groups. The group structure will remain unchanged. The procedure is the same as the AutoCAD command “wblock”. When prompted select objects, click on any part of the group.

IMPORT Click on this button to insert a stored group into your drawing. The group structure will remain unchanged, when the field Explode Blocks after Insertion has been clicked, or if you explode the imported block using the command PS_EXPLODE. Do not use the standard AutoCAD command for this task!

Dissolve Blocks The inserted block is automatically exploded after the import of groups. The structure of the group remains unchanged.

Groups


Miscellaneous

SELECTION Click on this button to choose whether the whole group has to be selected by selecting only one part of the group, or whether the parts have to be independent of each other. To do so, click any part of the group. Then, the mode will be switched over correspondingly and the current status will be displayed in command line. AutoCAD group mode is modified here in the group. This means that you can e.g. move the whole group using standard AutoCAD commands by clicking only one part. . You can switch on or off this behaviour using the AutoCAD-command for groups.

COUNT All groups existing in the drawing are counted and the number is displayed in the Number input field.

Groups


B.9.3 Check Groups

Using the commands available here you can check the created groups, make the settings and modify the group data for the parts list.

CHECK GROUPS This function checks whether all the groups have a main

part. When a group without a main part is detected, this group is dissolved. In addition, when using the command ’Highlight Orphans’ you can make display the parts which don’t belong to a group. Groups without a main part may occur when the main part was deleted and the group has not been detached.

ORPHANS If this field is checked, all valid groups are hidden according to the specifications when checking a group. Parts that belong to no group are marked in colour. Coloured markings are removed once you select the command ‘Regenerate’ or when you assign the parts to a group.

Groups


SEARCH You can search different groups by highlighting and zooming found groups or by hiding the other groups. Enter the position numbers of the groups to be searched in the input field and click the SEARCH button. Select the parts to be searched (in most cases, you will select all of the parts in one field) and confirm your selection by pressing the ENTER key or the right mouse button. Only those groups the position numbers of which you have entered will remain visible or they are highlighted in colour or zoomed. Several position numbers can be entered at the same time, provided they are separated by a decimal point. Complete position areas must be separated by a hyphen. If you search e.g. the positions No. 5 and 7 resp. 17 through 28, you enter the value 5,7,17-28 in the Search Numbers field. When you use the command ‘Regenerate‘, the other groups can be made visible again resp. the marking in colour is removed.

HIDE Use this function to hide all parts of a group (depending on the parameters for hiding). To do so, click any part of the group. When you use the command ‘Regenerate’ or Display Parts, the parts of the group can be made visible again.

Main Parts Only the main part will be hidden, when the hiding function is applied.

Single Parts All accessory parts will be hidden, when the hiding function is applied.

All Parts The whole group will be hidden, when the hiding function is applied.

DISPLAY Use this function to display all hidden parts of a group. Alternatively, you can apply the command ‘Regenerate’.

Display in ProSteel 3D-Properties When you process the parts of groups via the ProSteel 3D properties and you change to the tab “Group”, the complete group will be highlighted in colour for your information. You can choose different colours for main part and accessory parts. Use the global settings of ProSteel 3D to specify what colours to apply.

Groups


B.9.4 Settings

This page specifies the behaviour of the commands for group function. You can control the behaviour of each single command. Part Selection Here, you can specify the behaviour of part selection at the

different functions. Multiple – Each part has to be selected separately. All – You select the whole group.

Loop Version... For the marked functions the command is repeated in a loop without having to display the dialog again after each run. Operation of the different functions is facilitated in case of several parts.

End Dialog The dialog is automatically closed after the selected function s finished.

Positioning


B.10 Positioning

Positioning of the existing parts is one of the last steps before final detailing of the 3D model for workshop drawings. ProSteel 3D can do this automatically for you. It searches parts of the same type and defines their number in the model. Of course, you can also assign position numbers manually. In the first step before detailing, only the number of pieces (quantity) and their position numbers must be defined. This data record is the basis for the parts lists, which can then be generated and printed at once. Later, when preparing the 2D parts, the position flags with the user-defined layout are attached to single parts and groups. In this version, the position flags as well as the height indicators and weld marks are related to the style. This means that the pre-setting how the position flag looks like can be set with a style. This style specifies the geometry and the display properties of the flag.

Positioning


B.10.1 Automatic Positioning

Automatic positioning is an important means for the creation of parts list. Separate position numbers or shipping numbers according to your specifications are automatically added to component parts and groups via this function. You can even integrate additionally bought or own software (a so-called “PlugIn”) into the positioning of ProSteel 3D.

The Steel Positioning tab (as shown above) is used for the assignment of Position numbers to steel parts and to steel groups. We will ignore this tab since we are dealing with concrete parts and rebars. Plug-In You can select a Plug-In to carry out positioning in ProSteel.

This Plug-In carries out the positioning exactly according to the guidelines of your company if you don’t find an appropriate setting in ProSteel 3D. Activate it using the button ‘Use external Plug-In’ and the automatic positioning then will be exclusively carried out by this external program and not by ProSteel.

Positioning


Type Here, you enter the type of the position number. Numerical – The position numbers are composed of numbers only. Alphanumerical - The position numbers are composed of letters only. The order then is A,B,...,Z,AA,AB,... etc. Mixed - The position numbers are composed of a numerical and an alphanumerical part. The numerical part is following the alphanumerical part, the order is A1,A2,...,A9,B1,B2 etc. The number of numerical positions can be preset under ‘Limits‘.

Filter If you want to position only certain component parts, you can apply a filter defining which elements of your construction have to be equipped with a position number or with a shipping number.

Last Single Here, you see the single part position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Group Here, you see the group position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Con. Here, you see the connection position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Increment Enter the automatic increase in numbers (normally the increment is 1).

Next Enter the single part position number that has to be added to the first part to be positioned anew.

Use Shippingnumber The automatic positioning either adds position numbers or shipping numbers. Use this button to select whether the function has to add position numbers or shipping numbers.

Use external Plug-In If you have selected an external Plug-In for positioning, you can add it using this button. The internal positioning of ProSteel 3D is deactivated in this case.

Use Xrefs Can reference Xref files to include in Positioning

Click this button to reset the settings of all fields to standard values.

Positioning


Click one of these 3 buttons to add the position number for the individual component parts. For this purpose, you have to select the parts to be positioned. The program checks whether they are of the same type and adds a position number according to your specifications. One button is for parts only, another is for groups only, and the third is for both parts and groups.

Click this button to make further specifications for seizing the shapes etc.

The Concrete Positioning tab (as shown above) is used for the assignment of Position numbers to concrete parts and to reinforcing bars and cages. ProConcrete 3D can automatically assign position numbers only to parts in your 3D model that are visible on the screen at the time of positioning. Plug-In You can select a Plug-In to carry out positioning in

ProConcrete. This Plug-In carries out the positioning exactly according to the guidelines of your company if you don’t find an appropriate setting in ProConcrete 3D. Activate it using the button ‘Use external Plug-In’ and the automatic positioning then will be exclusively carried out by this external program and not by ProConcrete.

Positioning



Filter If you want to position only certain component parts, you can apply a filter defining which elements of your construction have to be equipped with a position number or with a shipping number.

Last Concrete Here, you see the concrete object position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Cages Here, you see the rebar cage position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Rebars Here, you see the individual rebar position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.



Use external Plug-In If you have selected an external Plug-In for positioning, you can add it using this button. The internal positioning of ProConcrete 3D is deactivated in this case.

Use Xrefs Can reference Xref files to include in Positioning

Click this button to reset the settings of all fields to standard values.

Click one of these 4 buttons to add the position number for the individual component parts. You are asked to select the parts to be positioned. The program checks whether they are of the same type and adds a position number according to your specifications. One button is for concrete parts only, another is for cage parts only, a third is for all rebars only, and the fourth is for all ProConcrete 3D parts.

Positioning


Click this button to make further specifications for seizing the shapes etc.

Positioning Results for Steel When positioning is finished, a dialog opens where the position number and further parts list information is displayed for each part. Now, you can still edit the proposed position numbers by double-clicking the position number of the component part. Modifications are immediately adopted into the parts.

When single part positioning including the modifications is finished, the position numbers of the groups are processed. Double-clicking the position number in the column New Number can also modify the positions displayed.

Positioning


Positioning Results for Concrete When positioning is finished, a dialog opens where the position number and further parts list information is displayed for each Concrete Part. Now, you can still edit the proposed position numbers by double-clicking the position number of the Concrete Part. Modifications are immediately adopted into the Concrete Parts.

When Concrete Part positioning including the modifications is finished, the position numbers of the Cages are processed. Double-clicking the position number in the column New Number can also modify the positions displayed.

When Cages positioning including the modifications is finished, the position

Positioning


numbers of the Single Rebars are processed. Double-clicking the position number in the column New Number can also modify the positions displayed.

Specifications for ProSteel Positioning The pre-settings define how the automatic positioning of component parts has to be carried out.

You determine which parts are equipped with a position number at all and according to which guidelines the positioning is carried out. If the proposed position numbers don’t meet your requirements, you will find a solution here in most cases.

Positioning


Filter and Sorting

Filter These kinds of parts are taken into consideration during automatic positioning. Check all kinds of parts (standard shapes, special shapes, poly-plates, bolts, miscellaneous and concrete) that have to be equipped with a position number in one process. If you have added parts list data to any graphical elements, these are seized vie ‘Miscellaneous’.

1st Sorting List Here, you determine the order of positioning. The selected parts are sorted in the indicated order according to the type of component part (shapes, plates, etc.). Put the type of part that has to be positioned first to the top, the next type to the second position and so on. In the example dialog of positioning, all shapes are seized first, then all special shapes, and finally the concrete parts. If there are several parts of the same type, these will be sorted according to the settings for the 2nd criteria. Change the order of criteria by using the arrow keys.

Positioning


2nd Sorting List Here, you specify a subordinate order. Within each part type, sorted according to the 1st criteria, the parts will be sorted according to the order specified here. If you have e.g. seized more than one shape - with the settings of the example dialog - these shapes then are sorted according to the length first; if the length is identical, they are sorted according to the weight, and so on. Then, the special shapes again are sorted in the same way, etc.

Sort Flats… Flats (which actually are ‘shapes’ as type of part) are treated like any plates at positioning. Therefore, they are displayed together with any plates when a parts list is sorted according to the 1st criterion.

Further Options

Overwrite Exist… Existing position numbers are overwritten when assigning new ones.

Equal Part De… Single parts are checked for equality. If they are identical, they are assigned the same position number. Parts are considered identical when deviations with respect to dimensions and drill diameter are within the values given as reference tolerances.

Group Detection The groups are checked for equality as well. Groups are considered identical when identical single parts are arranged in the same mounting position. However, single parts are only compared using their position number because positioning has already been carried out before. If parts are identical but have different position numbers, the groups will also be assigned different position numbers.

Weld Marks The attached weld marks are taken into consideration as well when the single parts are checked for equality. Weld cracks are small drill holes with parts that have to be mounted.

Positioning


First Main Par… First, all main parts of groups are positioned (and sorted according to the sorting criteria within the groups), followed by the accessory parts (also sorted according to the sorting criteria). This can be deemed as an additional, even higher ranking sorting criterion. If this field is checked and you have entered a position number in the input field Start Accessory Parts at, positioning of the accessory parts will start at the defined position number. You may for instance start with 1 for main parts and with 100 for accessory parts.

Groups

Differentiation: When the group is assigned the position of the main part (normal case), it may happen that two different groups having the same main part are assigned identical position numbers. In such cases, the program will check in a second run whether or not the groups are really identical. If not, it will change the group position number. 25 → 25.1 – The changed group positions are identified by the index .1 etc. following their position number (i.e. 100.1 , 100.2 , ...). 25 → 25A - The changed group positions are identified by the index A etc. following their position number (i.e. 100A, 100B, ...). 25 → MAX+1 – Positioning of the changed group positions is continued after the highest position currently assigned. When the last group was position 50, the changed groups now have the positions from 51 onward.

Take Over Mai… The position of the main part is taken over as group position. If necessary, the group position is changed afterwards during second check. If this option is not requested, but you rather prefer a separate number area, the numbers will start at the position entered in Start Groups at.

Prefixes

Here, an explanatory text can be entered before the group positions. It is possible to differentiate between support beams, girders and other groups, the differentiation always being related to the main part of the group.

Positioning


Support Beams Here, you enter the designation for all vertical shapes. In the attribute field Position Tolerance, you enter an angle within which the shape is still considered to be vertical.

Girders Here, you enter the designation for all horizontal shapes. In the attribute field Position Tolerance, you enter an angle within which the shape is still considered to be horizontal. Vertical and horizontal are always related to the model, i.e., to the XY-plane of the WCS.

Other Groups Here, you enter the designation for all other groups.

Family Prefixes The family classes prefix is set in front if the component part belongs to a family class and a prefix is planned.

Recognize Equal Parts

There are two different methods to recognize equal parts. The first one is the recognition via geometry like it is known from previous versions. The second, new method is a real comparison of volume.

Geometry At recognition via geometry, all outer edges of a component part are determined and individually compared with each other. In the following, you will find a description of the tolerances specifying that two parts are recognized as identical.

Tolerances Here, you specify the tolerances for recognition of identical parts. You can positively exclude that e.g. rounding errors in the case of bevel cuts or notches lead to different parts. Minimum Line Length - Lines up to the specified length are not considered for a comparison. Length Tolerance – Length deviations of two lines up to the specified length are not considered for a comparison. Drill Hole Tolerance – Deviations of the drill hole axes up to the specified length are not considered for a comparison.

Volume A second method to recognize identical parts is the real comparison of volume. Recognition of equal parts is carried out based on the volume of the component part. For this purpose, the necessary tolerances can be set as relative value to the volume to be compared for groups and single parts (e.g. 0,1 percent for component parts and 0,2 percent for groups).

Positioning


Specifications for ProConcrete Positioning The pre-settings define how the automatic positioning of component parts has to be carried out.

You determine which parts are equipped with a position number at all and according to which guidelines the positioning is carried out. If the proposed position numbers don’t meet your requirements, you will find a solution here in most cases.

Filter and Sorting

Filter These kinds of parts are taken into consideration during automatic positioning. Check all kinds of parts (beams, columns, slabs, walls , rebars, cages etc) that have to be equipped with a position number in one process. If you have added parts list data to any graphical elements, these are seized via ‘Others’.

Positioning


1st Sorting List Here, you determine the order of positioning. The selected parts are sorted in the indicated order according to the type of component part (beams, cages, bars etc.). Put the type of part that has to be positioned first to the top, the next type to the second position and so on. In the example dialog of positioning, all shapes are seized first, then all special shapes, and finally the concrete parts. If there are several parts of the same type, these will be sorted according to the settings for the 2nd criteria. Change the order of criteria by using the arrow keys.

2nd Sorting List Here, you specify a subordinate order. Within each part type, sorted according to the 1st criteria, the parts will be sorted according to the order specified here. If you have e.g. seized more than one part - with the settings of the example dialog - these parts are then are sorted according to the length first; if the length is identical, they are sorted according to the weight, and so on. Then, the special parts again are sorted in the same way, etc.

Further Options

Overwrite Exist… Existing position numbers are overwritten when assigning new ones.

Equal Part De… Single parts are checked for equality. If they are identical, they are assigned the same position number. Parts are considered identical when deviations with respect to dimensions and drill diameter are within the values given as reference tolerances.

Use Family Prefix The family classes prefix is set in front if the component part belongs to a family class and a prefix is planned.

Tolerances Here, you specify the tolerances for recognition of identical parts. You can positively exclude that e.g. rounding errors in the case of bevel cuts or notches lead to different parts. Minimum Line Length - Lines up to the specified length are not considered for a comparison. Length Tolerance – Length deviations of two lines up to the specified length are not considered for a comparison.

Positioning


B.10.2 Manual Insertion

After a position number has been attached to the component parts, no matter whether it has been attached automatically or manually, you can display this number and further parts list information at the part using a position flag. If a position number has not yet been attached to the parts, you can specify new numbers and enter them into the part. The dialog tab mostly corresponds to the tab of automatic positioning. Please refer to this section for a detailed description. Style Select the style of the position flag to be inserted if no

separate style has been specified for the corresponding part type (or the command). This is the default-style.


Last Single Here, you see the single part position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Group Here, you see the group position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.



Click this button to reset the manual positioning to standard values.

Positioning


Click this button to assign the corresponding position flag styles to the selection commands described below. This style describes the depiction of the position flag, i.e. which information is depicted in which way. Then, the following dialog appears, the assignments of which are self-explanatory.

Scale Enter the scale for display scaling of the position texts and other things. The scale should correspond to the scale of the detail. If a global scale has been defined, it will be automatically taken over here.

Paper Area Here, you specify whether a position flag has to be created in the paper area.

Shipping No. In ProSteel, you have the possibility to add a position number and a shipping number to a component part. If this option is activated, the shipping number will be displayed in the position flag.

Enter The number specified here will be taken over as position number or as shipping number into the parts properties.

Positioning


Attach Position Flag Different selection commands are available for attaching the flag. The corresponding position flag style of the pre-settings is assigned to the commands.

SINGLE PART

Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for single parts.

GROUP

Select the part to which a group position flag has to be attached. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for groups.

GROUPS-SINGLE PART

Select the part of a group to which a position flag has to be attached. Depending on the part hierarchy, the position flag is created with the set style for main part or accessory parts.

BOLT

Select the bolt connection to which a position flag has to be attached. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for bolts.

SHORT POSITION

Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached in form of a short position. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for short position.

MOUNTING POSITION

Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached in form of a mounting flag. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for mounting.

Positioning


FREE

Select the insertion point to which a position flag has to be attached. Specify the position flag properties such as style, position number, etc. in the following dialog.

Attaching the position flag via FREE permits you to create position flags even without direct reference to a component part. You can make use of this option e.g. for position flags in 2D drawings the parts of which have been dissolved or drawn manually.

Positioning


B.10.3 Automatic Insertion (Distribution)

This command serves for automatic distribution of position flags in views or in detail drawings. The properties stored in the component parts are displayed in a position flag according to the set style.

Scale The scale specifies the size of the position flags to be entered.

If e.g. the text height in a position flag style is indicated with 3,5, the position flag will be created with a text height of 3,5 * scale.

Shipping No. The shipping number is selected instead of the position number of the part and entered into the position number.

Paper Area The distribution is made in the paper area and the position flags are created there.

Click this button to start the automatic distribution of position flags. Select the parts to which position flags have to be attached. Then, the program starts distribution.

Click this button to exchange the position of two flags.

Click this button to make further specifications for automatic distribution.

Positioning


Options for Distribution Specify the pre-settings for the automatic distribution of position flags by pressing this button. You can define the position flag styles and different

optimizations.

Filter Here, you specify to which parts position flags have to be

attached. After having selected a part type, you can choose a position flag style for this part type which has to be used to display the flag.

Sorting

Iterations This value indicates how often a new position has to be searched for a position flag. The higher the value, the better the positioning result will be, but the longer the search for a suitable position of the position flag.

Insertion Poin… The minimum distance between the insertion point and the end of the position flag’s guideline

Positioning


Local Centre Your model is divided into different positioning sections with so-called local centres. The position flags are arranged in a circle around these centres and inserted. This value sets the minimum distance between two local centres.

Offset Flags This value indicates the projection of the flag beyond the edge of the visible geometry.

Free Hold This value specifies the minimum distance between two neighbouring position flags.

Delay During distribution, it is possible to look at the distribution procedure on screen. For this purpose, you have to switch on the ‘Animation’ option. Here, you specify how much time has to be (in ms) between the insertion and moving of a position flag.

Options

One Part per… Only one position flag is inserted for a part having the same position or shipping number (depending on the setting).

One Part per… Only one position flag is inserted with the same position or shipping number (depending on the setting) for each local centre in the drawing.

Place Only Out… The position flags are attached outside of the model geometry.

Break Lines At… The guidelines are interrupted in the case of collisions with dimensions or texts.

Animation You can follow positioning procedure on screen if this option is activated.

Group Flags Position flags referring to parts with identical position or shipping number are arranged to form a common flag. The insertion points mustn’t exceed the maximum distance to form a group.

Group Distances The maximum distance up to which identical parts can be arranged to form a group.

Always Create… A separate guideline to the flag is created for each identical part of a group.

Positioning


Show Count… If you have arranged position flags to form a group, you can select which number of parts has to be displayed in the ‘Part Number’ of the flag. Normally, the sum of the combined parts is inserted. However, you can alternatively enter the entire number of all parts in the model having this position number.

Flags for Main Parts and Groups Different kinds of depiction are possible when a flag has to be attached to the main part of a group or to the corresponding group. Since the settings are more complex, we will display the combinations here. A “normal group flag” is attached to the main part, containing the data of the corresponding construction group.

A group flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part data of the main part.

A single part flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part data and a group flag, containing the group data is attached to it as well.

Positioning


A single part flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part data, containing the data of the main part is attached to it as well.

No flag is attached to the main part.

A normal single part flag is attached to the main part.

Positioning


B.10.4 Other Auxiliary Commands

Here, you will find different commands for processing the position flags and for checking or searching for the position numbers.

Use this button to search for the highest group or part number

in the selected component parts. The result is displayed in the neighbouring input fields.

Click this button to search for component parts in the model. Enter the position you are looking for in the field Search Number. Use the options Hide, Check, Zoom Extents to select how the found result has to be depicted in the model.

Use this command to delete position numbers in component parts and groups. For this purpose, select the parts the position numbers of which have to be deleted. You can specify in which part the number is deleted using the filters Single Parts and Groups.

This command enters the current position number of the part as original position number. The original number can only be modified using this command.

Use this command to search in the model and to enter how often each part or group exists in the model.

Positioning


Use this command to add a second part to a common position flag.

Use this command to remove the arrow to a component part from a position flag.

Use this command to interrupt the guideline of a position flag by specifying two points e.g. to overwrite a text. Only one interruption per guideline is permitted.

Use this command to remove the interruption from the position flag’s guideline.

Use this command to take over the current part properties into the position flag.

Use this command to look at the position numbers of the selected parts and to modify them.

Use this command to compare two parts with each other. Select the two parts and the result is displayed in a dialog box.

Here, you see two results for comparing the position. In the left figure the parts are identical. In the right one they are not identical. In the dialog window, you can see in detail where the parts differ from each other.

Positioning


B.10.5 Depiction of Position Flags

You determine the depiction of a position flag by specifying a position flag style where the geometry, the content and the colours of the position flag are defined.

Style Use this box to select the style you want to use for the

depiction.

Click this button to save the current settings.

Click this button to load templates via the templates management and to use them again.

Create Geo... The depiction of position flags is specified in this dialog by preset parameters.

Block Geometry The depiction of position flags is specified by an AutoCAD-block. You can select any block you like.

Block Path In this field, you define from which path the blocks for selection of position flag geometry have to be read.

Bitmap You can set a separate bitmap for a style to facilitate the recognition. This bitmap then is displayed in the selection box as well.

Click this button to set the defaults of the depiction.

Positioning


Settings for Depiction

Geometry

Line Type Here, you define the kind of guideline to be used. None – No guideline will be displayed. Line – Only one line will be displayed. Arrow – A line with an arrow will be displayed. Point - A line with a point will be displayed.

Bubbleform Here, you define the kind of position number. None – Only the number is displayed. Round – The number is displayed in an oval. Rectangular Bubble – the number is displayed in a field. Hexagonal Bubble – The number is displayed in a hexagon. On Line - The number is displayed on the construction line.

Positioning


Text Type Here, you set the type of shape designation in case of length indication. U100..160 - The designation is as follows IPE270..7890. U 100 160 – The designation is as follows IPE270–7890. U100x160 - The designation is as follows IPE270x7890. Format Template – The designation is as indicated in the ‘Format Template’ input field.

Alignment Here, you determine the direction of the construction line with respect to the position text. Shape – The alignment is parallel to the shape. Line – You are prompted to enter a reference line by clicking. The text will be aligned accordingly. Horizontal – The alignment is in horizontal direction. Vertical - The alignment is in vertical direction.

Text Style Specifies the text style for the text of the position flag.

Default Format Specifies the format for the user-defined shape designation if you have selected ‘Format Template’ as text type. The following parameters are available.

$(N) for part name $(L) for part length $(W) for part width $(T) for part thickness

The result of the format string $(N) $(T)x$(W) would e.g. be plate 5x380

Prefix / Postfix In the input field Prefix or Postfix you can enter a text which is displayed in front of or after the position or shipping number of the position flag. The default can be set independently of each other for both numbers.

Separator Specifies a text which is written between position number and shipping number, if both numbers have to be displayed as position number entry in the position flag.

Positioning


Layout Here, you determine which part information to be displayed in the position flag. Total Number – The number of these parts is displayed, e.g. 17 x IPE 270. Part Name – The designation is displayed (e.g. the shape designation). Comment – The comments of the parts list information are displayed. Length/Scale – The length in the selected text type is displayed. Position Number – The position number is displayed. Shipping Number – The shipping number is displayed. Material – The material designation is displayed. Item Number – Any existing item number is displayed. Orig. Posnumber – The fixed (former) position number is displayed.

Options

No Line No line is drawn beneath the text of the position flag.

Dynamic The depiction of the position flag is dynamically adapted to the current view.

Length For Group The entire length of the group is output instead of the part length.

Sizes Here, you define the text sizes in mm for general lettering (Text Size) and for position numbers (Pos. Size). For printing, the AutoCAD text sizes are scaled according to selected scale.

Colours You set the corresponding colour for the flag as AutoCAD colour number using the fields Line, Number, Bubble und Text. If you enter -1 as value, the pre-setting will be used.

When you click a position flag via the context menu ‘Change PS Properties’, you can subsequently modify the properties of each single position flag. This tab will not be described here in detail because the possibilities for setting correspond to the parameters explained above.

Positioning


B.10.6 Management of Styles

In this part of the dialog, you maintain your position flag styles. You can create new styles, load, update or delete styles.

Use the displayed button to create a new position flag style.

The style will be stored as *.sty-file together with the pre-settings in the directory for position flag styles. Now you can work with this style on all other pages of this dialog.

If you want to work with a special style which is not stored in the drawing but on the hard drive, you can load this style using this button. Select the corresponding *.sty file in the directory of position flag styles and load the file. The style will be available at once.

Use this command to remove a style that you don’t need any more in the drawing.

Positioning


Click this button to change the display order. The display order of the style list is not sorted. You can specify the order yourself. For this purpose, use the two arrow keys to move the checked style up or down in the order.

If you want to update the styles loaded in your drawing, use this function. Now, all styles in the drawing are replaced by the styles stored on the hard drive.

Positioning


Drawing Information


B.11 Drawing Information

Command Name: PS_DWG_INFO When using this command, you can add drawing information to your drawing. This information will be directly taken over into the parts list. By this way it is also possible to fill in the title block of 2D drawing when having entered a drawing border by means of ‘Drawing Border’ command. Always enter the order drawing number and the modification index, if present, since this information is evaluated during the 2D detailing process. You can later query the Detail Center to find out, which drawing contains the parts and will receive the file path as well as the probably more useful drawing number.

All Text Fields In the different text fields you enter general information on the

project and on the drawing. Since these fields are self-explanatory, they are not explained in detail.

Drawing Information


Project Name Here, you select a block using the SELECT button for entering data in its block attributes via the entry fields, provided you have assigned such entry fields to the variables of the block attributes.

When the drawing border for the 2D workshop drawing has been entered as block using the ProSteel 3D command ‘Drawing Borders’, you can select the block of the drawing borders. The entries may either be taken over into the title block (export), or the entries can be taken from the title block into the dialog (import).

Click on this button to retrieve the data of the entry fields into the block attributes of the selected block.

Click on this button to retrieve the block attributes of the selected block into the entry fields.

Click on this button to define the variables assigned to the block attributes of the different entry fields. An identical dialog box will be displayed, where the variable names of the block attributes are entered.

When you have selected the Prepared On, Checked On, or Released On fields and click this button, the current date will be entered.

Bar Bending Schedules


B.12 Bar Bending Schedules

Creating a Bar Bending Schedule is a two step process. You will need to create a database of all the parts and then this database will be used to create the Bending Schedule report.

and



B.12.1 Extract Cage Database

Command Name: PC_BENDSCHEDULE The Extract Cage Database button can be found on the “Bending Schedule” toolbar. Clicking Extract Cage Database provides you with access to the ProConcrete 3D Bending Schedule Creation dialog box. This dialog box allows you to select various concrete components (beams, columns, walls etc), and the data is then extracted from those components and incorporated into a .dbf file.

Part Selection Select whether the data is extracted from 3D component parts

or from 2D position Flags.

Options

Start Partlist If this option is selected the Bending Schedule Print Dialog is opened after extracting the Partlist.

Elements Select the concrete objects to evaluate.

Output File Enter the output filepath and name or use the “Enables selection of file” button to browse to the required folder and enter the name of database file.



B.12.2 Print Cage Data

Command Name: PC_BS_REPORT The Print Cage Data button can be found on the “Bending Schedule” toolbar. Clicking Print Cage Data enables you to print reports of created partlist databases using different output formats.

File pulldown menu

Open Opens a previously created partlist database.

Close Closes the selected partlist database.

Delete Deletes the selected partlist database.

End Closes the ProConcrete 3D Database Print dialog.

Settings pull down menu

Allows editing of report formats.

Delivery pull down menu

Dynamic Opens a folder to select Dynamic Report for printing. Dynamic report creates images of rebar at the time of extraction.

Static Opens a folder to select Static Report for printing. Static report uses Standards type images of rebar.

Selected List File

Current List File Displays the List file selected from the delivery pulldown menu



B.12.3 Select Print Options

The Print Options dialog box allows you to select any of your connected printers to send your report to. You can choose to Preview the resulting report on your screen, or save your report to one of many file types. These include HTML, PDF, BMP, JPG, TIF, RTF, TXT, XLS and XLM formats.

Select the media device to print output. Choose Preview to send to the screen. Some Sample pages of Dynamic and Static reports follow.



Dynamic Style



Static Style



C CONCRETE ELEMENTS

[?replace page in pdf file with Concrete Elements image page?]



Creating Concrete Elements

ProConcrete 3D Page C.1 - 1

C.1 Creating Concrete Elements

C.1.1 Foundations

Footing Pads Command Name: PC_PAD_FOOTING PC_PAD_FOOTING_PROP Rectangular shaped concrete Footing Pads can be inserted into your ProConcrete 3D model via the use of the “Create Pad Footing” command. This command allows you to only add rectangular shaped footing pads to the bottom of previously created columns. These columns can be rectangular or circular. The command asks you to pick the wanted column or columns, you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Pad Footing” dialog box, size the pad via the dialog box as required, and the pads are placed. The pads are generally centred on the bottom centre of the columns. They can be offset via the dialog box. You must finish the dialog box with the OK button in order to permanently place the Footing Pads.


Page C.1 - 2 ProConcrete 3D

Shape Selection

Shape Type The ProConcrete 3D Footing Pad is rectangular.




X_Offset Enter the footing pad X offset here.

Y_Offset Enter the footing pad Y offset here.

Z_Offset Enter the footing pad Z offset here.

Rebar Style Choose an existing Rebar Style to add to pad footing

The INSERT BY OBJECT button is used to insert the pad to the bottom of one or more columns.

The INSERT BY POINT button is used to insert the pad at any chosen point. A column is not required when using this button.

Further Defaults

Cast Type Select the cast type of the shape here.

Material Select the material of the shape here.









An intelligent link is formed between the column and the Footing Pad. If you were to use the AutoCAD MOVE command on a column to move it, then the Footing Pad will automatically follow the column. This intelligent link also works when using the AutoCAD ROTATE command on the column, but when using the AutoCAD COPY command, the pad is at the bottom of the original column, but not at the bottom of the copied column. Moving a created Footing Pad will not cause the column to follow. Strip Footings Concrete strip footings and their reinforcing cages can be created in ProConcrete 3D by one of several different methods. Where strip footings follow paths that include corners, then the footing and rebar will also follow the same path and include corners. Command Name: PC_STRIPFOOTING PC_STRIPFOOTING_PROP The “Create Strip Footing” button enables you to size and place strip footings under previously created walls by picking those walls (they must have been placed using the ProConcrete 3D Create Wall tool). Alternatively, points or lines can be used. When



clicking this button you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Strip Footing” dialog box.

Shape Selection

Shape Type Select from Regular shape (rectangular), Standard, or User Shapes (already defined precast shapes). When the User Shapes option is selected, Width and Depth are replaced by Shape Class and Shape Size.

Resolution Here, you select the resolution of the image; Low, Normal and High. For special shapes this can make the display clearer in case of complex types. You can change the resolution at any time afterwards if e.g. a more detailed image is required.

Dimension

Width Enter the strip footing width when placing rectangular shapes.

Depth Enter the strip footing depth when placing rectangular shapes.

X-Offset Enter the strip footing X offset here.

Y-Offset Enter the strip footing Y offset here.

Options

Cast Type Select the cast type of the shape here.







Display Class If display classes have been defined, you can set them here



Split StripFooting If this option is selected (ticked), then the strip footings segments (of a strip footing that follows a path) are placed as individual segments.

The “Insert by Object“ button allows you to place strip footings under existing concrete walls by selecting the walls.

The “Insert by Points“ button is used to define the path of the strip footing by picking existing points on your 3D model.

The “Insert by Polyline“ button is used to define the path of the strip footing by picking an already drawn polyline in your 3D model.

The “Insert by Line“ button is used to place a footing on an existing line in your 3D model. The size of the strip footing is determined by values used in the dialog box, plus the length of the line.



C.1.2 Beams and Columns

Command Name: PC_BEAM_COLUMN PC_BEAM_COLUMN_PROP Rectangular and Circular Concrete Shapes can be accessed by picking the “Create Beam or Columns” button on the ProConcrete 3D main Toolbar, or the ProConcrete Beams and Columns toolbar. The resulting dialog box is called the ProConcrete 3D Shapes dialog box.



Beams and Columns (ProConcrete 3D Shapes)

Shape Selection

Shape Type Select the general shape type here. The ProConcrete 3D shapes are divided into 3 different types: Regular Shapes – These are user defined rectangular or circular shapes. Standard Shapes – These are shapes based on a database included in the standard delivery range. User-Shapes – These are special shapes created by the user or provided by ProConcrete.


Shape Class Depending on the selected shape type, the available shape catalogues are listed here. You can specify which catalogues for standard shapes are listed by means of the shape catalogue selection described in this chapter. For all other shape types, the created shape catalogues are listed from the corresponding directories on the hard drive.

Shape Size For Regular shapes, you can enter the shape width and depth. For standard shapes, you can select the required shape size from the dropdown list.



Further Defaults

Cast Type Select the required cast type here.








Offset-X The insertion offset in X-direction; this field can only be entered, if you have selected the position ‘Free’ as insertion point (this is the biggest displayed insertion point).

Offset-Y The insertion offset in Y-direction; this field can only be entered, if you have selected the position ‘Free’ as insertion point (this is the biggest displayed insertion point).

Length Specify the length of the shape. This is important if you want to insert shapes in the cross-section. Inputs in this field overwrite the length specified by the insertion points.

Rotate Here, you indicate the angle of rotation used to turn the shape around the insertion axis.

Setdown Here you enter a value to define a set down which alters the effective depth of the shape but retains the design depth.

Rebar Style If required, a rebar cage can be added by selecting a previously saved rebar style, from the dropdown list.



Insertion of Shapes After having selected the shape type, resolution, shape class and size, the shape can be inserted. There are several options to insert shapes. In general, a shape is always inserted by means of two 3D-points. These points can either be seized by picking the points or by picking a line. For this purpose, the shape is positioned in a way that – if you stood at the end point and looked into the direction of the starting point – the view corresponds to the image on the monitor. However, since two points alone don’t clearly define the shape position in space, a third point is defined which determines the position (rotation) depending on the situation:

• You can indicate the third point. • When the two points are perpendicular in the world coordinate system

(WCS) the alignment is made according to the WCS X-axis. • When the points have been freely selected in space, the alignment is

made in a way that the X-axis is aligned, as parallel as possible, towards the WCS XY-plane.

You must finish the dialog box with the OK button in order to permanently place the shape.



Insertion Commands

INSERT BEAM BY A LINE

First you are prompted to select a line. The end points of this line are used as insertion points of the shape.

INSERT BEAM BY 2 POINTS / BY 3 POINTS

You are prompted to pick any 2 / 3 points in space, which are then used to insert the shape. (3 points for

rectangular shapes)

INSERT COLUMN BY A LINE

First you are prompted to select a line. The end points of this line are used as insertion points of the shape.

INSERT COLUMN BY 2 POINTS / BY 3 POINTS

You are prompted to pick any 2 / 3 points in space, which are then used to insert the shape. (3 points for

rectangular shapes)

INSERT COLUMN BY 1 POINT WITH LENGTH

First insert a value for the column Length, then you pick an insertion point to place the column

MATCH PROPERTIES OF SELECTED SHAPE

Select this option to pick an existing shape that already has set properties. Those properties are then displayed in the

ProConcrete 3D Shapes dialog box. This controls the next shape



that you will place.

TURN THE CURRENT CONCRETESHAPE

Clicking this button on the Straight Shapes tab only will alter the direction that the shape is created in. You can

control the start point of the shape by the use of this (a positive direction shape rather than a negative direction shape).



Additional Functions The position of the shape can be preset via the basic position, 90 degrees, etc. or directly on screen when inserting the shape if the “Orientate after Insertion” is ticked on the Options tab. Orientation of shapes can be controlled at the time of placing shapes by carefully setting options on the Options tab.

Options

Height Specify insertion height above the XY plane.

Start Offset Specify offset from the start point.

End Offset Specify offset from the end point.

Insert in current XY plane Enable insertion shape in current UCS plane.

Orientate after insertion Enable rotation of shape during insertion by right mouse click.

Dynamic The shape is ‘hanging’ on the mouse pointer during insertion. Normally, the points are seized first and then the shape is inserted.

Close dialogue after insertion Enable dialogue closure after insertion.

Keep length Enable persistence of length field after dialogue closure.



Command Name: PC_CREATE_SETDOWN Concrete Beams can have a setdown applied to the top face of them by picking the “Add Setdown to Beam” button on the ProConcrete 3D main Toolbar, or the ProConcrete Beams and Columns toolbar. The resulting dialog box is called the ProConcrete 3D Set Down dialog box.

Beam Setdown

Depth Specify the depth of the setdown to be added.

The “Select Beam” button allows you to select a previously created beam to apply the specified setdown to. You do not have to click the top of the beam. The setdown will be automatically applied to the top.

An applied setdown appears as a property of a ProConcrete 3D Beam. The setdown can be deleted if necessary from the ProConcrete 3D Shape Properties dialog box.



C.1.3 Slabs

In-situ Concrete Floor Slabs Command Name: PC_SLAB PC_SLAB_PROP In-situ concrete slabs can be created in ProConcrete 3D through the use of the “Create Slab” button, located on the ProConcrete 3D main toolbar and the Slab toolbar. This command allows you to create single thickness slabs (suspended or on grade) that are rectangular in shape, or multi-sided. You can pick points to input the slab shape, or you can pick a pre-drawn polyline to define the slab.

Dimension

Thickness Enter the slab thickness or choose from the dropdown list.



Length Enter the concrete slab length here.

Width Enter the concrete slab width here.

X-Offset Enter the concrete slab X offset here.

Y-Offset Enter the concrete slab Y offset here.

Z-Offset Enter the concrete slab Z offset here.

Options

Cast Type Select the required cast type here.

Material Select the material of the concrete slab here.







Insertion Plane Specify the Current UCS or Object UCS for slab insertion.

Insertion Edge Specify the top, middle or bottom insertion edge required.

This button is used to define the shape of the slab by picking exiting points on your 3D model.

This button is used to define the shape of the slab by picking an already drawn polyline in your 3D model.

This button is used to place a rectangular shaped slab in your 3D model. The size of the rectangle is determined by values used in the dialog box. An insertion point also needs to be defined via the available preview area to the right hand side of the dialog box.

This button is used to define the slab by picking 4 existing points from within your ProConcrete 3D model.



This button allows you to define a slab by picking two existing parallel lines from within your ProConcrete 3D model.

Add Slab Features Command Name: PC_SLAB _TOOLS Features such as Falls, Folds, Polycuts, Curbs and Notches can be added to slabs through the use of the “Add Slab Features” button, located on the ProConcrete 3D Slabs toolbar. Clicking the button presents the user with the ProConcrete 3D Slab Features dialog box.

Fall

Depth 1 Enter the fall depth.

Depth 2 Enter the fall depth. This cell is only available if the Uneven Fall is selected.

Uneven Fall Select for an uneven fall.



This is the Create Fall by Polyline button.

This is the Create Fall by Points button.

Fold

Height Enter the height of the fold

Offset Enter an offset value if required.

This is the Create fold by Polyline button

Polycut

This is the Create Polycut by Polyline button.

This is the Create Polycut by points button.

This is the Create Slope Joint between 2 slabs button.

Curb / Notch

Width Enter the width of the curb or notch

Height Enter the height of the curb or notch

This is the Create Curb button

This is the Create Full Notch on Edge

This is the Create Partial Notch on Edge Button



Precast Concrete Floor Slabs/Composite Floor Slabs Command Name: PC_FLOOR_GEN Precast concrete floor slabs and composite floor slabs can be created in ProConcrete 3D by use of the “Precast/Composite Slab“ button, located on the “ProConcrete 3D Main Toolbar. This command enables you to create both Precast slabs and Composite slabs, with or without topping slabs. Dimensions The Dimensions tab is used to input the length and spacing of the precast concrete floor panels.

Length

Dynamic Length Allows you to ignore fixed length and gap values.

Length Here you can enter a fixed length.

Gap Here you can enter a fixed gap between panels.



Width

Grid Width Here you can enter a fixed grid width.

Panel Width Width of Precast panels

Gap/Overlap Gap between Precast panels

Horizontal Offset

Edge Offset Offset distance from Edge of slab boundary

End Seating End Seating value of Precast panels

Side Seating Side Seating value of Precast panels

Topping Thickness Enter a value for in-situ concrete thickness for topping slab over precast floor panels.

Vertical Offset

Height Vertical distance between the top of Precast panel and bottom of slab

Insert Plane The position of the slab relative to insertion plane.

Draw Diagonal Select this option to switch on a diagonal system line display.

Cut At Edges Select this option to automatically trim the length of precast slabs or steel decking sheets to suit your slab area.

Create Topping Select this option if an in-situ topping is required.

Precast

The ”Create Precast Slab by Poly” button enables you to create the precast floor panels with topping slab by picking at least 2 already drawn polylines. These polylines should represent the extent of the topping slab, and the extent of the precast floor panels.

The ”Create Precast Slab by Beams” button allows you to create the precast floor panels with topping slab by selecting the already drawn beams that form the perimeter of the slab area.



Composite

The ”Create composite slab by poly” button enables you to create the precast floor panels with topping slab by picking at least 2 already drawn polylines. These polylines should represent the extent of the topping slab, and the extent of the precast floor panels.

The ”Create composite slab by beams” button allows you to create the precast floor panels with topping slab by selecting the already drawn beams that form the perimeter of the slab area.

Reseating

The ”Pick a new insert” button can be used to redefine the insertion point used to control the layout of the precast concrete floor panels.

The ”Define a new direction for precast slabs” button can be used to redefine the direction of your precast concrete floor panels, by picking a line that runs in the wanted direction.

Precast Options The Precast Options tab can be used to select the type of precast concrete floor panels to be used, if required. You can also define your own user defined precast floor slab width and thickness from here. Some libraries of Precast Flooring profiles are supplied with ProConcrete 3D, and you can also create your own with the ProSteel 3D Create User Shape feature.



Precast Options

Shape Type Choose from a list of predefined shape types.


Insert Plane The position of the precast shapes relative to insertion plane of slab.



User Slab

Use User Slab Select this option to define your own precast slab sizes.



Width Enter the slab panel width here.

Thickness Select the required slab panel thickness.

Composite Options The Steel Decking tab can be used to select the type of metal flooring system to be used, if required. Some libraries of Steel Decking profiles are supplied with ProConcrete 3D, and you can also create your own with the ProSteel 3D Create User Shape feature.

Composite options

Shape Type Choose from a list of predefined shape types.


Insert Plane The position of the slab relative to insertion plane.







Border Lines The Border Lines tab is used to apply cuts to the precast concrete floor panels at supporting members. Penetrations (openings) to the Precast concrete floor panels and topping slab can also be applied from here.

Cut Lines

Number Displays the number of cuts here.

Cut Width Enter the required cut width value here.

Cut Topping Select this option to cut topping as well as panels, if required.

This button is used to ADD A CUT LINE to your precast slab area.

Openings

Number Displays the number of openings here.

This button is used to ADD A POLYCUT (penetration) to your precast slab area.



Assignments The Assignments tab can be used to control the properties of created objects.

Element Select the element that the following properties are

associated.










C.1.4 Walls

In-situ Concrete Walls Command Name: PS_WALL In-situ Concrete walls can be created in ProConcrete 3D through the use of the “Walls” button, located on the ProSteel 3D Elements toolbar and the Plates toolbar. When clicking this button you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Walls” dialog box. This dialog box allows you to create single thickness walls that are rectangular in shape. You can pick points to input the wall path, or you can pick a pre-drawn polyline to define the path for the wall to follow.

Dimension

Height Enter the wall height here.

Thickness Enter the wall thickness here.

Side Offset Enter the required offset along the depth direction.



Radius Enter the required radius for corners here.

Position The position of the wall relative to the setout points

This button is used to place a rectangular shaped wall on an existing line in your 3D model. The size of the rectangular wall is determined by values used in the dialog box, plus the length of the line.

This button is used to define the path of the wall by picking existing points on your 3D model.

This button is used to define the path of the wall by picking an already drawn polyline in your 3D model.

Material Select the material of the wall here.









Item No. Here you can specify a required item number.

Precast Concrete Walls – Single Panels Command Name: PC_PANEL Single Precast Concrete Wall Panels can be created in ProConcrete 3D through the use of the “Create Precast Panel” button, located on the ProConcrete 3D Main toolbar and the Wall toolbar. When clicking this button you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Precast Panel” dialog box. This dialog box allows you to create single thickness precast concrete wall panel arrays that are rectangular in shape. You can pick points to input the wall path, or you can pick a pre-drawn polyline to define the path for the wall to follow.



Dimensions Panel Dimensions

Width Enter the precast panel width here.

Height Enter the precast panel height here.

Thickness Enter the precast panel thickness here.

Options

Offset Distance Enter the required offset along the depth direction.

Offset Position Specify the left, middle or right insertion edge required.

Dynamic Width Select this option to place panels which are as long as the lines or polyline segments used for placing. This overrides any standard panel width value supplied on the Dimensions tab.





Chamfers See next section for explanation of this tab. Edge Inserts See next section for explanation of this tab. Face Inserts See next section for explanation of this tab. Sleeves See next section for explanation of this tab. CastIn Elements See next section for explanation of this tab. Threaded Inserts See next section for explanation of this tab. Assisgnments See next section for explanation of this tab.



Precast Concrete Walls - Arrays Command Name: PC_PANEL_GEN Precast Concrete Wall Panel arrays can be created in ProConcrete 3D through the use of the “Create Panel Arrays” button, located on the ProConcrete 3D Main toolbar and the Wall toolbar. When clicking this button you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Precast Panel” dialog box. This dialog box allows you to create single thickness precast concrete wall panel arrays that are rectangular in shape. You can pick points to input the wall path, or you can pick a pre-drawn polyline to define the path for the wall to follow.

Dimensions Panel Dimensions

Width Enter the precast panel width here.



Height Enter the precast panel height here.

Thickness Enter the precast panel thickness here.

Options

Gap Enter the required gap between panels here.

Offset Distance Enter the required offset along the depth direction.

Offset Position Specify the left, middle or right insertion edge required.

Dynamic Width Select this option to place panels which are as long as the lines or polyline segments used for placing. This overrides any standard panel width value supplied on the Dimensions tab.

Draw Diagonal Select this option to switch on a diagonal system line display.


This button is used to define the path of the wall by picking 2 existing points on your 3D model.


Chamfers The Chamfers tab allows you to specify chamfer sizes, as well as which edges of the panels are to receive chamfers.



Outer Side/Inner Side

All As Same Select this option for all edges to have the same chamfer.

Top Select this option for the top edge of the panel to be chamfered.

Bottom Select this option for the bottom edge of the panel to be chamfered.

Left Select this option for the left edge of the panel to be chamfered.

Right Select this option for the right edge of the panel to be chamfered.

Var 1 Enter the first chamfer distance.

Var 2 Enter the second chamfer distance.

Edge Inserts The Edge Inserts tab allows you to specify cast-in metal inserts to the top, left and right edges of precast panels.



Lifting Inserts

Edge Inserts Select this option if inserts are required.

Insert Edge Specify the none, top, middle or bottom insertion edge required.

Horizontal Specify the number of inserts across the horizontal plane and the spacing distance between them.

Insert Edge Specify the none, left, right or both insertion edge required.

Vertical Specify the number of inserts across the vertical plane and the spacing distance between them.

Block Path Enter a path or browse to a previously defined edge insert symbol.

Face Inserts The Face Inserts tab allows you to specify cast-in metal inserts to the inside and outside faces of precast panels.



Face Lifting Inserts

Face Inserts Select this option if inserts are required.

Insert Face Select the required face(s) from the dropdown list. Inside, outside or both.


Vertical Specify the number of inserts across the vertical plane and the spacing distance between them.

Block Path Enter a path or browse to a previously defined face insert symbol.

Sleeves The Sleeves tab allows you to specify cast-in cylindrical starter bar sleeves to the top and bottom edges of precast panels.



Sleeves

Create Select this option if sleeves are required.

Sleeve Position Select the required sleeve(s) position from the dropdown list. Top, bottom or both.

Spacing Specify the number of sleeves across the horizontal plane and the spacing distance between them.

Click the “Calculate Spacing“ button to launch the Proconcrete 3D Spacing Tool calculator.



ProConcrete 3D Spacing Tool Clicking the Calculate Spacing button on the Sleeves tab launches the ProConcrete 3D Spacing Tool. Enter the Length, Space and Offset values, and they are displayed in the Spacing field. This value is automatically transferred to the Spacing field on the Sleeves tab. CastIn Elements The CastIn Elements tab allows you to specify cast-in weld plates or other objects to the faces of precast panels.

CastIn Elements

Create Select this option if castin elements are required.


Horizontal Specify the number of castin elements across the horizontal plane and the spacing distance between them.

Vertical Specify the number of castin elements across the vertical plane and the spacing distance between them.

Block Path Enter a path or browse to a previously defined castin element symbol.



Threaded Inserts The Threaded Inserts tab allows you to specify cast-in threaded inserts to the faces of precast panels.

Threaded Inserts

Create Select this option if threaded inserts are required.


Horizontal Spc Specify the number of inserts across the horizontal plane and the spacing distance between them.

Vertical Spc Specify the number of inserts across the vertical plane and the spacing distance between them.

Block Path Enter a path or browse to a previously defined threaded insert symbol.

Click the “Calculate Spacing“ button to launch the Proconcrete 3D Spacing Tool calculator.

ProConcrete 3D Spacing Tool See earlier section on SLEEVES for ProConcrete 3D Spacing Tool explanation



Openings The Openings tab allows you to place rectangular window and door openings. The dimensions of the openings are controlled from here, and you use the buttons at the bottom of this tab to create and place the windows and doors.

Window

Width Specify the width of the window opening.

Height Specify the height of the window opening.

Window Head Specify the distance from the bottom of the panel to the top of the window opening.

Door

Width Specify the width of the door opening.

Height Specify the height of the door opening.

Offset Distance Specify the offset distance from the midpoint of the panel.

Use the Create Window button to create window openings at the specified point.



Use the Create Door button to create door openings at the specified point.

Assignment Dropdown lists are provided on the ASSIGNMENT tab to allow you to assign specific Materials, Detailstyles, Classes, Part Families and Layers to the Precast Walls that will be created with this command.

Element Select the element that the following properties are

associated.










Add Inserts to Precast Concrete Panels - Single Command Name: PC_PANEL_INSERT Face Inserts can be added to Single Precast Concrete Wall Panels by the use of the “Add Precast Concrete Panel Inserts Single” button, located on the ProConcrete 3D Panels and Walls toolbar. When clicking this button you are asked to select a panel, and when done you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Panel – Panel Insert” dialog box. This dialog box allows you to add all manner of cast-in inserts to single thickness precast concrete panel walls that are rectangular in shape. You can select inserts from dropdown lists of inserts, choose faces on which to place them, and also pick points on the concrete panels for placement. Note that his dialog box cannot be used to place inserts on panel edges.



Details

Item Type Select a type of Insert from the dropdown list of items.



Vertical Specify the number of inserts across the vertical plane and the spacing distance between them..

Block Path Enter a path or browse to a previously defined insert symbol.

Use the Specify a Point in the Panel to Place Them button to create the pattern of inserts at the specified point. More than one pattern or more than one individual insert can be placed on panels.



Add Inserts to Precast Concrete Panels - Array Command Name: PC_PANEL_ALLINSERTS Face and Edge Inserts can be added to Single Precast Concrete Wall Panels by the use of the “Add Precast Concrete Panel Inserts Array” button, located on the ProConcrete 3D Panels and Walls toolbar. When clicking this button you are asked to select a panel, and when done you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Panel – Panel Insert” dialog box. This dialog box allows you to add all manner of cast-in inserts to single thickness precast concrete panel walls that are rectangular in shape. You can select inserts from dropdown lists of inserts, choose faces and edges on which to place them, and also pick points on the concrete panels for placement.

Edge Inserts The Edge Inserts tab allows you to specify cast-in metal inserts to the top, left and right edges of precast panels. Refer to the previous section on Precast Concrete Walls – Arrays, for an explanation of this tab. Face Inserts The Face Inserts tab allows you to specify cast-in metal inserts to the inside and outside faces of precast panels. Refer to the previous section on Precast Concrete Walls – Arrays, for an explanation of this tab. Sleeves The Sleeves tab allows you to specify cast-in cylindrical starter bar sleeves to the top and bottom edges of precast panels. Refer to the previous section on Precast Concrete Walls – Arrays, for an explanation of this tab.



CastIn Elements The CastIn Elements tab allows you to specify cast-in weld plates or other objects to the faces of precast panels. Refer to the previous section on Precast Concrete Walls – Arrays, for an explanation of this tab. Threaded Inserts The Threaded Inserts tab allows you to specify cast-in threaded inserts to the faces of precast panels. Refer to the previous section on Precast Concrete Walls – Arrays, for an explanation of this tab.





C.1.5 Custom Concrete Elements

Creating User Shapes (Special Shapes) By using the special shape management of ProSteel 3D, you can add your own custom shapes to the program which will then be processed like catalogues containing any number of shapes, i.e., you can establish same sorting as with standard shapes. The selection menu then shows catalogue names as a shape type and the shapes contained in each catalogue appear as shape size, making it easy to choose between different system shapes. You can create special shapes as combination of existing shapes or by using a drawn cross-section or a variant (qualitative generation instruction) with corresponding data base. The program once again manages these shape catalogues in four special shape master groups, which all basically have the same properties and are consequently described together in this chapter. There is a distinction between general special shapes, roof-wall shapes, combination shapes and weld shapes. You create the first two groups by drawing a cross-section; for combination shapes you combine existing shapes to create a new shape (e.g. two U-shapes welded together). The weld shapes are created using a special dialog. For ProConcrete 3D we deal primarily with User Shapes. Roof-Wall Panels, Combination Shapes and Weld Shapes are generally for use with ProSteel 3D. You can store each shape in three different display modes (low, normal and high – which must be created individually). You thereby avoid having to deal with a confusing number of lines when working with rather complex shapes, but you can show the complete shape if needed. Nonetheless, you can always select the ProSteel 3D standard display modes (only center line, envelope, etc.) without having to change any parameters. Here, you see the dialog for special shape management.



It is organized in a tree structure and consists of 4 main tabs for the different types of special shapes. Each of these branches can contain subordinate directories and each subordinate directory can have any number of special shape definitions. However, you cannot make any further subordinate division. Select a shape and the stored cross-section will be displayed on the right monitor. Creation of a Catalogue - Select one of the tabs to layout a catalogue and use the right mouse button. A subordinate menu is displayed offering you the option to layout a catalogue. A subordinate directory is created and you can edit the name. Creation of a Special Shape - A special shape layout is made similar to the layout of a catalogue. Select the desired catalogue and use the right mouse button. Then, you can select the option Layout Shape. Enter the name and the shape appears as an entry. This name is the access name and not the name that later will be displayed in a parts list.



Please note that until now you only created a blank cover that has to be filled with creating a resolution. It is not before then that the special shape has been filed. If you don’t do that, the blank shape cover will be removed at next selection. Layout of an Image Resolution After the layout of a blank special shape definition has been affected, you have to define a resolution. Select the shape and use the right mouse button again.

Here, you select the desired resolution. If resolutions have already been defined for the special shape, you can modify the defined resolution using this method. Definition of Cross-Section - Defining the closed contour, with no crossings, of the cross-section defines a special shape. Depending on the setting, this can be done using poly-lines or individual lines and arc segments. You have to take care that these build a closed



contour. After selection, choose your outer contour and any existing inner contours. You can utilise any number of inner contours that, must not cross the outer contour and must not they have any intersection points between each other.

Now, the program automatically determines the possible insertion points of this shape (center, envelope). Finally, you can still define any additional insertion points. Alternatively, you can define special shapes of regular thickness by using a poly-line contour and by specifying a thickness. After end of definitions, the properties dialog for the parts list data will be displayed.



Enter the name of the parts list, notes, material, etc. Starting from the cross-section drawing and the entered material data, the program calculates the weight in kg/m and displays it in the entry field Weight. Here, you can determine which shape data will be applied to the standard parts list and you can change the weight.

When you close this dialog, the selected resolution has been defined and the special shape layout is finished and the special shape can then be selected and utilized. As you can see, the defined resolution is displayed. Now, you could repeat this procedure with different resolutions or modify any existing resolution as described above.

Reinforcing Concrete Elements


C.2 Reinforcing Concrete Elements

C.2.1 Foundations

Reinforcing Bars for Concrete Footing Pads Command Name: PC_PADFOOTING_REBAR Reinforcing bar cages can be added automatically to previously created Footing Pads by the use of the “Pad Footing Reinforcement” command. The command allows you to place and size patterns of Bottom bars, Top bars and Side bars. Top and side patterns can be ignored if not needed. The bar lengths are determined automatically by the previously created pad being used, and the values placed in the dialog box cells. There is no need to manually input the length of pad bars.



Reinforcement Use this tab to define the steel to be used as well as rebar sizes, spacings and covers.

Create Select the top, bottom and side options as required.

Top/Bottom/Side Rebar

X-Direction Specify the Spacing, Bar Type and Cover in the X direction.

Y-Direction Specify the Spacing, Bar Type and Cover in the Y direction.

Spacing Select or enter the spacing of bars.

Bar Type Select the bar type.

Cover Select or enter the required cover distance.

Above_Below If the Above_Below cell is ticked, then the layers of bars will collide, but if unticked, they will pass one above the other.



Starter Use this tab to define the starter bars if required as well as starter bar sizes.

Create Select this option if starter rebars are required.

Bar Type Select a bar type from the dropdown list.

Extrude Length Specify an extrusion length.

Embed Length Specify an embedment length.

End Condition

Type Select an end condition from the dropdown list.

Status Indicates if you have used standard or user defined end conditions.

Edit the current end condition values. Clicking this button displays the End Properties dialog box for the selected bar

end.

Manually pick columns to have starter bars applied



Rebar End Properties Here you can specify user defined End Properties for each zone of bars.

Properties

Type Indicates the current end condition.

Load Loads the defaults standard end condition values.

Pin Dia Enter a pin dia value.

Length Enter a bend length.

Tail / Leg Enter a tail / leg length if required, otherwise this cell reports on the calculated tail / leg length.

Override Tail Tick this switch to allow a manual input of Tail Leg length

Rotation Displays the rotation value selected from the Rotate button, or you can enter a value to manually rotate.

Click this button to rotate the bends so that they are all 90° to each other and perpendicular to the concrete face.

Clicking this button retrieves the “ProConcrete 3D Standard End Conditions” dialog box, from which you can refer to the standard end condition values for the rebar used



Style The Style tab in this case, allows you to save a style of Footing Pad Reinforcement, to be used in other areas of your model, or on other ProConcrete 3D projects. The Styles feature is used in a similar fashion to the template button. However when using a style, numbers of bars are determined automatically according to the size of the footing pad being used.

Style Displays a list of styles in the current drawing.

Create new style by current settings Use this button to save the current

Apply selected style to current drawing

Import external styles to the list

Remove selected style from the list

Move selected style up



Move selected style down

Options The Options tab allows you to display rebar and one of several available display modes.

Display Mode

Select from the rebar dropdown list one of the following settings:

Line displays rebar and stirrups as single lines only

Cylinder displays rebar and stirrups as extruded cylinders

Sketch displays one rebar in each direction












C.2.2 Reinforcing Bars for Strip Footings

Command Name: PC_STRIPFOOTING_ SEGMENTREBAR The “Strip Footing Reinforcement Cage - Single Segment” button enables you to size and place rebar to previously created single segment strip footings. When clicking this button you are asked at the AutoCAD command line to select a standard strip footing, and after doing so you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Single Cage Reinforcement” dialog box. Command Name: PC_STRIPFOOTING_REBAR The “Strip Footing Reinforcement Cage – All Segments” button enables you to size and place rebar to previously created multi segment strip footings. When clicking this button you are asked at the AutoCAD command line to select a standard strip footing, and after doing so you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Multi-Cage Reinforcement” dialog box.



Reinforcement Zone Values are automatically displayed here that indicate the length of the rebar cage applied to the selected concrete shape. Reinforcement Zone

Start Indicates the start length.

End Indicates the end length.

Rebars On the Rebars tab you are able to design the horizontal (longitudinal) rebars for strip footings. You decide how many bars for each zone (face of strip footing), you choose a size (dia) for these bars, and you choose a concrete cover to these bars. A preview diagram to the right side of the dialog box, shows you your chosen design as you are completing it.



Top/Left/Right/Bottom Zone

Amount Enter the required number of rebars.

Spacing Description Displays the distance between rebars.

Bar Type Select the bar type from the dropdown list.

Cover Select from the dropdown list or enter the cover distance.

Apply current design to other concrete shapes (more than one strip footing)

End Conditions On the End Conditions tab you can create bar end projections, with or without bends, hooks or cranks. End conditions can be chosen for each end of each of the bars to the zones (strip footing faces) that have been used in the Rebars tab. START End Conditions are drawn in GREEN. END End Conditions are drawn in RED. Dropdown lists are used to access the list of standard end conditions. Offset distances for each of the end conditions can be set from this tab, and if needed, standard end conditions can be overwritten to produce almost any end condition imaginable. For



instance, a bar end can be bent to any angle, left, right, up or down, forward or away from the column or beam. And bend radii can also be specified.

Start/End Type Use the dropdown lists to access bends, hooks, cranks and

projections as your required end condition.

Offset A negative value here will shorten the bar, a positive value will extend the bar.


Edit the current end condition values. Clicking this button displays the End Properties dialog box for the selected bar end.




Properties



Pin Dia Enter Pin Dia value.



Overide Tail Tick this switch to allow a manual input of Tail Leg length




Stirrup Here you can design stirrup sizes and spacings, and hinge zones that have stirrups spaced at closer centres. You can achieve more than one hinge zone per column or beam end. A preview diagram to the right side of the dialog box, shows you your chosen design



as you are completing it.

Overall Spacing Description

Nominal Spacing Enter the nominal spacing distance between stirrups.

Start Offset Enter a distance of first stirrup from the shape start.

End Offset Enter a distance of last stirrup from the shape end.

Hinge Zones (NOT USED FOR STRIP FOOTINGS)

Stirrup Rebar


Type Select the stirrup layout from the dropdown list.

Pick No. Displays the number of longitudinal rebars

Repick Here you can redefine the stirrup layout, if required.

Stirrup Longitudinal Offset

Insert Side Select the stirrup offset position from the dropdown list (when using stirrup sets).



Insert Offset When Insert Side is set to User, you can enter the offset value.

Options

No Stirrup Select this option when a stirrup is not required.

Tie Flip If selected, flips the stirrup end tie from left to right or right to left.

Click this button, then pick an existing number of rebars in the preview area to manually define the stirrup layout.

Where stirrup sets are required, this displays the current stirrup (in the left cell) and the total number of stirrups within the set (in the right cell).

Clicking this button allows you to delete an existing stirrup from a stirrup set.

Clicking this button allows you to move back within a stirrup set.

Clicking this button allows you to move forward within a stirrup set.

Apply current design to other concrete shapes (more than one strip footing)

Style The Options tab allows you to control the display of the rebar.



Style Select a stirrup style from the list available.

Fixed Length Select this option when a fixed length is required.

Create a new Style by use of the current settings

Apply the style in the current drawing

Import external styles to the current list of styles

Remove a style from the current list of styles

Options The Options tab allows you to control the display of the rebar.



Display Mode
















Reinforcing User Shape Strip Footings Command Name: PC_UDSTRIPFOOTING_REBAR Rebar cages can be added semi-automatically to user defined Strip Footings by the use of the “Add UserShape Strip Footing Reinforcement Cage” command. The command allows you to place and size all bars needed for a user defined Strip Footing Rebar Cage. Top bars, bottom bars, side bars and stirrups can all be designed by the user. The bar lengths are determined automatically by the length of the user shape being used, and the values placed in the dialog box cells. There is no need to manually input the length of user shape bars. Bar ends can also be designed with or without projections, and bends if required. The user can click into the preview window and perform zooms and pans. Command hints will display under the preview window. Note that the User Defined Strip footing must be placed by the use of the Create Strip Footing command. The user defined strip footing can be chosen from the pulldown list of User Shapes available from the relevant ProConcrete 3D Strip Footing dialog box. User the Shape Class pulldown list. The user shape will only be available if previously created by the user with the Create User Shape command. When clicking the Add User Shape Strip Footing Reinforcement Cage button you are asked at the AutoCAD command line to select a user defined strip footing, and after doing so you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D User Shape Reinforcement” dialog box. Use of this dialog box is explained in the Custom Concrete Elements section of this manual A.1.5





C.2.3 Beams and Columns

Command Name: PC_REGULAR_REBARBEAM PC_REBARBEAM_EDIT

ADD REINFORCEMENT CAGE TO BEAMS OR COLUMNS

This is the Add Reinforcement Cage to Beams or Columns button and is found on the ProConcrete 3D Beams and

Columns toolbar.

EDIT MULTI-CAGE REINFORCEMENT

This is the Edit Multi-Cage Reinforcement button and is found on the ProConcrete 3D Beams and Columns toolbar.

Reinforcing bar cages can be added automatically to previously created Concrete Columns and Beams by the use of the “Add Reinforcement Cage to Beams or Columns” command. When clicking this button you are asked at the AutoCAD command line to select a beam or column object, and after doing so you are presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Single Cage Reinforcement” dialog box. The command allows you to place and size all bars needed for a Column Rebar Cage or a Beam Rebar Cage. Top bars, bottom bars, side bars and stirrups can all be designed by the user. The bar lengths are determined automatically by the length of the column or beam being used, and the values placed in the dialog box cells. There is no need to manually input the length of column / beam bars. Bar ends can also be designed with or without projections, and bends if required.



Reinforcement Zone Values are automatically displayed here that indicate the length of the rebar cage applied to the selected concrete shape. You can override the rebar cage length by entering new Start and/or End values. Reinforcement Zone

Start Indicates the start length.

End Indicates the end length.

Rebars On the Rebars tab you are able to design the longitudinal vertical rebars for columns, and the horizontal (longitudinal) rebars for beams. You decide how many bars for each zone (face of column or beam), you choose a size (dia) for these bars, and you choose a concrete cover to these bars. A preview diagram to the right side of the dialog box, shows you your chosen design as you are completing it.





Spacing Description Displays the distance between rebars. Check the Spacing Description box to allow user input, otherwise the spacing is calculated according to the amount of rebars required.



Apply current design to other concrete shapes (more than one beam or column)

Clone existing cage to another concrete shape.

End Conditions On the End Conditions tab you can create bar end conditions, with or without bends, hooks or cranks. End conditions can be chosen for each end of each of the bars to the zones (column / beam faces) that have been used in the Rebars tab. START End Conditions are drawn in GREEN. END End Conditions are drawn in RED.



Dropdown lists are used to access the list of standard end conditions. Offset distances for each of the end conditions can be set from this tab, and if needed, standard end conditions can be overwritten to produce almost any end condition imaginable. For instance, a bar end can be bent to any angle, left, right, up or down, forward or away from the column or beam. Bend radii can also be specified.



Start/End

Type Use the dropdown lists to access bends, hooks, cranks and projections as your required end condition.





Properties












Stirrup Here you can design stirrup sizes and spacings, and hinge zones that have stirrups spaced at closer centres. You can achieve more than one hinge zone per column or beam end. A preview diagram to the right side of the dialog box, shows you your chosen design as you are completing it.



Start Offset Enter a distance of first stirrup from the shape start.

End Offset Enter a distance of last stirrup from the shape end.



Hinge Zones

Start/End Select this option if a start/end hinge zone(s) are required.

Length Enter the length of the hinge zone, if required.

Spacing Enter the spacing of the hinge zone, if required.

Stirrup Rebar



Pick No. Displays the number of longitudinal rebars



Insert Side Select the stirrup offset position from the dropdown list (when using stirrup sets).

Insert Offset When Insert Side is set to User, you can enter the offset value.

Options

No Stirrup Select this option when a stirrup is not required.

Auto Size Select this option to automatically set the stirrup position and size (this is determined by the rebar layout).

Polygon Stirrup Select this option if a stirrup is required that has more or less than four sides.

Tie Flip If selected, flips the stirrup end tie from left to right or right to left.








Style The Style tab allows you to save a style of Column or Beam Reinforcement, to be used in other areas of your model, or on other ProConcrete 3D projects. The Styles feature is used in a similar fashion to the template button. However when using a style, numbers of bars are determined automatically according to the size of the column or being used.

Style Select a stirrup style from the list available.

Fixed Length Select this option when a fixed length is required.

Create a new Style by use of the current settings

Apply the style in the current drawing

Import external styles to the current list of styles



Remove a style from the current list of styles



Collision The Collision tab allows you to select an action that occurs where aligned bars or stirrups collide

Rebar Collision Check The Action dropdown lists allow you to select an action

that occurs where aligned bars collide. The available actions include Joggle bars and Move bars.

Stirrup Collision Check The Action dropdown lists allow you to select an action that occurs where aligned stirrups collide.



Options The Options tab allows you to control certain behaviour and display settings for the column and beam cages.

Display Mode




Sketch displays one rebar in each direction.

Rebar Options

Extend to Cover Extend length of rebar to edge of concrete less cover value












Cover Line Boundary for Beams and Columns Command Name: PC_CREATE_COVERLINE Use the Cover Line Bounday feature to add a coverline sketch to the end of a beam or column. The coverline will help the user ensure that their reinforcement cage is contained within the specified cover. You may need to view your beam/column and its cage from the end of the beam or column to check for fit.

ADD COVER LINE BOUNDARY

This button is found on the ProConcrete 3D Beams and Columns toolbar, and is used to add the cover line sketch to

the end of a beam or column. When using this command, the user is asked at the command line to Specify the Cover Value required.



Copy Reinforcement Cage Command Name: PC_SHAPEREBARBEAM_COPY Use the Copy Reinforcement Cage feature to copy a cage from an existing beam/column to another unreinforced beam or column.

ADD COVER LINE BOUNDARY

This button is found on the ProConcrete 3D Beams and Columns toolbar. When using this command, the user is

asked at the command line to select a source cage. After selecting an existing cage, the user is then asked at the command line to select a target concrete object to clone the cage to. The source cage will be copied to the target object. The concrete object belonging to the source cage does not have to be the same size as the target object, but the shape has to be similar.



Adding Multiple Layers for Beams and Columns Cages Command Name: PC_LAYER_REBARBEAM Use the Add Multi Layer to Reinforcement Cage feature to add extra layers of top, bottom and side bars to an existing reinforcement cage.

ADD MULTI LAYER TO REINFORCEMENT CAGE

This button is found on the ProConcrete 3D Beams and Columns toolbar, and is used to add additional layers of top

bars, side bars or bottom bars to existing reinforcement cages. The user is asked at the command line to select the Base cage, and after doing so the ProConcrete 3D single Cage Reinforcement dialog box appears, and additional bars appear within the cage. The existing selected cage is temporarily displayed in a greyed out Linemode so that the user can concentrate on designing the extra layers. The original cage is set back to its normal display mode after finishing the command and closing the dialog box. Properties of the existing reinforcement cage are not changed in any way. The extra bars placed are longitudinal only, there is no allowance in this command for additional stirrups. Spacer bars are included with the extra layer, but there is no currently no control for there size or spacing. They can be resized and moved manually if desired, and they can also be deleted after completing the additional layers.



Rebars On the Rebars tab you are able to design the longitudinal vertical rebars for columns, and the horizontal (longitudinal) rebars for beams. You decide how many bars for each zone (face of column or beam), you choose a size (dia) for these bars, and you choose a concrete cover to these bars. A preview diagram to the right side of the dialog box, shows you your chosen design as you are completing it.





Spacing Description Displays the distance between rebars. Check the Spacing Description box to allow user input, otherwise the spacing is calculated according to the amount of rebars required.



Apply current design to other concrete shapes (more than one beam or column)

Clone existing cage to another concrete shape.

End Conditions On the End Conditions tab you can create bar end conditions, with or without bends, hooks or cranks. End conditions can be chosen for each end of each of the bars to the zones (column / beam faces) that have been used in the Rebars tab. START End Conditions are drawn in GREEN. END End Conditions are drawn in RED. Dropdown lists are used to access the list of standard end conditions. Offset distances for each of the end conditions can be set from this tab, and if needed, standard end conditions can be overwritten to produce almost any end condition imaginable. For instance, a bar end can be bent to any angle, left, right, up or down, forward or away from the column or beam. Bend radii can also be specified.





Start/End

Type Use the dropdown lists to access bends, hooks, cranks and projections as your required end condition.





Properties











Clicking this button retrieves the “ProConcrete 3D Standard End Conditions” dialog box, from which you can refer to the standard end condition values for the rebar used.

Options The Options tab allows you to control certain behaviour and display settings for the column and beam cages.

Display Mode





Rebar Options



Extend to Cover Extend length of rebar to edge of concrete less cover value










C.2.4 Slabs and Walls

RebarSet Command Name: PC_SLAB_REBARSET PC_WALL_REBARSET PC_REBARSET_EDIT_SLAB PC_REBARSET_EDIT_WALL

ADD SLAB REINFORCEMENT - REBARSET

The Add Slab Reinforcement - RebarSet button is found on the ProConcrete 3D Slabs toolbar. Clicking this button

presents you with the “ProConcrete 3D RebarSet” dialog box where you can design your rebar set for type, size, location and end conditions.

ADD PANEL OR WALL REINFORCEMENT – REBARSET

The Add Panel or Wall Reinforcement - RebarSet button is found on the ProConcrete 3D Panels and Walls toolbar.

Clicking this button presents you with the “ProConcrete 3D RebarSet” dialog box where you can design your rebar set for type, size, location and end conditions.

EDIT SLAB REINFORCEMENT - REBARSET

The Edit Slab Reinforcement - RebarSet button is found on the ProConcrete 3D Slabs toolbar. When you click this

button, you are asked to select a previously reinforced slab, and you are then presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Slab Reinforcement - RebarSet” dialog box where you can edit your rebar set design for type, size, location and end conditions.



EDIT PANEL OR WALL REINFORCEMENT – REBARSET

The Edit Panel or Wall Reinforcement - RebarSet button is found on the ProConcrete 3D Panels & Walls toolbar.

When you click this button, you are asked to select a previously reinforced wall or panel, and you are then presented with the “ProConcrete 3D Panel Reinforcement - RebarSet” dialog box where you can edit your rebar set design for type, size, location and end conditions. RebarSet

Near/Top Face RebarSet

Create Select this option if a top rebar set for slabs, or a nearside rebar set for walls is required.

Centered Centers the rebarset about the slab thickness



Face Cover Select cover value between rebar and Near or Top Face

Outer Rebar Which rebar is to be closer to the outer edge

Vertical/Horizontal


Layout The array method

Left Offset Enter a distance from the left end of the rebar to the concrete shape edge.

Space Select or enter the spacing of bars.

Right Offset Enter a distance from the right end of the rebar to the concrete shape edge.

Spacing Displays the spacing description between rebar sets.Far/Bottom Face RebarSet

Create Select this option if a bottom rebar set for slabs, or a farside rebar set for walls is required.

Face Cover The cover value between rebar and Near or Top Face

Outer Rebar Which rebar is to be closer to the outer edge

Vertical/Horizontal


Layout The array method

Left Offset Enter a distance from the left end of the rebar to the concrete shape edge.


Right Offset Enter a distance from the right end of the rebar to the concrete shape edge.

Spacing Displays the spacing description between rebar sets.

Use the “Select the Planeshape to Create RebarSet“ button to add a RebarSet to a selected slab or wall.

Use the “Select the Planeshape and Polyline to Create RebarSet“ button to add a RebarSet to defined polyline area on a selected slab or wall.

Use the “Select the Planeshape and Points to Create RebarSet“ button to add a RebarSet to defined area (by picking points) on a selected slab or wall.



Apply current design to other concrete shapes (more than one slab or wall)

Allows the user to reset the main bar direction of rebarset



End Condition End conditions can be added to all vertical, horizontal, and longitudinal bars within the RebarSet of a floor and wall via this tab.

Start/End

Type Select the end condition type from the dropdown list.

Offset Enter the offset distance.



Options



Display Mode




Do not apply Polycut on Pending Rebarset --------------------------------------------

Generate Rebarset Parallel to Concrete Element ECS XY Plane - This option forces rebars to be placed parallel to the concrete element co-ordinate system












Mesh Reinforcement Command Name: PC_SLAB_MESH PC_WALL_MESH Use the Mesh feature to add mesh reinforcement to slabs and walls. You can design your mesh for type, cover and laps.

ADD SLAB REINFORCEMENT - MESH

This button is found on the ProConcrete 3D Slabs toolbar, and is used to add mesh reinforcement to slabs.

ADD PANEL OR WALL REINFORCEMENT - MESH

This button is found on the ProConcrete 3D Panels and Walls toolbar, and is used to add mesh reinforcement to

walls. For Slab Mesh reinforcement you are prompted at the command line to “Select a Wall/Panel/Slab Object”. This object must have been previously created. You are then prompted at the command line to “Select Longitudinal Direction of Mesh”. Pick an edge of the previously selected object to indicate the long direction. You are then asked to “Pick Insertion Point on Top Plane”. This request is asking you to osnap to a setout point for mesh placement. OSNAP to the wanted point. The ProConcrete 3D Slab Reinforecement – Mesh dialog box then appears. Fill in the values as required. The mesh is placed according to those values. For Wall Mesh reinforcement you are simply prompted at the command line to “Select a Wall/Panel/Slab Object”. This object must have been previously created. Once selected the mesh is placed according to those values.



Mesh

Create Select this option if mesh reinforcement is required.

Top/Bottom Steel

Mesh Select from the dropdown list.

From Database Select this option if uing mesh from the database.



User Defined Select this option is creating user defined mesh.

Cover Select from the dropdown list.

X_Dir Overlap Enter an overlap distance in the X direction, if required.

Y_Dir Overlap Enter an overlap distance in theYdirection, if required.

Common

Cut To Edge Select this option to trim the mesh sheet.

Side Offset Enter a side offset distance.

Stagger Offset Enter a stagger offset distance.

Allows the user to reset the main bar direction of mesh

Options

Display Mode




Line displays mesh as single lines only

Cylinder displays mesh as extruded cylinders


Boundary displays mesh as an outline.












Trimmers to Slab / Wall / Panel Openings Command Name: PC_OPENING_TRIMMER Use the Trimmers to Openings feature to add trimmer bars around slab and /or wall openings. The opening must already exist in the slab or wall.

ADD TRIMMERS TO OPENINGS

This button is found on the ProConcrete 3D Slabs toolbar and also on the ProConcrete 3D Panels and Walls toolbar.

It is used to add trimmer bars around slab or wall openings. For trimmer bars to openings you are prompted at the command line to “Select a Wall/Panel/Slab Object”. This object must have been previously created and already include openings. After selecting the object, The ProConcrete 3D trimming Bar dialog box then appears. Fill in the values as required. The trimmer bars are placed according to those values. Opening Trimmer Use the Opening Trimmer tab to define trimmers for openings, as required.



Parallel Rebar



Anchorage Length Enter the anchorage length for the trimmer bars.


Bar Layer Select from a dropdown list.

Side Offset Select the side offset from a dropdown list.

Top Cover Select the top cover from a dropdown list.

Bottom Cover Select the bottom cover from a dropdown list

Perpendicular Rebar

Create Select this option if perpendicular rebars are required.

Bar Shapes Select the bar shape from a dropdown list.




Corner Trimmer Bar







Opening

This button is used to ADD A POLYCUT (penetration) to mesh area by selecting Polyline

This button is used to ADD A POLYCUT (penetration) to mesh area by selecting Points

Allows the user to reset the main bar direction of trimmers

Options

Display Mode




Line displays mesh as single lines only

Cylinder displays mesh as extruded cylinders


Boundary displays mesh as an outline.












C.2.5 Custom Concrete Elements

Reinforcing User Shapes Using Standard Dialogs Command Name: PC_USERDEFINED_REBARBEAM Rebar cages can be added semi-automatically to user defined User Shapes by the use of the “Add UserShape Reinforcement Cage” command. The command allows you to place and size all bars needed for a user defined Column Rebar Cage or a Beam Rebar Cage. Top bars, bottom bars, side bars and stirrups can all be designed by the user. The bar lengths are determined automatically by the length of the user shape being used, and the values placed in the dialog box cells. There is no need to manually input the length of user shape bars. Bar ends can also be designed with or without projections, and bends if required. The user can click into the preview window and perform zooms and pans. Command hints will display under the preview window. Rebars The Rebars tab of the “ProConcrete 3D UserShape” dialog box shown below allows you to design the longitudinal rebars for User Shapes. The dialog includes a preview area on the right side. The dashed line around the inside edge of the User Shape shown in the preview area indicates the cover distance to rebars. The dashed lines will help you design your rebar cage.



Rebar Property



Rebar Distribution

Amount Enter the required number of rebars for a rebar set.

Spacing Description Displays the total number of rebars, plus the spacing between rebars for the current rebar set.

Adjust Spacing When ticked, this function allows the user to design the rebar spacing pattern by typing a spacing layout in the Spacing Description cell

Start/End EndCondition

Type Use the dropdown list to access the required end condition.






Enable Edit Tools When ticked, this function allows the user to manually edit the layout of rebars within the current user defined cage. Within the preview area, the user can select any rebar, then from a right click contect sensitive menu, edit that rebar. Editing tools include the following functions:

Align Rebar by Edge

Align Rebar by Rebar

Make Equal Spacing

Delete Rebar

The Pickline button allows you to “pick an edge” in the preview area (a dashed line segment) to use for the design of your rebar set. You can click this button several times to add and design several rebar sets within your single rebar cage.

Clicking this button allows you to delete an existing rebar set from a rebar cage.

Clicking this button allows you to move back to a previous rebar set.

Clicking this button allows you to move forward to the next rebar set.

The Zoom All button allows the user to reset the window so that all of the User Shape and User Cage can be seen. (The user can click into the preview window and perform standard AutoCAD zooms and pans)




Properties










Stirrup The Stirrup tab shown below enables you to create stirrups to suit the different areas of your User Shape. Stirrup sizes, spacing and types can be chosen from available dropdown lists.





Start Offset Enter the offset distance to the first stirrup.

End Offset Enter the offset distance to the last stirrup.

Description Displays the setout and distance between stirrups.

Stirrup Rebar



Pick No. Displays the number of rebars used to define the current stirrup layout. The user can define this number.



Insert Offset Select the stirrup offset position from the dropdown list (when using stirrup sets). Choose from Front, Back, Center & User

Start Offset When Insert Offset is set to User, you can enter the offset value.



Options

Tie Flip If selected, flips the stirrup end tie from left to right or top to bottom.

No Stirrup Selecting this option hides all stirrups.






The Zoom All button allows the user to reset the window so that all of the User Shape and User Cage can be seen. (The user can click into the preview window and perform standard AutoCAD zooms and pans)



Options

Display Mode





Control Options

Display Cover Zone Select this option to display the dashed concrete cover lines in the preview area.

Design Options

Ignore Min Edge This option allows the user to define a minimum recognisable edge distance. It is important to set this value such that concrete chamfers can be ignored when designing your user shape rebar cage.












Editing Concrete Elements


C.3 Editing Concrete Elements

Command Name: PS_MODIFY It may be necessary to correct the length of shapes and plates already inserted or to provide bevels, notches, etc. When inserting the component parts, you have paid attention to inserting the shape at the correct position using the correct alignment, e.g., you have positioned the axis on a system line. Very often component parts overlap and must be adapted subsequently. Additionally, it may be necessary to rework your model due to modifications... ProSteel 3D offers a large range of commands for the modification of component parts. Some operations can (also) be executed using the standard AutoCAD commands, and the grips. Others, require the corresponding ProSteel 3D commands. There are many different commands for a modification depending on purpose. In the following chapter, these commands are explained in detail. The modifications are divided into commands for all parts, commands only for shapes or only for plates, etc. When you select the command, the following main dialog appears with the commands for all parts.





C.3.1 Extend/Trim

Cut at Line

This function allows complete shapes to be cut or extended at boundaries, just like the AutoCAD command for the stretching and cutting of lines. For this purpose, you first have to click the shape at the

end to be cut and then select the line. The boundary is formed only by a construction line, which is arranged vertically to the active UCS, plane and thus creating a cut plane. If the plane is slanted, the modified shape will have a slanted plane, too. By using this function, shapes that are too long or too short can be adapted to fit after their insertion. When you have typed a value in the Distance field of the main dialog, the shape will be shortened by this value after it has been cut. Please note that the distance refers to a vertical distance between shape and cut plane. The shape is cut at an imaginary plane, the line being oriented vertically to the active UCS-plane. Working in a view simplifies your work, since the shape is cut “at this line”. If the shape could intersect with the line (i.e. you consider the line to be of infinite length!), the shape is cut. To extend the shape, hold down the ALT key while clicking the end to be extended.



Cut at Shape The shape is cut or extended at another shape. When the shape is cut, the shorter section is always cut off. Click the shape to be cut and then the shape along which this shape is

to be cut. The plane actually hit by the centerline (or the extended centerline) of the shape to be cut will be the cut plane. If the centerline does not meet any surface, no cut can be made! Please note that a logical link is created between the parts if this option is applied. The result will be that if one part is modified, the cut will be automatically updated.



C.3.2 Divide/Connect

Divide a Shape By using this function, you can divide a shape at a cutting line into two shapes. A single shape, a plate or several elements can be divided into two independent elements. To start with, select the shape to be divided. Then, click the cutting line. When you have entered a distance in the main dialog Distance, both new ends will be shortened by this value. Depending on the setting, you can divide several elements at the same time. However, please note that the distance refers to a vertical distance between shape and cutting line. Distance The two new shapes are shortened by this value at the cutting

line. The arising gap has the double distance value.

At Plane If this option has been activated, you are asked for three points, which have to form a plane. The parts are divided along this plane.

The cutting line may be any line. If the line is slanted, the shapes are divided accordingly. If you indicate only one point, it will be used perpendicular to the centerlines. The information for the parts lists is identical for both parts with that of the initial shape, except for the length. In order to master the course of the cut line better, it is recommended to work in one of the view. Example for Platform Design For example, you can easily create changed girders at platform constructions by first laying the shapes to be changed as a whole and then dividing them at their bottom trains. Vice versa, bottom trains can be removed rapidly and the changes at this position can be cancelled.

Let us assume that you want to design a platform using the following shapes: platform beams IPE 300, platform edge girders IPE 200, headers HEA 120. Create a working area with these dimensions and insert the shapes at the construction lines Overlaps can be ignored!



Change to the top view and use the dialog box for the processing of the elements. As an alternative, you can also process the Y-axes of the general overview in the front view.

Since IPE 300 has a flange width of 150 mm, enter the value 75 in the Separation Distance field and click the button DIVIDE. Zoom the points of intersection one after the other, select the uncut part of the cross girder to be separated, and the construction line as cutting line. In the figure on the left, you see that you have several shape parts now that can be connected. You need not insert each partial shape and the risk for dimensional errors is eliminated. If you want to remove beams, you can easily close the gaps between cross girders and create a continuous shape by clicking the function “Combine”.

Combine two Shapes This function allows shapes of the same length to be combined, provided that they are exactly aligned! Click the two shapes to be combined. If they are not in alignment, the

function will be aborted. The information for the parts lists of the new shape is identical with that of the first selected shape, except for the length. If you keep the ALT key pressed, the shape and the position are not checked. Then, you can combine any shape with any shape.



C.3.3 Other

Outlets (Milling Out or Notch) Using this function, you can insert simple geometrical shapes of outlets and countersunk parts into your shapes.

You can create square, wedge-type, and circular shapes. The dimensions are entered via a dialog box. After selection of the part and the insertion point at the part, the following dialog appears. Select the

desired basic form by selecting the corresponding page. Rectangular Outlet

Width Specifies the width of the outlet.

Height Specifies the height of the outlet.

Depth Specifies the depth of the outlet.

Position Width Select the width position related to the insertion point.

Position Height Select the height position related to the insertion point.

Position Depth Select the depth position related to the insertion point.



Wedge-Type Outlet

Width Specifies the width of the outlet.


Depth Specifies the depth of the outlet.




Horizontal Select the position of the wedge tip in horizontal direction.

Vertical Select the position of the wedge tip in vertical direction.



Circular Outlet

Radius Specifies the radius of the outlet.


Angle Specifies the angle of the outlet.




Radius Select whether the outlet has to be carried out as outer circle or as inner circle.



Position

You still have the possibility to rotate the inserted notch or cut-out by any of the three coordinate axes. Just click the +90/-90 button, if you want to rotate the cut-out in 90° steps. If you require a different angle just enter the value into the Rotation Angle field and then click the +PHI/-PHI button.

The outer edge of the top flange is the cut-out insertion point, the expected cut-out is defined by edges.

Repeated use creates more complex millings.



C.3.4 Polycuts

Polygonal Cut-Outs Using this command, you can cut out shapes along any freely drawn contour (poly-line). Thus, you can e.g. create notches that are not covered by the program via the special notch function. You can also subtract one shape from another to create penetrations, e.g. to obtain slotted tubes, penetrated handrail posts or others. If you have entered a value in the Gap Spacing input field of the main dialog, the cut-out is regularly extended to all directions by the indicated value to gain some “space” for inaccuracies of production. In any case, the created polygon will be extended to the top and to the bottom in the UCS Z-plane. Therefore, please pay attention that your UCS has been selected accordingly. In case of a direct use of this function via the command bar, the current settings of the main dialog apply. Click this button if you have not yet a contour in form of a poly-

line or circle or arc. You can enter the different points as you like, but be careful that the lines don’t overlap in the polygon.

Click this button if you have already a contour in form of a poly-line, etc.

Click this button if you want to subtract the contour of another solid from the selected object (penetration or solid to be subtracted).

Position Here, you select whether the solid to be subtracted has to penetrate the selected object completely or partially. This is not valid for solids to be subtracted. The Position dropdown list is not appropriate for concrete objects. It is specifically created to help you deal with flange type steel shapes when performing polycuts. Typically leave this set to Complete.

Gap Here, you can indicate a gap by which the cut contour is increased before the subtraction.

If you have ‘divided’ a shape using this function, you will not obtain two shapes. This has to do with the volume modeller of AutoCAD. You must take care not to create two parts of a shape - e.g., by prior shape shortening. If you want to obtain two shapes, please use first the function ‘Divide’ and divide the shape at a suitable point.



In the following you can see two examples for the working of polygonal cut-outs: on the left, there is a normal poly-cut and on the right, there is a milling via a solid to be subtracted.

Create a Penetration Here is still another example for creating a penetration of tubes:

On the first two pictures, you see the situation in the front view and in the top view (the cutting planes are switched off so that you can see the depth. Put the selection for ‘Poly-Cuts’ on Remove and click the button POLY-CUT. Now click the big tube, then one of the small tubes in order to cut out the volume, Click the big tube again and then the other small tube, in order to cut out its volume, too. in the third picture, you see the cut-outs in the big tube (the two slanted tubes have been omitted in this representation).



C.3.5 Modify Shapes

Shortening and Extending

Shorten

Click this button to shorten a shape by picking two points. Their perpendicular distance to the center line specifies the shortening value.

Click this button to shorten a shape by explicitly indicating the value.

Click this button to shorten the shape by the value indicated under default.

Default Enter the value of shape shortening according to default.

In all three cases, you have to pick the shape at the end to be modified. If you pick in the middle third of the shape length, each end is shortened by half the specified value.

Lengthen

These functions can be used similar to shape shortening in order to extend a shape. However, this doesn’t work if the selected end has been modified by a cut.



Other

Cope

This command permits a parametric cope of a shape at another shape. Another dialog appears. Since you can also select this function directly, you will find the description in one of the following chapters under the command ‘Copes’.

Mitre Cuts

Using this command, you can combine two shapes by means of a mitred cut, which can also be carried out as 3D-cut. The bisecting line determines the cutting plane. If the height of the two shapes differs, the outer edges are not aligned.

Using this command, you can also carry out a mitred cut. The intersection points of outer and inner edges determine the cutting plane here. This means that even shapes of different height are correctly cut aligned.

This function cuts two shapes in a way that an arc element of the shape type picked first can be inserted with the specified radius.

Don’t lengthen Parts The used shapes are not lengthened during the Biangular Cut.

Radius The radius of the arc element to be inserted; this radius can either be entered as absolute value or as many times the maximum diameter of the first shape. In this case, you enter e.g. *2.

Gap A gap of this thickness is kept between the shapes at mitred cuts.

Please note that a logical link is created between the parts at these cutting commands. The result will be that if one part is modified, the cut will be automatically updated. Here, you see some examples for mitred cuts, which have been created using different variants:



Modify Connections of Structural Steel Work

Using the 3D-modifications, you also can modify the connections of ProSteel 3D by means of the connection-editor. Click this button to open the corresponding dialog.

You will find the description of the connection-editor in a separate chapter of this manual so that you can refer to it for more detailed information.





C.3.6 Modify Plates

Modify Contour

Corner

Use this function to add another edge to the plate. For this purpose, you have to pick the plate at the position to be inserted. Now, a new contour point will be created at the picked position, which can be moved using the grips.

Use this function to delete an edge from the plate.

Edges

Use this function to transfer the contour of a plate to other plates.

This function permits to adapt the basic polygon of a plate processed by cuts to the current form. The corresponding modifications become superfluous and are deleted.

If may sometimes be easier to modify the edges of a non-processed plate. In addition, this can be useful for data export if modifications of the contour are not supported there.



Mitre Cut

These functions permit mitred cuts between two plates. Since they are identical with those of the shapes, you can refer to this chapter for more detailed information.

Gap A gap of this thickness is kept between the plates at mitred cuts.

Chamfers and Edges These dialog pages and modification options correspond to the identical pages of the plate editor. Please refer to this chapter for more detailed description for processing of chamfers and edges.

Processing by Means of the Plate Editor Using the 3D-modifications, you also can modify the plates by means of the plate-editor. Click this button to open the corresponding dialog. You will find the description of the plate-editor in a separate chapter of

this manual so that you can refer to it for more detailed information.



C.3.7 Walls

The Walls tab of the Element Modification dialog box has been specifically designed for ProConcrete 3D Users. It will ideally allow you to place Windows and Doors accurately within ProConcrete 3D Walls.

Windows/Doors

The Window button will allow you to accurately place a 4 sided rectangular penetration within an already formed ProConcrete 3D Wall.

The Door button will allow you to accurately place a rectangular door penetration within an already formed ProConcrete 3D Wall.

Edges

The Edges buttons will allow you to add extra or delete extra edges to form non-rectangular walls.

Set Height

The Set Height buttons will allow you to distort rectangular walls into non-rectangular walls.





C.3.8 Options

Multiple Selection

Cut at line You can cut several parts simultaneously at one line without having to select the function once again.

Cut at Object You can cut several parts simultaneously at another part without having to select the function once again.

Divide You can divide several parts simultaneously without having to select the function once again.

Polycuts You can cut an object simultaneously at several poly-lines without having to select the function once again.

Loop

Cut at Lines The command ‘Cut at Line’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Cut at Object The command ‘Cut at Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.



Divide The command ‘Divide Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Connect The command ‘Combine Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Shorten The command ‘Shorten Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Lengthen The command ‘Extend Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Poly-Cuts The command ‘Polygonal Cut-Outs’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Mitre Cut The command ‘Mitred Cut’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Insert Corner The command ‘Insert Corner’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Delete Corner The command ‘Delete Corner’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Miscellaneous

Close Dialog The dialog is immediately closed after an action. Otherwise, you have to quit it manually, but you could at once select another command instead.



C.3.9 Cope

Command Name: PS_NOTCH Notches and shape cuts can be created automatically using pre-selectable distance dimensions. You may select from various variants and track your input directly in the drawing and change in “real time” if needed.

Producing a Notch For this purpose, you first have to click on the shape, which has to be notched, and then the shape specifying the contour. When you select the command, the connection is created on the base of your last setting. Now you can fit the connection in the appearing dialog; you can check the result immediately in the model.



Layout Here, you select the shape of the cope. The different variants are shown in the picture below:

On the upper left, the initial situation before coping is shown (the shapes are still overlapping), and on the upper right you see the contour. Pictures below from left to right: Fit Shape Start (the normal cope), Fit Shape Middle and Fit Shape End.

Corner Layout Edge – The copes at the shape radii are carried out with a beveled edge. Radial – The copes at the shape radii are carried out with adapted radii. In the Radius input field, the determined radius can be modified later. Access Holes – The holes are drilled in the inner corners of the cope. In the Radius input field, the radius of the drill holes can be preset.

Reference If Outer Edge (upper field) is activated; the dimensions for the distance between top and bottom flange inside resp. outside refer to the outside of the flanges. If Inner Edge is activated, the dimensions refer to the inside of the flanges. If Outer Edge (lower field) is activated, the dimensions for the distance between top and bottom flange edge refer to the outside of the flanges. If Center is activated, the dimensions for the distance refer to the shape end (the exact position depends on the ‘Web Distance’ value).



Group Distances

Distances The following dimensions can be set for upper flange and bottom flange separately:

In the Radius input field, you can indicate the radius of ‘Drill Holes’ or ‘Radial’ option.

Clicking this button allows an unknown shape to be clicked. The flange thickness is then entered in the input fields for Top and Bottom Flange Inside. If you have entered a value in the +Distance field, this value will be added. Using this function, a flange distance can be swiftly determined without knowing the shape. As reference, you should select the setting ‘Outer Edge’.

+ Distance: This value is added to the result in the function GET FLANGE THICKNESS.

By clicking this button, you can transfer the data of the current cope directly to several copes, which have to be created anew. You have to click all shapes first which have to obtain the cope. Then you have to click the shapes to be coped.



Standardized Notches

List This List shows previously defined notches from a database.

You can create these database files using any DBASE editor you like. You can previously define a certain number of the most frequent notches. In the different List Fields you can have a look on the data, which are the base of the connection. Apart from this you can select the desired notch by clicking an entry.



C.3.10 Outlet

Command Name: PS_OUTLET Using this function, you can insert simple geometrical shapes of outlets and countersunk parts into your shapes. With repeated use, any complex structure can be created. You can create square, wedge-type, and circular shapes. The dimensions are entered via a dialog box. Since the entered data can be directly checked on screen, the entries are not described in detail.

Creation of Outlets When selecting the function you are prompted to indicate the shape to feature a cut-out. First, click the shape and then select the cut-out insertion point. The following dialog box appears where you enter the dimensions of the cut-out and its relation to the insertion point. In the model, the current shape of the cut-out is shown in red colour. After quitting the dialog box, the displayed cut-out will be cut from the shape.



Apart from rectangular contours, cut-outs can also be created with a wedge-shaped or with a cylindrical (radial) contour.

Position The dialog box ‘POSITION Folder’ also offers you the option to rotate the inserted notch or cut-out by any of the three coordinate axes. Just click the +90/-90 button, if you want to rotate the cut-out in 90° steps. If you require a different angle just enter the value into the Rotation Angle field and then click the +PHI/-PHI button.



Here, you see the example for creating a cut-out in a shape or in a plate:

The outer edge of the top flange is the cut-out insertion point, the expected cut-out is defined by edges. The corner has been cut from the flange.

Repeated use creates more complex millings.





C.3.11 Boolean Operations

Command Name: See Individual Functions For volume modelling, ProSteel 3D does not use the AutoCAD volume modeller ACIS but the modeller which is used in Architectural Desktop as well. This modeller works faster and produces smaller graph files. Consequently, you cannot process ProSteel 3D objects with the Boolean operations of AutoCAD (e.g. subtract their volumes). In case you do combine objects, there will be no errors, but nothing will happen! In order to give you the same performance range as with AutoCAD, all Boolean operations were redefined (see also the command → ’Basic Solids’). Another option is to use the ProSteel 3D properties to convert the ProSteel 3D objects into ACIS volume models and then to process them with AutoCAD. Your drawings will then become larger and more sluggish. Add PS_ADD

This command creates a new volume by adding two existing volumes. You have to click both objects and the newly created object receives all parts list information of the object you clicked on first.

Subtract PS_SUB

This command creates a new volume by subtracting one or several volumes from an existing volume. First, you have to click the object from which the other volumes are to be subtracted. Then click the objects whose volume is to be subtracted (these will be deleted in the process!). The new object receives all parts list information of the object you clicked on first. Please note, that you will not create two independent objects in case you “split” the first object in the process.



Cut-Set PS_COMMON This command creates a new volume by using the cut-set of two existing volumes, i.e., the new volume is the part the two objects shared. You have to click both objects and the new object will receive all parts list information of the object you clicked on first.

Subtract Cut-Set PS_COMMON_SUB This command creates a new volume by subtracting the cut-set of two existing volumes from the first volume. The first part is brought into line with the second, while preserving the second part.

Editing Reinforcement


C.4 Editing Reinforcement

Rebar cages can be manually edited using any of the rebar editing tools provided with ProConcrete 3D. Most of these rebar editing tools are found on the following toolbars:

Tools are included for adding and editing rebar end conditions, deleting end conditions and stirrups, breaking and joggling bars, moving and rotating bars. There are also tools for creating new bars (either attached to concrete objects or existing rebar cages), and for stretching and trimming bars. ProConcrete 3D modellers can use one or many of these tools to perform editing on individual bars and standard rebar cages, thus enabling you to create any imaginable non-standard rebar cage, rebar set or individual rebar. These tools could also be used to create starter bars, starter bar sets, or complex wall and slab bars.

Reinforcement Tools


Reinforcement Tools


C.5 Reinforcement Tools

EDIT REBAR

This button is used to edit any existing individual rebar in any existing rebar cage. Use of the command presents you

with the “ProConcrete 3D Beam Single Rebar” dialog box where you can edit the bar for type, size, location and end conditions.

COPY REBAR

This button allows you to copy one or more bars from a rebar cage, in any direction. You can only copy one bar at a

time. The copy direction and distance is driven by supplying two picked points.

MOVE REBAR

This button allows you to move bars contained in a rebar cage. These bars can be moved in any direction, up down,

or sideways. The move direction and distance is driven by supplying two picked points. This button can also be used to move all bars that belong to a cage rebar zone (Top, Bott, etc) by use of the CTRL key when selecting.

ROTATE REBAR

Use this command to rotate end conditions by a set amount. The default set amount is 90 degrees. Each left click of the

mouse will rotate the end condition by 90 degrees. The user can also define what the angle of rotation should be. Each left click will rotate the end condition by this user defined amount. You may also rotate all end conditions belonging to a cage rebar zone (Top, Bott etc) by use of the CTRL key when selecting.

EXPLODE REBAR

Use this command explodes a rebarset or rebar cage into

Reinforcement Tools


individual rebars.

DELETE REBAR

This button is used to delete individual bars or stirrups from a rebar cage. This button can also be used to delete all

bars that belong to a cage rebar zone (Top, Bott, etc) by use of the CTRL key when selecting.

TRIM REBAR

This button allows you to trim original bars that have been placed when using the “Beam/Column Rebar” command or

similar. Use it to trim away the end of a vertical or horizontal bar. You are asked to pick the bar to be trimmed, and you are asked to pick a point or line indicating where the trimming occurs. Existing end conditions are retained when trimming. If this end condition is not wanted, then delete the unwanted end condition before trimming. This button can also be used to trim all bars that belong to a cage rebar zone (Top, Bott, etc) by use of the CTRL key when selecting.

EXTEND REBAR

This button allows you to extend original bars that have been placed when using the “Beam/Column Rebar” command

or similar. Use it to extend the end of a vertical or horizontal bar. You are asked to pick the bar to be extended, and you are asked to pick a point or line indicating where the bar extends to. Existing end conditions are retained when extending. If this end condition is not wanted, then delete the unwanted end condition before extending. This button can also be used to extend all bars that belong to a cage rebar zone (Top, Bott, etc) by use of the CTRL key when selecting.

Reinforcement Tools


STRETCH REBAR

This button allows you to stretch individual rebar cage bars that have been placed when using the “Beam/Column Rebar”

command or similar. Use it to stretch the end of a vertical or horizontal bar by the supplied amount. The stretch can be in a positive or negative direction, enabling you to create a longer or shorter bar. You can supply 2 picked points to indicate the distance if preferred.

BREAK REBAR

This button is used to break a longitudinal bar at the point specified, into two individual longitudinal bars. A break

distance away from the break point can also be included. This button can be also be used to break multiple bars that belong to a rebar zone, by use of the CTRL key when selecting, and the break distance is then requested for each of those bars.

BREAK AND JOGGLE

This button is used to break a longitudinal bar at the point specified, into two individual longitudinal bars, and joggle

(crank and lap) the bars at the same specified break point. This button can be also be used to break and joggle multiple bars that belong to a rebar zone, by use of the CTRL key when selecting.

HEAL REBAR

This button is used heal (join) two individual rebars that are currently aligned and meet. These aligned bars may

clash or have a gap between them before using this button.

JOGGLE REBAR

This button is used to joggle (crank and lap) two individual rebars that are currently aligned and meet. These aligned

Reinforcement Tools


bars may clash or have a gap between them before using this button.

JOGGLE REBAR AROUND OTHER REBAR

This button is used to joggle (crank) one rebar such that it will not collide with an opposing transverse rebar. These

bars may clash or have a gap between them before using this button.

JOGGLE REBAR CAGE

This button is used to joggle (crank and lap) all longitudinal bars of two individual rebar cages that are

currently aligned and meet. The aligned longitudinal bars may clash or have a gap between them before using.

REINFORCEMENT BAR STOCK LENGTH

This button is used to check all or selected rebars against standard stock lengths. Standard stock lengths are listed

within the database files applied in the ProConcrete Options dialog. This command is still under development. When using this command, all rebars that are longer than standard stock lengths will be highlighted within your model. You will need to use any of the available ProConcrete 3D commands to then manually fix the offending rebar lengths.

REINFORCEMENT SEARCH

This button is used to search for bars within your model. The search criteria used is Position No.

Use of this command is dependant on the user having previously assigned Position Numbers to the ProConcrete 3D parts, whether they be concrete parts, rebars or rebar cages. When clicking the “Reinforcement Search” button you are

Reinforcement Tools


presented with the ProConcrete 3D Search Tools dialog box.

Pos Number

Searched PosN Use the dropdown list to find the Position Number of the wanted part. All parts that have previously been given a Pos Number (only within the current 3D model) will be listed.

Options

Hide Others This option will hide all other parts except the searched part

Zoom At Object This option will zoom you to the area of the drawing that contains the searched part

Use the Find Objects button to begin the search

Use the Restore Objects button to redisplay all hidden objects after completing your search. This button also performs a zoom all from the current vantage point

Reinforcement Tools


C.5.1 End Conditions

PROCONCRETE 3D EDIT REBAR TOOLS

This button is used to access the PROCONCRETE 3D EDIT END CONDITIONS dialog box.

Edit End Conditions This dialog box contains many of the tools also found on the “ProConcrete 3D End Conditions” toolbar.

Apply To

Select Rule Use the dropdown list to apply the end condition to individual bars, or to all bars that exist in a zone (Top, Bottom, Left or Right).

Both Ends Select this option to apply the same end conditions to both ends of a bar.

Options

Reinforcement Tools


Form Behaviour

Child Dialog Modal Select this option to access a second dialog box when placing User Defined End Conditions.

Bend, Hook, Crank, Project and User Defined Ends

CREATE STANDARD BEND END CONDITION (BEND – STANDARD)

This button uses standard values supplied from the rebar database file set in the “ProConcrete 3D Options” dialog

box.

CREATE USER DEFINED BEND END CONDITION (BEND – NON STANDARD)

This button allows you to use the “ProConcrete 3D Rebar End Properties” dialog box to define what your user

defined bend end condition should look like.

Reinforcement Tools


CREATE STANDARD HOOK END CONDITION (HOOK - STANDARD)


box.

CREATE USER DEFINED BEND END CONDITION (HOOK – NON STANDARD)


defined hook end condition should look like.

Reinforcement Tools


CREATE STANDARD CRANK END CONDITION (CRANK – STANDARD)


box.

CREATE USER DEFINED CRANK END CONDITION (CRANK – NON STANDARD)


defined crank end condition should look like.

Reinforcement Tools


CREATE STANDARD PROJECT END CONDITION (PROJECTION – STANDARD)


box.

CREATE USER DEFINED PROJECT END CONDITION (PROJECTION – NON STANDARD)


defined projection end condition should look like.

Reinforcement Tools


CREATE USER DEFINED END CONDITION


defined end condition should look like.

CREATE POLYGON DEFINED END CONDITION

This button allows you to select a predefined polyline, then select a bar, to have an end condition added to the bar that

matches the shape of the polyline.

Reinforcement Tools


DELETE END CONDITION

This button is used to delete individual end conditions from a rebar cage. This button can also be used to delete all end

conditions that exist throughout a cage rebar zone (Top, Bottom, Left, Right etc) by use of the CTRL key when selecting.

EDIT END CONDITION

This button allows you to edit an exiting end condition. Just select the end condition, or select the rebar near the

existing end condition, and the relevant rebar end properties dialog box appears.

ROTATE REBAR END CONDITION

This button allows you to select an existing end condition, and then rotate the end condition to any desired angle. 90

degree preset rotations are available via a left click option.

ALIGN REBAR END CONDITION TO GIVEN LINE

This button only works on rebars that belong to a rebarset. It is used to align end conditions to the edges of slabs or

walls. You are asked at the command line to select a rebar to apply the aligned end condition. After selecting it, you are then asked at the command line to select a line or concrete element edge to align to. You can repeat the process many times for multiple bars with the once instance of the command.

Reinforcement Tools


C.5.2 Create Rebar

ADD SINGLE REBAR TO EXISTING CAGE

This button is used to manually place an extra rebar to an existing rebar cage. Type, size, location and end conditions

of the additional bar are controlled by the supplied “ProConcrete 3D Single Rebar” dialog box.

Properties


Stirrup This option allows the bar to be defined as a stirrup.

Insertion Align’t Choose from a dropdown list how the bar is aligned to the chosen points or line.

Use this button to pick point that will define the appearance and location of the bar.

Use this button to select a pre-drawn polyline that will define the appearance and location of the bar

Reinforcement Tools


Use this button to select a pre-drawn line that will define the length and location of the bar.

Start/End EndCondition EC Type Select the end condition type from the dropdown list.



EC Reduction The End Condition Reduction option allows you to control whether the end condition is placed within or beyond the end of the line or endpoint used to define the new bar.

Options The Options tab is not useable at this stage

Reinforcement Tools


ADD SINGLE REBAR TO EXISTING CONCRETE ELEMENT

This button is used to place any new bar, or any additional rebar to an existing concrete object. You will be asked to

select an existing concrete object. This object does not have to already have a rebar cage attached. Type, size, location and end conditions of the additional bar are controlled by the supplied “ProConcrete 3D Single Rebar” dialog box.

Properties


Stirrup This option allows the bar to be defined as a stirrup.

Insertion Align’t Choose from a dropdown list how the bar is aligned to the chosen points or line.

Reinforcement Tools





Use this button to select the concrete object to add the new rebar to.

Use this button to delete a single bar from an existing concrete object.

Start/End EndCondition EC Type Select the end condition type from the dropdown list.


Reinforcement Tools



EC Reduction The End Condition Reduction option allows you to control whether the end condition is placed within or beyond the end of the line or endpoint used to define the new bar.






Reinforcement Tools





Reinforcement Tools


ADD STARTER FOR CONCRETE

This button is used to place an additional rebarset of starter bars to an existing concrete object. You will be asked to

select an existing concrete object. This object does not have to already have a rebar cage attached. Type, size, location and end conditions of the starter bar are controlled by the supplied “ProConcrete 3D Single Rebar Distribution” dialog box. You will also need to select a line or points that define the path that the set of starter bars should follow.

Properties





Reinforcement Tools


Stirrup This option creates each rebar of the rebarset as a stirrup

Create Single When ticked, this function provides the user with a set of individual bars, rather than a single rebarset.

Insertion Alignment Select the alignment position from the dropdown list.

Start/End End \Condition

EC Type Select the end condition type from the dropdown list.



Reinforcement Tools


Distribution Layout Method Select the layout method from the dropdown list.

Start Offset Enter a start offset value if required.

Spacing Enter a spacing value.

Length Check this box and supply a length if you do not want the starter bars to follow the full length of the path

End Offset Enter an end offset value if required.

Shift Rebar X-Offset Enter an offset value for shifting the rebar in the X direction.

Y-Offset Enter an offset value for shifting the rebar in the Y direction.

Click the Path button, and you will be prompted at the AutoCAD command to Select Distribution Direction. Select a line to define this path direction.

Create Single When ticked, this function provides the user with a set of individual bars, rather than a single rebarset.

Reinforcement Tools










Reinforcement Tools


ADD single REBARset to concrete element Add RebarSet will allow you to add a RebarSet to almost any concrete object, but it is ideally provided to allow you

to add a RebarSet to slabs and walls. Clicking Add RebarSet presents you with the “ProConcrete 3D Single RebarSet” dialog box where you can design your RebarSet for type, size, location and end conditions. The dialog box will only appear after you have selected a concrete object to attach the RebarSet to. RebarY/RebarX

Rebar Property

Reinforcement Tools



Rebar Along Y-axis Layout

Spacing Description Describes the spacing between rebars for the current rebar set.

Equal Select this option if rebars are to be spaced equally.

Left Offset Enter a distance from the left end of the rebar to the concrete shape edge. (Vertical plane - wall)

Top Offset Enter a distance from the top rebar to the top of the concrete shape. (Horizontal plane - slab)

Right Offset Enter a distance from the right end of the rebar to the concrete shape edge. (Vertical plane - wall)

Bottom Offset Enter a distance from the rebar to the bottom of the concrete shape. (Horizontal plane - slab)

Start/End EndCondition

Type Select the end condition type from the dropdown list.



RebarSet UCS and Boundary Definition

Vertical Offset Enter a distance for the placement of the rebars within the slab depth

Insert Plane Align to current UCS

This button is used to define the boundary of the RebarSet by picking existing points on your 3D model.

This button is used to define the boundary of the RebarSet by picking an already drawn polyline in your 3D model.

Create Select this option if a rebar set is required.

Options

Reinforcement Tools


Display Mode


Line displays rebar as single lines only

Cylinder displays rebar as extruded cylinders

EC Reduction When End Condition Reduction is ticked, the length of each rebar is reduced by the length of the end condition projection.


Reinforcement Tools


CREATE TAPERED STIRRUP CAGE

The Create Tapered Stirrup Cage command will allow you to add an extra set of stirrups to a specified part of your

reinforcement cage. The command is especially suited for adding an extra set of stirrups to a cranked or tapered part of beam or column reinforcement cages. When clicking the Create Tapered Stirrup Cage you are asked at the AutoCAD command line to select a Concrete Element to Attach the Tapered Stirrup Cage to. After selecting the concrete object, the “ProConcrete 3D Stirrup” dialog box appears, where you can design your Stirrup Set for type, layout and spacing. Stirrups

Stirrup Rebar

Bar Type select the bar type from the dropdown list.

Type Select the stirrup layout from the dropdown list

Reinforcement Tools


The Rotate Stirrup Clockwise and Anti-Clockwise buttons allow you to rotate the stirrups around the cage

Layout Select the stirrup alignment from the dropdown list

Left Offset Enter a distance for first stirrup from set start

Space Enter the required spacing distance for stirrups

Right Offset Enter a distance for last stirrup from set end

Spacing Displays the calculated spacing distance

This is the Pick Existing rebars to Form Tapered Cage button. Use it to pick existing bars that define the cage/stirrup corners. Note that you must select a number of existing rebars by picking/selecting in a anti-clockwise fashion.

The Move Cage Backward or Forward along Rebar buttons allow you to design the stirrup sets for the different zones / sections of your existing rebar cage. For instance, either of the end condition zones, or the middle zone of a beam reinforcement cage


Reinforcement Tools


Rebar Display Mode Tools for the global on-screen display of rebars can be found on the following toolbar:

SET TO CYLINDER MODE

This button is used to globally redisplay all previously drawn rebar (and stirrups) on your screen as cylinders.

SET TO LINE MODE

This button is used to globally redisplay all previously drawn rebar (and stirrups) on your screen as single lines

and polylines only.

SET TO SKETCH MODE

This button is used to globally redisplay all previously drawn rebar (and stirrups) on your screen as a simple

sketch only that represents a rebar cage or rebar group.

DISPLAY TOP BARS

This button can be used to redisplay all top bars that belong to a reinforcement cage, and that have previously been

hidden.

HIDE TOP BARS

This button can be used to hide all top bars that are contained in the selected reinforcement cage or cages.

DISPLAY BOTTOM BARS

This button can be used to redisplay all bottom bars that belong to a reinforcement cage, and that have previously

Reinforcement Tools


been hidden.

HIDE BOTTOM BARS

This button can be used to hide all bottom bars that are contained in the selected reinforcement cage or cages.

DISPLAY LEFT BARS

This button can be used to redisplay all left side bars that belong to a reinforcement cage, and that have previously

been hidden.

HIDE LEFT BARS

This button can be used to hide all left side bars that are contained in the selected reinforcement cage or cages.

DISPLAY RIGHT BARS

This button can be used to redisplay all right side bars that belong to a reinforcement cage, and that have previously

been hidden.

HIDE RIGHT BARS

This button can be used to hide all right side bars that are contained in the selected reinforcement cage or cages.

DISPLAY STIRRUPS

This button can be used to redisplay all stirrups that belong to a reinforcement cage, and that have previously been

hidden.

HIDE STIRRUPS

This button can be used to hide all stirrups that are contained in the selected reinforcement cage or cages.

Reinforcement Tools


REGEN ALL BARS

This button can be used to globally redisplay all bars and stirrups stirrups that belong to reinforcement cages, and that have previously been hidden.

Reinforcement Tools

ProConcrete 3D Page D - 1

[?replace page in pdf file with Detailing image page?]

D DETAILING

Reinforcement Tools


DetailCenter

ProConcrete 3D Page D.1 - 1

D.1 DetailCenter

D.1.1 The 2D-Detailing

Once you have created the model, finished editing of the model, have positioned all of the necessary components,, and may have issued a (preliminary) parts list, the Finishing or Detailing of the 3D components can commence.

Detailing 3D Models The program generates the usual 2D views of the components for the workshop plans using the model, which means that the program will disassemble the model into its components, analyse the geometry of all the individual parts, and ascertains any existing but invisible edges. Then – depending on the requirements or your selections – the shape is displayed in several views and dimensioned and the position flag is attached. All of this takes place in a split second and in the background. Once the program has finished with one component, this component is deposited in a library in the form of a block – clearly organized according to the individual construction groups and design sections. After this procedure has concluded you can use the program to help you with the layout of the parts on your drawing sheets. From here on, you can treat the parts as if they were the usual drawings generated with a CAD program – but ProSteel 3D offers you a few extra functions, which facilitate your work.

Intervention Options You do not have to worry that you are going to be at the mercy of the program and that from now on all your drawings will reflect the wishes of the software designers. A vast number of parameters help you to specify the appearance of your mapped design. These parameters can be saved as data records and re-imported depending on the type of drawing (overview, life-size, 1: 10 workshop details, etc). This saves you time by being able to detail several parts at once applying one of these styles – that might already be enough to satisfy the requirements of your assignment. However, you can also detail small groups of components – one after the other – or even a single part. You always have access to the smallest detail.

DetailCenter

Page D.1 - 2 ProConcrete 3D

Basic Detailing Principle In general, the program distinguishes between two basic detailing methods: automatic and manual detailing. Automatic detailing takes place within the open model, and you tell the program to detail a certain part using a certain style. You have previously defined or selected this suitable style. The rest is out of your hands (for now). The result is a block with the views as interpreted by the program according to your specifications. Manual detailing requires that you determine the respective model section yourself. You are working within a work frame and may use the auxiliary functions of the program to attach and assign dimension chains, position flags, height indicators, etc. You can also use such standard AutoCAD elements as lines, texts, etc. The program only displays the invisible edges correctly and saves the details as a block – nothing more. This does indeed offer you the greatest level of influence on the appearance of the details but you have to carry out each step manually. The following chapters discuss the ProSteel 3D detail center and all of the tasks described shortly in the text.

DetailCenter


D.1.2 Detailing with the Detail Center

What is the Detail Center Users control the complete 2D drawing and plan generation from within the Detail Center – from a first overview of the components to the workshop drawing with multiple changes and manipulations. Think of the Detail Center as a program within the program because it offers vastly more possibilities and options than one can see at first glance.

When you open the Detail Center for the first time, a clear dialog box will be displayed with only a few settings. There is nothing more required after the adaptations to your personal requirements were made. As you know, you „only“ want to get your shop drawings from the model. However, if need be, you can at any time penetrate deeply inside the drawing derivation. You can make a great number of settings, ask for information, check drawings. The philosophy behind this development is that you can get the same result in various ways, that you can make a lot of modifications – but you do not have to!

DetailCenter


General Dialog Info The Detail Center is accessible via a dockable dialog which can be linked on the left or on the right of AutoCAD and which you can change in size. Double-clicking on the header line toggles between the freely moveable and the docked status of the dialog. Most of the work within the detail center is carried out using the context menus of the right mouse button or using drag & drop, where you drag an entry onto another entry. You will also work with tree lists that resemble Windows Explorer trees. Since these functions are similar to standard Windows functions, they will not be described here. Most of the dialogs that can be selected from within the Detail Center are non-modal dialogs. These dialogs are not always closed once a function has been selected but can remain open. This has the advantage of saving you a few mouse clicks and you can adapt these dialogs to the current situation, which means you are always informed about the status of the work. You can change settings and watch the changes immediately on the screen – just as you can do with many of the ProSteel 3D commands. All dialogs of the Detail Center are synchronized with one another as much as possible. Since this means that it does not take very long to accumulate a great many open dialogs on the screen, the Detail Center will here support your work as well. Any non-required dialogs are hidden whenever necessary. They are exchanged with others if the command association changes. Dependent subordinate dialogs are closed automatically if you close a parent dialog.

DetailCenter


Detail Center Surface The following page will give you an overview over the work area of the Detail Center. This chapter includes an introduction and explains some of the basic detailing terms. The individual function areas are described later in special chapters.

DetailCenter


In general, the Detail Center is divided into three main work levels. Usually, your building part or component will pass through all three levels until it is visible on the workshop plan in the form of a detail. However, your work in the different levels is limited to only a few mouse clicks, if all the basic settings of detailing are adapted to your requirements. If even these works seem to be too awkward and involved for you, because you do not need the flexibility of the Detail Center, you can use the Detail Center Express!. This part of the program once again combines the remaining steps until a workshop plan is created. Detailing is worked through according to a pre-determined pattern. „Detailing by one single mouse click“ became a reality. Level 1: Component Overview (Prepare) Here you will obtain an overview of the parts of the model and their functional associations and relationships. You can view construction groups, single parts or whole areas of the model – all clearly structured in tree format. This is the place where you can manage and change detail styles and link your components with these styles as well as manage the modification mechanism. In addition, DetailCenter Express! Is started here. Level 2: Display Views Overview (Detailing) The second work level offers you an overview of the component or model views created by the program. You can add or remove views, display a preview and fine-tune the detail style. In this overview you decide what exactly is to be processed as a detail block and start the actual detailing process. Level 3: Detail Block Overview (Import) The third and last level features the detailed parts, which are located on your hard drive in the form of detail blocks. You receive an overview of the detail blocks of the current model (or other models) and decide which parts to import or integrate into which drawing. Placing the parts on a drawing sheet finishes the workshop plan, unless you would like to carry out a few adjustments manually.

DetailCenter


Construction Parts List Each of the three levels offers access to a window with the settings for the display of construction parts lists using the function button bar. Here you can specify which components are displayed in which logical sorting in the tree structure of the display. You can set any filter you like and store these settings in their own templates for each work level separately. In addition, a standard display is available for each level, which allows reasonable working already from the beginning.

Work Tools Each of the three levels offers access to a window with work tools using the function button bar. These tools are assigned to the corresponding area. In order to keep the display area of the construction parts lists as large as possible, many of the infrequently used functions and settings have been delegated to these subordinate dialogs.

Information Window In addition, the context menu offers access to another dockable information window. All three-work levels are subordinate to this information window, which shows the current status of the selected entry. Depending on the list, this window displays the name and type of the part, data of detailing, insertion location, current status, and much more.

Context Menu A supplement to every level is a level-specific context menu accessible through the right mouse button, which lists only those functions that are significant to the respective list. You will probably use the context menus quite often because they represent the fastest way to access a command.

Templates As you already know from the other ProSteel 3D functions, the basic settings of the Detail Center can be saved as template for each level. The settings of work tools and of construction parts list are stored. These templates (as reference) may again be stored in a parent template together with the global settings for the Detail Center. This allows individual configuration of the complete DetailCenter.

DetailCenter


Detail Styles The detail styles are the cornerstone of the entire detailing process. They describe how a part is to look as a workshop detail or how the model is to appear as an overview. The content of the styles is described in detail in the chapter 'Detailing Styles'. The management and modification of a style is described in detail in the chapter 'Component Overview'. Just a preliminary note: A component without detail style cannot be processed and is ignored by the program when it comes to detailing!

Preview The detailing of a selected part can be previewed from within the views overview or directly from within the model. This will create a small AutoCAD drawing displaying the exact result of the detail style settings applied to this part. The small drawing shows how the part will be detailed. This window and its drawing can be zoomed or queried for information because it is an independent AutoCAD drawing. Since you can now open this part's detail style, you can track the effects of different style settings in „real time“. We call this fine-tuning of the detail style. If you open the preview for another part, you do not have to close this window first. The content is updated automatically. After viewing the detail, the window must be closed manually. While the preview is open, most of the functions of the Detail Center are inaccessible. Please remember: The preview might be hidden behind some other drawing because so many windows can be open simultaneously. Also consider the speed of your computer when viewing a great many details such as construction groups or entire overviews. Do not become impatient if your computer seems to be busy calculating for what seems like a long time. Even fast computers need a little computation time, but some of the latest computers will surprise you with the speed of the update.

DetailCenter


D.1.3 General Information – Scale and Dimension Styles

There are two options for detailing a part when working with the Detail Center: Either the part keeps its original size and the surrounding text (e.g. dimensions, labels, etc.) is scaled to fit the part or the part is scaled and the text keeps its original size. This is to support both of the methods typical for AutoCAD.

Scales The first method allows for a simple – and unscaled – processing of the drawing and does not generate the scale until the time of plotting. Components can also be inserted (unlabeled!) into other plans easily and comfortably. The disadvantage of this method is that this involves some thinking, to keep different scales and the same text sizes within one drawing and still have to copy parts from other drawings. This is where the second method is more practical: You always plot using the scale 1:1, always use the same text size, and scale the parts to fit the plotting scales – just as you would do when drawing by hand. This allows you easy management of different scales within one drawing. ProSteel 3D permits both methods when detailing, but you have to stick to one or the other method within one drawing. Because the dimensioning styles are the problem.

Dimensioning Styles You define certain AutoCAD dimensioning styles in your model, which you can use within the detail styles for dimensioning. When detailing, the program creates a copy of the style, and from your settings determines the required text and length scaling. This style is assigned a new name indicating the length scaling and is used in the detail block. Although the program does set the dimension text into the dimension permanently, e.g. to evaluate contractions, you do want to receive an AutoCAD associate dimensioning after the detailing has been concluded; thus the copy. This also keeps your original style intact and you do not need to create separate styles for each individual scale.

DetailCenter


If you want to work with the first method using a scale of 1:10, you will obtain a style with a text scaling=10 and with a length scaling=1. The name could be, e.g., PS_STD_1_10. Process another detail with different settings of the AutoCAD dimensioning style and you will obtain the same name for the style. No problems occurred up to now. Now insert both details into a drawing and the first one will „win out“ because the name is identical. However, this is typical for AutoCAD and ProSteel 3D has no intention of changing that. If you have problems with the dimensioning styles, you can be assured that this is due to not being consequent in this case. This is the reason you should make sure that your prototype file, into which you want to import the details, does not contain any dimensioning styles (if possible), and that the basic styles with the same name are also identical in different models if you want to mix together the details of different models. Do not change the size by only changing the scale (e.g., when manually dimensioning), but rather define a new style with a new name. This is the way it should be when using AutoCAD “pure“ because there is a good reason for it: If you rescale the parts manually, you are simply exchanging the dimensioning style and all is well again.

DetailCenter


D.1.4 Intelligent 2D-Details

If you have inserted the results of the detailing into a drawing and want to further process this drawing manually, you have to observe a few things described in the following section.

Intelligent Details The result of the detailing process is a detail, as you would draw it with standard AutoCAD. You can see centerlines, visible and hidden edges, holes, etc. and the part is still not a true „flat line graphic“. Intelligent details are still displayed as three-dimensional details when viewing the page containing individual parts or construction groups at a slant. However, when you print the part it appears completely two-dimensional The advantage is that you can subsequently add cuts or dimensions while taking any possible shape shortening into account. If you want to change the geometry subsequently, that is in the detailed part, you have to import the changes with the ProSteel 3D functions if you still require the intelligent features. However, if you want to dissolve the detail in its entirety, you have to „explode“ the component like a block. This gives you a group, which can be ungrouped to reach the lines. Of course, the consequence is that all of the intelligence is lost. Thus, omit this if at all possible. Overviews and manual details are an exception – those are already non-intelligent line depictions.

Shape Shortening During the detailing you can select whether you want to shorten any parts that are especially long. Contracted sections are then attached to those sections of a component that do not show any manipulations in a longer stretch and are actually of no interest. This gives you the opportunity to display the sections that are important for the detailing in an optimal size (because you can select larger scales) or show more components on a given page. The picture below clearly illustrates the difference. Both shapes are detailed with the same scale and scaled to the same length.

DetailCenter


Difference Between Original Shape and Shortened Shape

The problem of shortening is the subsequent dimensioning with AutoCAD. However, if you work with the ProSteel 3D dimensioning, you can consider any shortening at a later time because your work is object-related. This requires that the components are not dissolved down to the lines after detailing because then this property is lost!

Pick Helpers The intelligent components of groups have the disadvantage that the individual parts of a detailed construction group are inaccessible if e.g. you want to move them subsequently. It would also not help to activate or deactivate the group using the AutoCAD-groups. This is why ProSteel 3D features the "Pick Helpers”, which you might view as a grip variation. If you do not have any part selected in the drawing and you access the context menu using the right mouse button, you will see the option ProSteel 3D SETTINGS and the entry Pick Helpers. Use this entry to toggle the pick helpers on and off. Small little triangles now appear on the components, which you can now use to select and e.g. move the parts of a group. When working with the pick helpers, don't forget the following special feature: If a building component of a construction group is moved, a new drawing of the group is only created when you keep the ALT-key pressed during the movement. Otherwise, the drawing has to be regenerated to obtain the modified display. Direct Use: PS_PICKHELPER

DetailCenter


D.1.5 Display of Construction Component Lists

Construction component lists are most substantial within the three work levels. In these lists, the construction components or detail blocks are displayed in a tree structure that can be used for working in the selected work level. Sorting and filters of the parts can be freely configured by the user. Thus there can be different displays for different tasks.

Display Sorting (Structure) Select the dialog for the display structure via the STRUCTURE button to modify the display sorting. After modification of preset values and closing of the dialog box, the display will be restructured. However, it is also possible to select your individually created template for the different work levels in the global settings of Detail Center.

DetailCenter


Group Display Type

Display Type Here you select the fundamental type of display. ProSteel 3D Standard – the component parts are displayed in the usual group/single part structure. In addition, loose single parts and model views will be displayed as well. User defined – you determine the hierarchy of the display individually, i.e. you specify in which order the parts have to be sorted according to which properties.

Available... Select the desired property field of a part, which has to be added to the tree structure.

Selected... The currently selected property fields of the structure. The order corresponds to the hierarchy level in the tree display (sorting order). The property field corresponds to the type of this property. It depends on the data of the parts to be represented which entries will actually be displayed. If you have e.g. selected the length as property, an entry will be created on this hierarchy level for each existing shape length and all components having the same length will be subordinate to this property.

Group Display Filter

Use Filter Only those parts will be displayed that meet the specified filter condition. The selected properties for the structure and those for the filter don’t have to be identical. It is for example possible to display a sorting only according to the length but filter out the component type rib completely.

Selection List Select one of the filter templates that you specified in the list. Select Current Settings when you haven’t created any template and you want to use the current settings of the filter dialog instead.

EDIT By clicking on this button you can edit the display filter or store/select a filter template.

Use Prefilter... An additional second filter. This filter is linked with the actual filter logically by AND. The component has to fulfil both conditions.

DetailCenter


Group Options

Sort Order here, you select the order of the entries. Ascending – The entries are displayed in an ascending numerical or alphabetical order (1,2,3,4...). Descending – The entries are displayed in a descending numerical or alphabetical order (...4,3,2,1). No Sorting – The entries are not sorted.

Entries only 1x each component part is displayed only once in the whole tree structure. The position numbers serve as criterion of comparison, separated in groups and single parts. If a part having the same position (e.g. a rib) is situated in two different group positions, this is only displayed in the first group.

> New per group each component part is displayed only once in the whole tree structure, but each single part of a group will be registered anew per group. If a part having the same position (e.g. a rib) is situated in two different group positions, this is displayed exactly once in each group.

Group Display Here, you select the way group parts will be displayed. As Group Structure – The building components and bolts of a group are subordinate to the group entry. This allows an easy selection of any part of a group. Only Single Parts – Only the actual parts of a group are displayed, but not the group itself. Group and Single Parts – The group (as an entry without subordinate parts) and the actual parts of this group are displayed of equal value side by side. The advantage of this separation is that in case of a user-defined sorting you can arrange the group and the component parts separately. Otherwise, it wouldn’t be possible to register the single parts in the case the group has not been registered. Nor would it be possible to separate e.g. in groups and building components of equal value side by side.

Pre-sort The entries are preliminarily sorted according to views, groups, if need be, main parts /building components (depending on the group display) and loose single parts, if you have selected ProSteel 3D standard sorting.

No empty... The entry of preliminary sorting is not displayed if it doesn’t contain any further entry.

DetailCenter


Display Filter The display filter allows a very detailed filtering of component parts according to their properties. You can describe any logically nested filter condition on the basis of the existing properties (there are no limits with regard to the complexity of the query). You may store these filter conditions as templates which can be easily selected. This allows you to prepare frequent filter conditions that are perfectly adapted to your application. Two filters of equal value are available (preliminary filter and main filter) which are linked by the logical AND. Although each filter is logically nested by any condition such as 'All shapes longer than 5000, but no IPE270 or IPE240', it sometimes is easier to work with the preliminary filter, too. If e.g. no sheet metal plates are required for a task, you can exclude them permanently already via the preliminary filter. The standard filter then serves for your daily work and you can modify this filter without having to add the condition 'No sheet metal plates' each time.

Group Comparative Term

List Here, you see all property fields of the parts that may be used for the filter criteria. Each field can be used as often as you like.

DetailCenter


Select the desired field by clicking on it in the list. Then, the field name will appear in the display on the right.

Display Fields Here, you specify a single comparative condition consisting of field name, comparative operator and parts’ data. Several comparative conditions may be combined with logical operators to build the complete filter condition.

> Left Side The current property field that can be modified by clicking on it in the list.

> Center Here, you select the comparative operator that links the property field and the parts’ data (content of the field) to build a comparative condition.

> Right Side Possible parts’ data (contents of the field) of the selected property field in a dropdown-list. Thus, impossible comparative conditions are avoided.

When all of the three components of a comparative condition have been preset, you can add them to the complete filter condition by clicking on the INSERT button. Depending on the existing conditions and on the selected logical link, the appropriate brackets will be set.

Group Filter Condition

Display Field The complete filter condition as logical link consisting of several comparative conditions. When you have already inserted a comparative condition, the active logical operator of the next comparative condition will be displayed, too.

Dialog Commands

OPERATOR AND

By clicking on this button, you select the logical operator AND as logical link for the next comparative condition.

OPERATOR OR

By clicking on this button, you select the logical operator OR as logical link for the next comparative condition.

DetailCenter


BRACKETS

Clicking on this button forces the program to manually add brackets to the filter conditions existing up to that moment. Brackets are always necessary if you want to link the complete result of a

(partial) condition with another one, because the combination of (A AND B) OR C is different to A AND (B OR C).

INSERT

By clicking on this button you add the current comparative condition to the complete filter condition.

DELETE

By clicking on this button you delete the comparative condition that was added last.

DELETE ALL

By clicking on this button you delete the complete filter condition.

Use Filter Templates As you already know from nearly all ProSteel 3D functions, you can store the filter conditions as templates, too. This filter can be applied in the settings of the display via the name of this template. Don’t forget that this is only a hint. If you should modify the template of the filter, the template of the display, where this filter was used and will produce another result as well.

DetailCenter


D.1.6 Component Overview

Since the component overview constitutes the starting page of the Detail Center, the functions described here also apply to the other work levels. These are especially the individual sorting of list display and the use of filters. When selecting the Detail Center command, this tab will always be active first, and the current drawing is „scanned“ by the Detail Center. All model parts are searched according to predefined criteria and then displayed. This might take some time when large models are involved. All detail styles are also searched and displayed. A great number of the described functions may be selected via the context menu of the right mouse button. Look there whether the corresponding entry is available if there should be no hint in this documentation. If you need only a section of a model, use the visibility classes to hide the unneeded parts. Any parts hidden with the visibility class command are not recognized by the Detail Center. Please note however that these parts are then no longer recognized by any of the details.

Dialog Commands This is the function bar of the component overview. Buttons no. 1-4 are available in each work level with the same function.

DetailCenter


RECURSION (1)

By clicking on this button, recursive processing is alternatively switched on or off. If it is switched on, any processing applied to a parent entry in the

component parts list (e.g. assign style) is also applied to all subordinate entries. Otherwise, only the selected entry is processed or all entries on the same level, if this option is activated in the “model“.

STRUCTURE (2)

Click on this button to open the dialog for display sorting of component parts list. Here, you can select the standard display or an individual structure and set user-defined filters.

SETTINGS (3)

Click on this button to open the dialog for the work tools where you can specify additional settings only for this work level. Depending on the work level, the global settings are valid, too, which can

be defined separately.

TEMPLATE (4)

Click on this button to store your settings for the Detail Center in a template or to select this template.

UPDATE (5)

Click on this button to search the selected drawing once more. This is required if you activated a different drawing in the MDI environment or if changes were made to the current drawing (e.g. new position).

EXPRESS (6)

Click on this button to start the Detail Center Express, to carry out a complete detailing according to a specified pattern.

DetailCenter


ASSIGN (7)

By clicking on this button, you can link model parts with a detail style. This requires that you select a detail style first. After selecting the command you can pick on the model parts to be linked

or select them in a window. All not write-protected parts are then assigned this style.

PREPARE (8)

Click on this special action button to import all parts selected in the parts list into the view list and determine the views pre-selected in the detail style. Component views can be generated only for parts linked with a detail style.

WORK LEVELS (9)

Switch on a different work level by clicking on the corresponding tab. Any open dialog is updated accordingly. Here, you can switch over to the page for the global settings of the Detail Center where you can specify the settings, which are valid for the whole Detail Center or for several work levels.

TITLE BAR (10)

If you double-click on this area, the dialog switches from docked to free moving. Alternatively, you can also grab the dialog and “pull it out” while keeping the left mouse button depressed.

SEPARATOR (11)

Use this separator to enlarge the docked dialog. The drawing next to it will decrease in size accordingly. In addition, there is a scrolling bar between the two display lists (if two lists are available), which you can use for modifying the scale of the two lists.

CLOSE (12)

Click on this button to close the Detail Center.

DetailCenter


Detail Style List This list displays all available detail styles. The selection consists of the styles saved in the drawing as well as the style files saved on the hard drive. View and Modify Detail Styles Double-click on the desired list entry to open the dialog for the detail styles where you can modify the entries. Alternatively, you can also use the context menu option Edit Detail Style. Modifications apply only to the current session. If you want to save your changes permanently, you have to save the model or export the detail style to the hard drive by means of the detail style dialog. Clicking on another list entry while the detail style dialog is open updates the display of the detail style dialog. Copy Detail Styles Select the detail style you want to copy from the list. Then select the context menu option Copy Detail Style. You are now prompted for a new name. Then you can also specify a description, which will appear in the detail style dialog for better differentiation. The new detail style is now displayed in the list and can be edited directly if the detail style dialog is open. Delete Detail Styles Select the detail style you want to delete from the list. Then use the context menu option Delete Detail Style. The detail style is now deleted from the list and the drawing. You can also delete the style from the hard drive. Please note that this deleted detail style is then no longer available for later sessions. Set and Remove Default Detail Styles Some detailing functions such as manual detailing require a default detail style. Use the context menu to set or remove a default detail style. Just select the desired style, followed by the corresponding function in the context menu. The current default detail style is identified with an asterisk (*).

DetailCenter


Load Detail Styles At first loading of the Detail Center, only those detail styles are displayed in the list, which were saved in the drawing. You can, however, load additional style files (e.g. the defaults of certain customers), when you start detailing. If you then save the drawing, these additional styles will be permanently available in the drawing and will be displayed at the next loading. To load an additional style select the context menu option Load Detail Style. Now, you can select a style file by the file selection dialog. If you directly want to load all existing style files from the standard folder, then you select the entry Load all Detail Styles instead. This additional loading of styles is reasonable if you require a great number of different styles in your company all in all, but only a part of them has to be used per order. If you load a detail style existing in the model, the existing style will be overwritten.

DetailCenter


Component Parts List This list is the primary working list of the Detail Center because it displays all parts of a model for current status verification. Display and sorting of the list depends on the display settings. Status Indicator Depending on the component status, the entries feature small pictures. Only entries with such pictures consist of parts that can be detailed. All other entries are only parent sorting entries. Symbol Colours

Gray Parts without any special status. Probably, these parts have not yet been processed with the help of the Detail Center.

Blue A detail block of this part has already been created. However, it has not yet been inserted into a 2D drawing. The original part in the model has not been modified compared with the detail block so that this block can be inserted.

Yellow A detail block of this part has already been created. However, it has not yet been inserted into a 2D drawing. The original part in the model has however been modified compared with the detail block so that this block has to be detailed anew before it can be inserted.

Green A detail block of this part has already been created and inserted into a 2D drawing. The original part in the model has not been modified compared with the inserted detail block so that this detail is currently valid in the 2D drawing.

Red A detail block of this part has already been created and inserted into a 2D drawing. The original part in the model has however been modified compared with the inserted detail block so that this detail has to be updated in the 2D drawing.

Additional Checkmarks

Checkmark A detail style has been assigned to the component part.

Asterisk (*) the part in question is the main part of the associated group.

DetailCenter


Information about the Component Parts The meaning of the different entries can be easily differentiated by means of the symbols, because single parts, sheet metal plates, groups, views, etc. have their own typical symbol.

In addition, you can open a dockable information window via the entry Display Information in the context menu. This window informs you in detail about the status and additional properties of the part selected at that moment. The content of this window is automatically adapted to your current selection.

Multiple Selection and Drag&Drop Use the SHIFT and CTRL keys to select multiple entries. This is a Windows-specific function, which will not be explained here. Many operations can also be carried out using drag&drop. For example, by dragging a component list entry on a detail style, you can link the two. Selection of ProSteel 3D Properties Via the Detail Center, the properties of component parts can be directly modified in the model. Select the entry PS3D Properties in the context menu after having selected the desired list entries. For more detailed information about parts properties, please refer to the corresponding chapters of this manual. In principle, selection is as if you select the part(s) in the model and then load the properties. In combination with the sorting possibilities of the component parts list, however, it is possible here to modify e.g. only the material of head plates. If you are working with a big model, using the traditional way would be much more complicated. Don’t forget to update the Detail Center after a modification was made because the program doesn’t carry out an automatic update deliberately.

DetailCenter


Reference to the Model (Search) The component parts list has a direct reference to the model in both directions, which allows an easy and fast orientation. On one hand, the components of the entries selected in the list can be displayed in the model. This allows you to see directly which parts belong to a group, to a view, etc. To do this, select the option Display Parts Selection in the Model in the work tools. Now, select an entry in the component parts list and the assigned parts are colourfully checked in the model. Choose the entry ,Model’ to remove the marking. On the other hand, a part selected in the model can be checked in the component parts list (and selected). To do this, pick the part in the model and select the menu point Search in Detail Center via the context menu of the right mouse button. Now, the list scrolls to the position with the assigned entry, the entry is checked and selected. The parent entries such as group list nodes etc. are "opened“. Sorting

Sorting of the component parts list always depends on the work tools settings. The numerical sorting of position within the sorting according to groups, part types, etc. is always carried out in three steps: At first, sorting is effected according to the main position number. This number again is sorted according to an existing position index. If additional prefixes are available, theses are sorted in the last step. Position numbers, which only consist of letters, are displayed at the beginning in an alphabetical order. If the filter 'Display Each Part only 1x’ is checked, only those positions are assumed to be identical which only differ in their part prefix unless the button 'Don’t Use Position Number Prefix' has been activated. Standard Pos AA with Filter: Pos AA Sorting: Pos BC Pos BC Pos 1-1 Pos 1-1 Pos 1-2 Pos 1-2 Pos TR 1-2 (lapses) Pos 2-2 Pos 2-2 Pos ST2-3 Pos ST2-3 Pos TR2-3 (lapses) Pos 2-4 Pos 2-4

DetailCenter


Assigning Detail Styles Partial views and thus details can be created from every component part with a style. The different sortings help you to link the correct parts with the necessary style in a rapid way. You can only detail parts having a detail style. Which details to get can already be determined here. Associate a Style In the list, select the parts and then use drag&drop to pull them onto the detail style – and you are finished! You can also select the parts and use the context menu to select the option Link with Detail Style. If you want to pick the parts directly from the model, you have to select a detail style first. Then press the button ASSIGN (7) followed by picking the parts in the model. However, you can assign only single parts with this method. Recursive Association If a single part has a detail style, this part is detailed with this style in the form of a single part detail. If, however, a construction group has a detail style, this style becomes the detail style for the entire construction group detailing. If you want to generate only group details, the associated single parts do not really require their own detail style because the group style also applies to the parts within that group.

Use the recursive or non-recursive association to assign styles to the parts you want to detail. If you selected the recursive association (the 'Recursive Processing’ button is pressed) and you assign a style to a group, this style also applies to the single parts of that group. If in this case you pull the entire model onto the detail style via drag&drop, all groups and all single parts are assigned the same style.

DetailCenter


If you assign style "A" to the model and 'Recursive' is activated, every entry is linked with this style. If 'Recursive' is deactivated, only the entries Outline, Complete Plan View, BG 100 and BG 101 are linked with this style, because they are located hierarchically immediately underneath the model. Since the model itself is only a sorting entry, it passes the association along to its subordinate entries. If you assign style "B" to the BG 101 and 'Recursive' is activated, every single part of this group is linked with this style as well. If 'Recursive' is deactivated, only this construction group is assigned style "B". Separate Detail Styles Select the parts in the list and then use drag&drop to pull them towards the top and away from the Detail Center – and you are finished! You can also select the parts and use the context menu to select the option Separate from Detail Style. Remember that parts without a detail style cannot be processed unless the parts belong to a group and you want to detail only the group views. Write-Protection Use the Set Write-Protection command in the context menu to write-protect certain entries. The entries are highlighted and cannot be overwritten with a new style or separated from a style. You have to remove the write-protection before change or delete the style of such an entry. The combination of recursive processing and write-protection facilitates assigning different styles to groups and single parts: Deactivate recursive and active write-protection and drag the "model“ entry on the group style. Only the groups are assigned a style (due to the recursive setting) and are then saved. Activate recursive and drag the "model“ entry on the single part style. The style association is passed on to all parts but the groups themselves are write-protected. Hide Parts You can temporarily remove undesired parts from the component parts list to get a better survey. To do this, select the corresponding parts and then activate the menu point Remove Entry in the context menu.

DetailCenter


Visibility only refers to the component parts list. Don’t mix up this function with the visibility classes in the 3D-model, which really hide the parts and switch to permanently invisible parts. When the Detail Center is started anew or when you use the command UPDATE (5), all hidden entries will be visible again.

Import for Detailing All parts with a detail style can be imported for detailing, which means that the corresponding views are created. The import for detailing concludes your work in this work level and you can switch to the next level. Create Partial Views To import parts into the view list just drag the desired parts on the action button PREPARE (8) using drag&drop. The button will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go off the mouse button and the parts are transferred. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse. If you have checked the ‚Import Directly to Views’ option in the settings, you do not need to do anything else because the style association also transfers the parts. If you separate parts from their style, they are also removed from the view list. When the part already exists in the view list, the entries will be corrected correspondingly. When the corresponding group already exists in the view list, the single part will be assigned to this group. Process and Delete Partial Views It is always possible to add or remove partial views by modifying the detail style correspondingly and importing the part anew. However, if you want to add a partial view only for a certain component part and the detail style has to remain unchanged, you can add or remove partial views in the second work level 'Views’ independent of the style settings. The manual details where the 2D-details are generated largely independent of the part hierarchies and detailing automatisms are also created in this work level.

DetailCenter


Special Settings You have access to the hereafter described settings via the button SETTINGS (3).

Group Behaviour during Style Association

Overwrite: The entry is protected at once after association of a detail style and is shown in bold. It cannot be modified unless the protection is removed.

Hide The entry is hidden from the list after association of a detail style. Only the parts without association of a detail style are shown. The Detail Center has to be started anew or updated to make the entry visible again. Remember that in case of hiding a group its single parts will be hidden too – even if they do not have any style yet.

Take over The entry is immediately imported to the next work level (views) after association of a detail style. It is available for detailing.

DetailCenter


Group Behaviour during Update Manual... During automatic update of 2D-drawings, the program tries to

restore modifications which were made later in the details. Otherwise, the detail is displayed as completely new detailed according to the detail style.

> Deleted Dimensions or position flags deleted by the user are deleted again.

You will find a more detailed description of automatic 2D-Update in a separate chapter of this documentation.

DetailCenter


DetailCenter


D.1.7 Views Overview

If you have imported all of the parts for detailing, the generated views are displayed in this work level, the views list. Since most of the important points have already been discussed under Component Overview, here are just a few special commands of this work level.

Dialog-Commands

ADDITIONAL VIEW

Click on this button to add additional views to the selected component part or to create manual details., another dialog then opens. After an entry has been checked in the views list, the corresponding parts

for the manual detail are automatically selected. On the other hand, when you select the first entry (‘Detail Views’) of the list, you can select any part by clicking on it in the model.

DETAILING

Click on this special action button to detail all of the parts selected in the views list, including the mentioned partial views, and to store them on the hard drive as detail blocks. The created detail blocks then can be inserted in your 2D-drawings.

DetailCenter


Views List Here, you will see all views of the imported parts in the form of entries, which can be checked for their current status. The display and sorting of the list depends on the settings of the display templates. Status The significance of these pictures matches the component part overview; please refer to that section for further details. If the view has already been detailed it is marked with a checkmark. Preview Before detailing you can display a preview of the detail or of a single view. Detailing will take place as it is displayed there. If you choose only one view you will see exactly that view in the preview. However, if you select the entire component or group, you will see all existing views of the part in an order determined by the program. To activate the preview, just select the corresponding entry and then select Preview via the context menu. After some computing time displayed by the status indicator, a drawing window opens containing the possible detailing as a preview. If the detail style dialog and the preview are open, you can now change the different detail style settings and check the effects of the modifications. If the detail style is not yet open, you can open the dialog via the context menu. The correct detail style belonging to this view is then already selected. Add and Remove New Views Should you notice that the views displayed are too few or show an unfavourable line of vision on the part, you can add or remove any view. Just drag the view to be removed towards the top and away from the Detail Center using drag&drop. If you select an entire component, the entire component will be removed; if you select the “Detail Views” entry, all generated views are removed. To add a view to a component just select the corresponding part and then select Add View via the context menu. A dialog will open where you can add views.

DetailCenter


Detailing To start the detailing just drag the desired parts onto the action button using drag&drop. The button will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go off the mouse button and the parts are transferred. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse or select the entry Detailing via the context menu. A detail block with the date and time of the detailing is created and saved on your hard drive every time the detailing process is activated. Every variation of the same type is thus still accessible later during the insertion process. You must save the model after the detailing has finished, since the modification management requires information that has to be written to the drawing. If you do not save the model, this information is lost.

Special Settings You have access to the hereafter described settings via the button SETTINGS.

Group Behaviour during Detailing

Hide The part is hidden in the model after detailing. You can e.g. at a detailing via direct part selection see directly from the model which parts still have to be detailed

DetailCenter


Definition of Main View Within ProSteel 3D, there are different variants to specify the main view (front view) of a shape for detailing. Experience showed us that in most of the cases it isn’t enough to assume a firm guideline here because this specification is individually made by the executive design engineer and mostly also depends on the constructive environment. As it is a matter of component parts in space, you cannot clearly define top/bottom or left/right. Front View based on the Parts Coordinate System (A) Since each component part has its own coordinate system, a clear and constant main view can be specified with the help of this coordinate system. In case of standard shapes, the Y-axis of this coordinate system is always aligned parallel towards the web so that it can serve as reference axis for the plan view. This guarantees that – independent of the shape position – the front view always shows one of the two web sides and the plan view shows a flange. The position in longitudinal direction, however, depends on the insertion direction of the shape. The starting point of the part is always situated on the left or at the bottom. In case of non-symmetrical shapes (e.g. L-shapes), the coordinate system is rotated around the Y-axis so that you can look inside the shape.

The figure on the left shows the part coordinate system of an L-shape (X, Y, Z) with the starting point S and the endpoint E. For detailing, the coordinate system now is rotated around the Y-axis by 180° (X', Y’, Z’ and S' resp. E'). Now, the front view has been defined along this new X-axis.

Front View based on the Global Front View (B) To avoid exchanging up and down you can determine two global front views. The view in the direction of the ”nearest” part coordinate axis is assumed as front view of the corresponding shape. To avoid the view on a cross-section you can define an alternative front view, which sensibly has been rotated by 90°.

DetailCenter


You obtain the result that the position is always independent of the insertion direction of the part (base plates are always „at the bottom“), but the front view once can show the web and once the flange – depending on the rotation of the shape in the view. Tough, parts which are situated further back in construction are displayed as seen from inside. Select the entry Set Global Reference View in the context menu of the component parts list to specify the global front views. Then, you have to click into the model to get the cross hairs for selection. After that, you select the desired view direction of the front view and then the alternative view direction. When you press the ESC-key instead of selection the views are reset to the default values (0,-1,0) and (1,0,0). The current values are displayed in the information window. Front View based on the Outside of the Model (C) This variant is similar to the global front view. The difference is that instead of specified reference views you always choose the part coordinate axis, which show most clearly from the center of construction to the outside. This means that the front view is always what you would see from the outside if you looked towards the center of the whole construction. This method largely corresponds to human imagination, but, depending on the rotation of the shape, once the web and once the flange can be displayed. The following example shows the effects of the selected main view on the 2D-display of a shape:

DetailCenter


Positions 1-4 have been inserted at a rectangular, the Y-axis of the part is showing to the top and the Z-axis is showing in shape direction. The views A and B are the specified global front views. Depending on selection, you will get the front view displayed on the right. Specify Individual Front View (D) The last variant is that you can specify for each individual part separately which part coordinate axis has to serve as front view. In general, you can decide to use variant (B) or (C) and align unfavourable parts individually and independently. Select the entry Set Individual Reference View in the context menu of the component part list to specify an individual front view. Then, you have to select the desired part to get the cross-hairs for selection. After that, you choose the desired view direction of the front view. When you press the ESC-key instead of selection the individual front view of the part is deleted. The current value is displayed in the information window. Select the entry Reset Reference Views in the context menu of the component parts list to delete the specifications for all component parts simultaneously.

DetailCenter


Other Views You have the option to add additional views to a part or to create manual details from entire model areas. Since the manual details are actually free views, they too are controlled via this dialog. You have access to this function via the button ÄDDITIONAL VIEW or via the entry Additional Views in the context menu. The following dialog window is also a non-modal dialog which means that you can change your part selection in the views list of the Detail Center at any time. Group Given Views

Input Field Here, you can change the names for free views.

List The available views, which can be added to the part, are displayed here. Select the desired view by clicking on it in the list. Already existing views are highlighted and cannot be selected.

Group Selection

Selection Field The detail style, which has to be used for a manual detail. When you select the option 'From Component Part', the style assigned in the component part list will be used. By clicking on the small button on the right side of this field, you can edit the selected detail style.

PICK VIEW Click on this button to define the view level for free views by picking in the model.

ADD Click on this button to add the selected view to the selected part.

MANUAL DETAIL By clicking on this button, you can create a manual detail of the selected part or of any part selection from the model.

Only Plane The points picked during definition of a view plane are projected onto the current view plane.

Add View If you want to add one of the six basic views, just select the corresponding view from the list and click on the ADD button. To add a free view just select one of the free views 'View A-A to Cut C-C' from the list. The input field above can be used to change the name.

DetailCenter


Then, click on the PICK VIEW button to specify the UCS (origin, X- and Y-axis) to pick any view or use the ESC key to import the current view on screen. Finally, click on the ADD button. The added views are treated during detailing just like directly created views and automatically further processed. Manual Detail from the Model Select the first entry 'Detail Views’ in the views list of the Detail Center to create a manual detail with any part selection from the model. Now, click on the MANUAL DETAIL button and enter a name for the detail in the then opening input field. Then, pick any view by specifying the UCS (origin, X- and Y-axis) or use the ESC key to import the current view on screen. After that, you are prompted to select the parts, which are to be processed for this manual detail. A window similar to the preview opens, which displays the parts as 3D objects for now. You can now dimension manually, attach position flags or any 2D-lines and texts. Manipulations of these 3D-parts are possible as well since they are only copies from the model. Then you click on the modified CREATE 2D button, and the 2D-projection calculation for the 3D-parts is carried out. Of course, you can continue to work in this window, but you will not have the intelligent properties of the components available. Once you have finished your additions, save the window without renaming it. If you do rename it, the unique allocation for the Detail Center is no longer active. Manual Detail from Components You can also create a manual detail from construction groups or single parts without having to select the parts specifically in the model. Just select the entry of the desired part in the views list. The rest is the same as for the manual detail from the model apart from parts selection.

DetailCenter


D.1.8 Detail Block Overview (Insert)

If you have detailed all of the parts you can then insert the generated detail blocks into the workshop plans. You will see the saved detail blocks in this last work level, the insert list. Since most of the important points have already been discussed under Component Overview, here are just a few special commands of this work level.

Dialog Commands

UPDATE

Click on this button to search the current output directory of the Detail Center once more. This is required if you detailed a new model drawing or if a manual copy of

a complete detail folder was entered into the output directory.

EXPRESS

Click on this button to start the Detail Center Express for automatic insertion into the workshop plans according to a specified pattern.

DetailCenter


List of Detail Folder The default setting fills this list with the folder names, which are located in the detail folder of ProSteel 3D. New details are always saved to a folder. The name of that folder corresponds with the associated model drawing. Users should leave this structure as it is. However, add additional folders so that you can access to other directories outside of the output path (detail path) created by ProSteel 3D. Add Detail Library Select the entry Add Detail Library in the context menu to add a detail library. You can then select an additional folder via the Windows file selection dialog, which is added to the list. If normally you are working locally, you also have e.g. access to detail blocks saved on a network server by using this function. Delete Detail Library To delete a detail library, click on the corresponding list entry and use the context menu to select the entry Delete Detail Library. All detail blocks including the folder are then deleted. Please remember that the program doesn’t take into consideration possibly existing foreign files! ProSteel 3D assumes that the detail libraries only contain detail blocks for insertion and that no finished drawings or other files are contained in these libraries.

DetailCenter


List of Details Here you will see all of the generated detail blocks as their own entries with date and time when they were created and you can check their current status. The display and sorting of the list depends on the settings of the work tools. Status The significance of these pictures matches the component part overview; please refer to that section for further details. If the detail block has already been inserted, the entry is marked with a checkmark. Preview Before inserting the detail block, you can display a preview. To activate the preview, just select the corresponding entry and then select the entry Detail Block Preview via the context menu. A new drawing window opens displaying the result of the detailing in the form of a preview. This detail block can be processed as well. In case of modification, you mustn’t change the name of the drawing on any account. Otherwise the detail block cannot be identified any more.

DetailCenter


Insert Detail Blocks To insert detail blocks just drag the desired details onto the action button using drag&drop. The button will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go off the mouse button and you can start inserting blocks. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse or select the entry Insert via the context menu. Insertion Every inserted detail block first appears in the current target drawing in its origin and can then be moved to the desired position within the drawing („sticking to the checkmark“). You can open several drawings and click on a drawing to set it as the active one before inserting the blocks. Any details will then be displayed there. You can track the parts you have just inserted if you have opened the info window. You can ignore this part insert or cancel the entire insertion process. Target Drawing In order to activate the modification mechanism the program has to know, into which drawing you are inserting the details. You cannot insert parts until the drawing has been saved. You should refrain from making any subsequent drawing name or folder changes as well. Although the Detail Center has a verification function for “lost” drawings or details, you will save yourself a lot of time and effort by just leaving the plans where they are. The location for saving the plans should be considered beforehand. Revisions Once the details have been inserted into the drawing you can manually revise the drawing. Please remember that the single parts and groups are intelligent details. For further information please read the comments in the corresponding chapter of this manual. Ideally, you should optimize the detail style of the detailing in such a way as to eliminate any revisions. Only then the modification mechanism can function correctly, since subsequent changes in the details are otherwise lost if you select the modification function.

DetailCenter


US-Mark Numbering During insertion, you can issue component part numbers according to a US drawing standard. These marks (mostly consisting of sheet number, component part code and a continuous index) serve for identification of the workshop drawings of the parts within the model and within the parts lists. As in practice, each of these marks has an individual structure; they are based on a definition file describing the structure and value range of the marks. In the settings, you can select the current definition file to be used under 'US-Mark Numbering”.

At first insertion, a small dialog opens if the 'US-Mark-Numbering' option has been activated. This dialog can be docked beside the Detail Center. The active fields depend on the default settings in the definition file. For each new inserted detail a component part index is counted up according to definition file. However, this index can be changed at any time. The resulting number (e.g. a1) will now be entered in the model into the field ’Shipping Number’ of shape characteristics and in the 2D drawing into the field ‘Shipping Number of Position Flag’. The position flag display is changed to ‘Shipping Number’.

Click on the button NEW DRAWING to count up the index for the drawing number and the component part index will be reset to its start value. You can continue insertion in another drawing sheet. Drawing Synchronization When you are inserting the detail blocks, the insert information is saved to special files of the detail library. After all, it could be that you did not open the model when inserting blocks and opening the drawing in the background can be quite frustrating because very large models especially require a long computing time for this operation. Every time you open the model, the model drawing is compared and synchronized with these data. You should never delete these files until the synchronization process is finished and you have saved the model. The modification mechanism cannot function reliably if the program lacks the information telling it which part has been inserted into which drawing. Your work is better protected, if you do not delete the blocks and folders until after the assignment is completed.

DetailCenter


Special Settings You have access to the hereafter described settings via the button SETTINGS.

Group Behaviour during Insertion

Remove Block Each inserted detail block will be deleted on the hard drive immediately after insertion. However, this is only possible if the model drawing is open at the same time, as the program has to make some entries here. Please remember that the model drawing has to be saved afterwards.

US-Mark Numbering

You can issue mark numbers as they are usually used in the USA at insertion.

Display Fields Here, you see the definition file used for mark numbers including a short description. This file includes the format description of the numbers. If the program or project path is an element of the information, the part will only be displayed there as <prg> or <prj>.

DetailCenter


D.1.9 Global Settings

In addition to the settings of the different work levels, you can use this page to make the fundamental settings of the Detail Center. However, you will also find special default settings, which are valid for several work levels at the same time and which are set centrally.

DetailCenter


Dialog-Commands

TEMPLATE

Click on this button to save your settings of the Detail Center in a template or to select one of these templates. In this template, the settings of all work levels as well as the global

settings are saved. You can process or select this template file on each work level. Group Behaviour during Opening

Load Model When the Detail Center is opened, the model is automatically analysed and the component part structure is displayed according to all default settings in the component parts list. Since this process may require some time in the case of big models, this function can be deactivated. You also can select the analysis of the model structure manually at a later moment via the button UPDATE in the component parts list.

Recompute The group dimensions are calculated anew when the model structure is analysed. If you created e.g. a parts list before and the data therefore are current data, you may reduce loading time of the Detail Center by switching off this option.

With Bolts When the model structure is analysed, all bolts of groups existing in the component parts list will be displayed as well. This allows an easy check of the used bolts, but the resulting great number of parts has a negative effect on the speed. This setting doesn’t, however, influence the information about the bolts in-group details.

Workframes When the model structure is analysed, the view levels of the working areas are also displayed as entries in the component part list and analysed.

Standard... When the model structure is analysed, horizontal projection, plan view and anchor plan are also displayed as entries in the component part list and analysed.

Group Behaviour during Selection

Show in the Model

DetailCenter


The part (or complete groups) clicked in the list is (are) highlighted in the model. When another entry is selected, marking switches over to the new part.

Detail

Style Sync... The program selects exactly the detail style the currently checked entry has in the component part resp. views list. When the dialog window for processing of detail style parameters is open, the corresponding settings are also directly displayed there.

> Parameter The displayed parameter pages in the detail style dialog depend on the type of the checked component part. If you have e.g. checked a single part, the pages for groups will not be displayed.

Model Sync... The Detail Center is always updated to match with the active model drawing, if several drawings are open. Since this process may require some time, you can switch off this option in the case of big models. Update can be selected manually via the UPDATE button in the component parts list. In addition, you often don’t want to update the lists while you are only looking up something in another drawing.

Group Others

Preview The preview of a detail is automatically updated when you modify a parameter in the detail style dialog window. In case of many modifications, it is however reasonable to deactivate the update first and to select it manually afterwards.

PlugIn's External plugIn's will be integrated which allow an individual adaptation of the detailing results. A plug In-manager and additional dialog windows allow you to control further defaults which may be completely different depending on the supplier. At the moment, there are no plugIn's supported.

DetailCenter


Tolerance Here, you set the tolerance for contour calculation of the modeller. In some rare cases it may be that the contour cannot be determined correctly at 2D-derivation. This especially occurs when component parts having very small angles are rotated towards view direction. If you detect an incorrect behaviour or if the error message "Can't calculate Extents" is displayed in the command line of AutoCAD, you can set here a smaller tolerance value.

Height Level Here, you enter the height level which correspond to the X-Y-plane in the model with the height Z=0 (world coordinates). For detailing of groups and overviews it is thus possible to display correct height dimensions.

Group Display Templates

Parts Here, you set the desired template for sorting and filter of the component parts list. In the display field, the currently selected template is displayed. Click on the small button (...) on the right side of the display to select another template. Click on the small button (x) to reset the display to standard display. Only the templates you created before via display sorting of component parts list will be offered for selection. If, in the mean time one of these templates has been changed, the modified display will be shown, too.

Views Here, you set the desired template for sorting and filter of the views list. Selection is similar to the one for component parts list.

Insert Here, you set the desired template for sorting and filter of the insertion list. Selection is similar to the one for component parts list.

Group Configuration Files

Output Here, you can see on which path the details will be stored later. A subordinate directory with the model name is created there. You can modify the path by double-clicking on the field. It is however recommended to avoid modification of the path unless it is absolutely necessary!

DetailCenter


Program Path Here, you see the complete path of your ProSteel 3D installation. If other displayed paths are further subordinate directories of this program path, the corresponding part is only displayed there as <prg>.

Project Path Here, you see the complete path of your current project in the case that project management is used. If other displayed paths are further subordinate directories of this project path, the corresponding part is only displayed there as <prj>.

Translation Here, you see the desired translation file for drawing labelling. In the display field, the currently selected file is displayed. Click on the small button (...) on the right side of the display to select another file. Click on the small button (x) to reset the display to standard default. If the program or project path is an element of the information, the part will only be displayed there as <prg> or <prj>.

US-Mark-Numbering Here, you see the definition file used for US-mark numbers. This file includes the format description of the numbers. Selection is similar to translation file.

DetailCenter


DetailCenter


D.1.10 Automatic Translation

ProSteel 3D permits a multilingual labelling of drawings, which is controlled by a translation database. This database can be freely edited so that it is possible to add any language you like. The form of the translated terms (e.g. only as abbreviation) can also be adapted to the corresponding requirements. Before you can work with the translation database, it has of course to contain the currently used terms. For this reason, the model can be searched automatically for new terms of the object properties (like name, note, etc).

Edit Data Base Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center and click on the entry Edit Translation. The following dialog opens.

List: Here, you can see the terms of the database, which have to

be translated. If you click on one of these terms, it will be displayed in the Original Text field and you can add or revise the translation. Please note that only those terms are displayed, which exist in the database at the very moment. Therefore you have to update the database after having modified the model.

Language: Here, you select the language, which has to be translated.

Original Text: Here, the current entry from the list will be displayed the translation which you can edit.

DetailCenter


Translation: Here, you can enter the translation of the currently selected term. Click on the INSERT button and the entry is accepted as translation into the selected language. If the term has already been translated into the selected language before, the translation will be displayed. Click on the MODIFY button and the translation will be modified correspondingly.

All Entries... If this field has been checked, all entries available in the database are displayed in the list of the terms, which have to be translated.

All Unknown If this field has been checked, only those entries are displayed in the list of which a translation into the selected language is not yet available.

Select File: Here, you see the path of the translation database. Click on File button to modify the database.

Click on this button to modify (select) the translation database.

Click on this button to save the translation database.

Click on this button to add a new language to the database.

Click on this button to add the entry in the Translation input field as translation of the Original Text entry in the selected language.

Click on this button to replace the current translation in the Translation input field as translation of the Original Text entry in the selected language.

Click on this button to delete the current translation of the Original Text entry in the selected language.

DetailCenter


Update Data Base After having modified the model, you should search the model for new terms for the translation database. These terms are taken from the object properties so that own comments or component part names for the position flags etc., which were inserted there, can be translated. The program tries to synchronize the entries with those of the shape database of ProSteel 3D so that not modified shape names are not displayed in the translation. Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center to search in the model. Click on the entry Enlarge Translation from Model. The model is searched for new terms and these are imported.

DetailCenter


DetailCenter


D.1.11 Transfer Drawing Paths

This function permits you to transfer the drawing numbers saved in the drawing database or the file paths of the workshop drawings to the component parts properties of the model drawing. It is possible to display the drawing numbers of the processed details in the position flags of an overview. In addition, it would also be possible to export the parts data via ProSteel 3D standard interface and to have them evaluated by foreign programs.

Start Transfer Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center to click on the entry Take over file Paths. Then, you still have the possibility to verify the drawing database of the model, if in the meantime you moved some details or modified the drawing numbers. After the drawing verification was finished (or if you don’t want this option) the following dialog opens:

DetailCenter


Group Data Selection

Data Selection Here you specify which data have to be transferred into the component parts properties. In addition, you can still add any extra text. Drawing Number – The drawing number of the corresponding 2D drawing will be transferred.

Only File Name – Only the file name of the 2D drawing is transferred (without specification of the path). File Path – The complete file path including the drawing name of the 2D drawing will be transferred. Only Text – Only the specified text of the 'Prefix' input field would be transferred.

Prefix Here you can specify a text which has to be placed in front of the real data or which has to be transferred as only text (option Only Text).

Postfix Here you can specify a text, which has to be placed behind the real data.

Group Target

Target Here you specify into which property fields of the parts the data have to be transferred. Note 1 – The data are transferred into the note field 1 of the parts properties. Note 2 - The data are transferred into the note field 2 of the parts properties.

Groups... Only the data of the corresponding group are transferred to each part in the model; e.g. detailed stiffeners are marked with the reference to the corresponding group drawing.

All Equal... The data are transferred to all component parts having the equal position number (separated according to single part and group) and this even if only the workshop drawing to one of these positions exists.

Remove before In all component parts, the contents of the selected property field are removed before transfer is started. All existing entries are overwritten, this would, however, permit to transfer and display the drawing numbers of all parts first and then only the drawing paths of the groups (the drawing numbers of the single parts would thus be deleted again).

DetailCenter


Now, click on the OK button to transfer the current entries of the drawing database in the component parts properties. D.1.12 Drawing Verification

Each time when you insert some details in a drawing, a dependence of the component part on the workshop drawing and vice versa will be saved in the drawing database of the model drawing. These saved dependences later permit an automatic update of the workshop drawing or the transfer of drawing numbers to the component parts properties of the model. These links are the reason for your having to enter a valid drawing name of the destination drawings before insertion of details. It is also the reason for your having to save the model after insertion. Nevertheless it may be that you have to modify the physical position of the 2D-drawings after the complete detailing was finished. This is the case if you have to save them in an assembly folder of the order in the network. In addition, it may be that you want to move some details from one drawing to the other in order to add some completions or just because there is not enough place in the drawing any more. However, if the model has saved the wrong dependences, and the Detail Center thus cannot function completely as it should, you can correct this subsequently. This correction partly is carried out automatically, partly by means of your manual support. It is divided into the two areas Drawing Path Verification and Detail Verification.

DetailCenter


Start of Verification Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center and click on the entry Check Dependences. After the note that this function may require some time and that if need be you can cancel the function the verification starts. At first, it is verified whether all paths of workshop drawings saved in the drawing database still exist. Then, the drawings, which were not found, are displayed in the dialog. Now, you have the possibility to set the paths or drawing names anew.

Group Invalid Drawing Paths

Click on this button to change the path of all displayed drawings at the same time and start a new search. Then, the list either contains the remaining drawings, which are still lacking or the verification function changes to detail verification. If you only changed the physical position of the plans on the hard drive, you don’t have to make any further corrections.

Click on this button to change the path and/or file name of a certain drawing selected before in the displayed list. If a drawing was renamed or if a certain drawing was saved on another physical place, you can thus make the necessary corrections.

Click on this button to ignore the selected drawing during the following verification. Thus you can also remove deleted drawings.

DetailCenter


Please note, however, that you cannot add further drawings. If therefore you copied and renamed a drawing, please assign the new name to it instead of ignoring the drawing.

After verification of paths was finished, and any necessary corrections were made, the program passes on to the verification of the details contained. It is now verified whether all details are contained in the original or now modified drawings. All the details, which were not found, are now displayed in the list. You have thus the possibility to link any moved details anew or to remove deleted details.

Group Details not Found

Search Path The current search path used for the ‚Search Detail' option is displayed in this field. You can modify the path by clicking on the right button beside the display.

Click on this button to search for any details not found in the drawings of the current search path. For this purpose, each drawing will be opened in the background and searched for all listed details individually.

Please note that each file having the extension *.dwg will be opened, as it could be a workshop drawing. This means that also any existing ProSteel 3D-models or other AutoCAD-drawings will be opened. You should therefore take care that only 2D-plans with details are in the list to avoid unnecessary waiting periods.

DetailCenter


Click on this button to specify the new drawing where a certain detail is which was selected before in the list. Then, it is verified at once whether the detail is really situated on the new drawing.

Click on this button to ignore the selected detail; the original entry is kept. Thus you can also remove deleted details as you can remove the detail hints from the drawing database after end of verification.

Please note, however, that you cannot add further details. If therefore you moved a detail, please assign the new drawing to it instead of ignoring the detail.

End of Verification After the verification has been finished, the assignment is structured anew and the drawing database is updated. You still have the possibility now to remove the ignored or invalid detail hints from the drawing database. If you refrain from doing this, the original entries of these details will be kept and you can repeat the verification at a later moment.

Ignored... If this field has been checked, the detail hints on ignored

drawings will be taken into consideration, too for correction (all details giving a hint of these drawings are set as ignored details). Otherwise, these are not affected in order to avoid destroying hints to temporarily moved drawings.

DetailCenter


2D-References if this field has been checked, the hints of 2D-drawings of all ignored details will be removed as well. The data base entry with possible further information is however kept.

Invalid... If this field has been checked, the data base entries of any details, which were not found, will be completely removed. Otherwise, only the hints of 2D-drawings of these details will be removed.

When you click on CANCEL in this dialog, the data base will not be modified. You can repeat the verification process at any time you like by means of correction. Thus you can first look at the result of drawing verification in a text file (model name_LogFile.txt) which is situated in the subdirectory ..\detail of your ProSteel 3D installation. There, you will find a list of all workshop drawings linked with the model as well as the status of the details expected to be there. ; ProSteel 3D for AutoCAD – Drawing Verification ; ------------------------------------------- [HEADER] Verification file=h:\testmodel.dwg [drawing file: h:\testmodel_views.dwg] Status=moved or deleted view hall_FRONT=can not be found [drawing file: h:\testmodel_details.dwg] Pos 2 (HE 140 B)=valid Pos 47 (PLATE 10x137...191)=not found BG 3 (HE 200 B)=valid BG 9.1 (HE 200 B)=valid

DetailCenter


DetailCenter


D.1.13 Direct Detailing

The ProSteel 3D Detail Center can also be used to detail parts directly from within the model or display a preview of the detail. This means dimensions of construction groups can be checked, or only a few selected parts within a complex building, which are urgently needed, can be detailed. Perhaps area classes have not been used, but it is now desired to detail a special truss. Large models pose the problem of being able to identify this part directly. The Detail Center offers a few helpful tools, but the following method is even easier: To detail a component part directly from within the model, select a default detail style first, so that parts without a detail style can be detailed. Now highlight the parts to be detailed within the model and then select the context menu via the right mouse button. Depending on the parts selected, a preview can be created from a single part or a group or these parts or groups can be detailed directly. Select the desired function from the context menu. A group can be detailed or displayed in the preview whenever the main part of the group has been selected.

DetailCenter


Direct Detailing If you want to work with direct detailing, you will be prompted to specify if all of the selected parts without a detail style are to be linked with the default style first. If you confirm this question, these parts will be highlighted in the Detail Center as well since the linking is permanent. If you answer no to the question, only those parts are detailed, which already have a detail style. The parts will then be directly detailed or the preview is displayed. Direct Detailing with Insertion If additionally valid and saved 2D-workshop drawings are open, the parts can even be inserted into the drawings directly after detailing. In the context menu, a list of the valid drawings will be displayed in a subordinate tab of the corresponding detailing selection (respectively the entry Detail Library for 'Not Insert'). If such a drawing is selected, you will directly reach the insertion mode fort he selected drawing after detailing has been finished. The parts can be placed there.

DetailCenter


D.1.14 Modification Management

The modification management is one of ProSteel 3D’s special Detail Center features. Once the model has been detailed and any resulting detail blocks have been distributed to the different workshop plans, the detailing or processing is considered finished. The next time you load the model most of the entries will appear in green – this colour signifies that the detailing of these parts matches the original parts of the model. However, if you have changed parts of the model they will be shown in red. This tells you that the detail blocks (and thus maybe the workshop drawings as well) are no longer current and have to be updated. The program performs this update.

Open a Drawing from Within the Detail Center Just click on a part in the component list of the Detail Center to have a quick look at a certain workshop drawing. Now select the context menu and use the entry Open 2D drawing to automatically open the drawing containing this detail – presuming it has been inserted.

Update Drawings Any parts highlighted in red can be updated automatically. Select a specific component or a parent and only the parts contained in these are updated. If you select the "Model" entry, all parts are updated. Selecting the context menu after having selected the part, use the entry Update only modified 2D-drawing to activate the modification mechanism. However, if you want to force also an update of non-modified (green) parts to replace e.g. the detailing by another detail style you have to select the entry Update 2D-drawing in the context menu. One by one, all of the affected drawings are opened in the background, the parts are newly detailed and inserted directly into the original drawing position, replacing the old ones. Should you have one of these drawings open at the time, you can watch this replacement happen “live” right in front of you.

DetailCenter


Subsequent Modifications Depending on the settings in the work tools of component overview, modifications of the details which you carried out later will be adopted again. This is of course only possible to a limited extent. At the very moment, moving of position flags, weld marks, height indicators and of dimension texts in all 2D-drawings as well as modifications of sketch display at overviews are adopted. If a dynamic drawing parts list possibly exists, it will also be updated in the case the component parts have changed. Please note, however, that only the position of the dimension text can be restored (in the case that you “sorted out” unfavourably placed texts), but not the dimension itself or modifications of the dimension text. To avoid a reset of such modifications, you can protect them against update. This procedure might take some time to complete; then all plans are once again current and the latest detail blocks are ready for insertion. Use the ‘Display only Latest Blocks’ option for the insertion to place the details. You should remember, however, that the modification mechanism functions optimally only if the tips and notes from the previous chapters are observed. You should, therefore, work through those chapters very diligently.

DetailCenter


Protection against Update To exclude modifications of dimensions, position flags, weld marks or height indicators completely from being updated, you may protect them or set them free again. This is recommended for example for subsequent modifications of dimension texts or in the case dimensions were completely moved. During automatic update of the 2D drawing, the program now checks whether e.g. a dimension has been protected. If this is the case, this dimension is kept exactly as it is and the corresponding „new“ dimension is deleted from the updated detail. The result may be that the position or the dimension text won’t match any more. Therefore, this option should only be used in the case you assume slight modifications (such as modifications of display or of position numbers) which only have few influences on the dimension. Since in future versions keeping of modifications will become more and more efficient, this protection against update is only a temporary help, which will become superfluous again later. The adoption of modifications combined with the efficiency of the automatic mechanisms of ProSteel 3D requires an enormous amount of time and energy in program development. This is the reason why modification management will only become perfect according to our requirements step by step. Select the entry Protection against Update in the component parts list of the Detail Center to protect the dimension or the position flags; weld marks, etc. against update or to release them again. Then, the following dialog opens which is described below.

DetailCenter


Group Selection-Filter

Selection-Filter Here, you can enter the filter for automatic object selection. Only those objects will be taken into consideration, which meet the filter condition. Select Objects – You specify manually by your selection, which objects have to be protected or released. No filter will be applied in this case. All Objects – All objects in the drawing are automatically selected without applying a filter. Processing of course only refers to dimensions, position flags, weld marks and height indicators. Dimension – Only dimensioning objects are automatically selected in the drawing. Each Flag – All position flags, weld marks and height indicators are automatically selected in the drawing. Only Position Flags – All position flags are selected in the drawing. Only Weld Marks – All weld marks are selected in the drawing. Only Height Indicators – All height indicators are selected in the drawing.

Click on this button to activate the protection against update for the selected objects unless it already exists. If you have checked the entry ‘Select Objects’ as selection filter, the desired objects have to be selected first.

Click on this button to remove the protection against update for the selected objects if they have one. If you have checked the entry ‘Select Objects’ as selection filter, the desired objects have to be selected first.

Of course, this function has to be applied in the 2D-workshop drawings and not in the 3D-model. Please also remember that you cannot compare the protection against update with a blocked layer. If the dimension to be protected was only on a blocked layer, it would be kept there, but the newly created (synonymous) dimension would not be deleted.

DetailCenter


Reset Modifications Before the first detailing takes place, the drawing should be initialized, i.e. it should be set to „zero“. This will ensure that the modification mechanism functions optimally. As the component parts in the model remember their modification even during modelling, it may be that the corresponding markings have already been set. This could cause some irritations. Select the entry Reset Modification Flags via the context menu of component parts view to reset any existing information about model modification. The entries, which details are situated on which drawings that are kept, as well as the already detailed detail blocks. Please select the entry Initialize All Anew from the context menu to reset the model completely. Please note, however, that now any information will be deleted (unless the assigned detail styles)! It will then no longer be possible to ask the model where the different component parts were inserted or to insert component parts already detailed but not yet inserted. This complete initialization is reasonable if you made some detailing beforehand „as a test“ or for a meeting and you now want to create the final workshop plans.

DetailCenter


Drawing List At any time, ProSteel 3D can create a drawing list giving you a survey on the inserted details and their status of modification. This drawing list is based on the current entries in the drawing database and on the status of the so-called “modification flags” of the component parts. Therefore, it is recommended to verify the drawing first. The program automatically offers this drawing verification after the function has been selected. It is of course also possible that hints which were recognized as invalid shall nevertheless remain valid because the drawings have only been moved temporarily. Creation of File Select the context menu of the component parts list and click on the entry Output of Drawing List. A text file (Modelname_DrawingList.txt), will be created in the subdirectory.. \detail of your ProSteel 3D-installation containing first a survey on all 2D-drawings and the number of inserted details. If one of these details has been checked as modified in the Detail Center, this drawing is reported as being modified. Therefore, this statement doesn’t mean that the drawing has actually already been modified. It means that it still has to be modified. In addition, you will find a detailed list per drawing, which details (position numbers) are contained and which of them has already been modified in the model. On the following page, you will find an example of a drawing list. Since an external program via code words might evaluate the content of this list, the output of these key words is always in English. As you can see in the example, there are 6 single parts (2 of them modified) and 2 groups in the drawing with drawing number ABC_PL03. Therefore, the drawing is checked as being modified.

DetailCenter


; ProSteel 3D for AutoCAD 2000 – Drawing List ; ----------------------------------------------------- [HEADER] Created=02-04-2003 * 11:34 AM ModelFile=h:\testmodell.dwg FileContent=Drawing list and object reference Drawings=3 DrawingNumber|Changed |Parts |Groups |Views |DrawingFile =============|========|========|========|========|======================== ABC_AN01 |no | | |2 |h:\testmodel_view.dwg ABC_BG02 |yes | |5(3) | |h:\testmodel_bg.dwg ABC_PL03 |yes |6(2) |2 | |h:\testmodel_plates.dwg [h:\testmodel_views.dwg] DrawingNumber=ABC_AN01 Changed=no Parts= ChangedParts= Groups= ChangedGroups= Views=Hall_SEI_R,Hall_X_1 ChangedViews= [h:\testmodel_bg.dwg] DrawingNumber=ABC_BG02 Changed=yes Parts= ChangedParts= Groups=3,7,10,31,49 ChangedGroups=3,7,31 Views= ChangedViews= [h:\testmodel_plates.dwg] DrawingNumber=ABC_PL03 Changed=yes Parts=35,38,40,43,45,46 ChangedParts=40,46 Groups=50,55 ChangedGroups= Views= ChangedViews=

DetailCenter


Detailing Style


D.2 Detailing Style

D.2.1 Working with Detailing Styles

The detailing style offers you some decisive influence over the style of the detailing because it is here that you determine what is to be dimensioned, how to dimension it, what texts to include, whether to attach position flags, and much more. More than 350 parameters are available to specify the appearance of your drawing. You can save and load these styles individually and even import or export them from third parties. Since it is possible to manage entire parameter records you can create specific styles for specific detailing tasks (e.g. for overviews, workshop plans, life-sized displays, etc.) and just select them later. Your main task consists of defining the suitable styles once. The program offers the option to immediately check each change using a preview feature (see Detail Center/Preview) – until details look exactly like you want them to be. This chapter will discuss the setting options first with an example of a detailed component at the end of the chapter. The chapters describing the detailing process also describe how to work with styles.

Saving Styles Normally, the detailing styles are saved together with the drawing. This means that you always have to save your model if the modifications of detailing styles are to be kept permanently. In addition, there is the possibility to write a detailing style as text file on the hard drive and to re-import it. This permits you to exchange, update or even transfer the detailing styles of different models. Furthermore, you can create a collection of detailing styles and use in the model only a selection of those styles, which are required for that moment.

Detailing Style


Detailing Style


D.2.2 General Info

When you select the detailing style, a dialog with a tree structure appears on the left where the different dialog pages are sorted hierarchically in groups according to different areas. When you click on an entry in the tree, the assigned dialog page opens on the right and you can modify the values. If you move to another entry, your previous entries are saved and the new page will be displayed.

To allow a clear view, some of the tabs have subordinate tabs themselves which are accessibly via a button and which are used for special settings. These are usually infrequently used settings and cannot be reached directly via the tree structure. The commands of the dialog frame are the ones all dialog tabs have in common. Only the new specific commands will be described here. The other commands are found in the general description of ProSteel 3D-dialogs. Description Here, you can specify a description of the detailing style to

explain its function in detail.

Style Class Here, you can assign the detailing style to an existing style class. The style then will be displayed in the selection list of the Detail Center together with a colored icon. You can identify the essential task more rapidly (e.g. detailing style for single parts, groups, etc.). The detail styles available for selection are sorted by different functions on the base of these style groups.

Detailing Style


Dialog-Commands

SAVE

When you click on this button, the complete detailing style is saved in a text file on the hard drive. This file has the name of the style and the file ending *.sty.

It is possible to load this file later into this or into another model or to transfer it to thirds.

SAVE AS

Click on this button to save the detailing style under another name on the hard drive. Your detailing style copy automatically gets the name of the style pre-set here as file name. It is possible to load this file later into this

or into another model or to transfer it to thirds.

UPDATE PREVIEW

When you click on this button, preview detailing of a detail is calculated anew and updated if the window is open. Within the Detail Center you can look in a preview on the effects of a

detailing style for detailing of a detail. Normally, this preview is automatically updated at each modification of the detailing style. However, if you have e.g. a very complex overview the detailing of which requires a lot of time or if you want to modify a lot of parameters, you can switch off the automatic update and release it manually.

Detailing Style


D.2.3 Global Settings

This is the tab for global default settings ranking higher than all other tabs. If, for instance, dimensioning is deactivated, no dimensioning will be carried out - independent of the setting in the dimensioning tab.

Common Tab

Group Display

Projection Here, you specify the system according to which the different part views (front view, plan view, top view, etc.) are aligned towards each other. DIN – Distribution of the views is effected according to DIN. American – Distribution of the views is effected according to American standard.

Alignment: Here, you specify the alignment of the details at detailing. Horizontal – The parts are aligned horizontally when detailed. Vertical – The parts are aligned vertically when detailed. Align as – AutoCAD aligns the parts during detailing according to their WCS position, which means that a slanted support remains slanted.

Detailing Style


Front View: Here, you indicate how the front view of a component part has to be specified. The other views then derivate from this front view. From Component – The element coordinate system of the component part is used for the determination of the front view. From Global Views – The global views are used for the determination of the front view. Outside Model – The view from the outside into the model is used for the determination of the front view. Individually per Part – The individually fixed front view of a part is used for the determination of the part’s front view. If it has not been defined, the element coordinate system will be used instead.

Like Group Single parts views are displayed according to the views of the corresponding groups, if existing. The left view of a stiffener is e.g. the view onto a plate (normally this would be the plan view), because the left view of the group would show the stiffener in this way.

> First View Only the first view of the part is displayed corresponding to the group; all other views are tilted according to standard related to this modified view.

Real 2D-lines The details are transformed into pure AutoCAD line diagrams. Intelligent properties of the 2D-details of course won’t be available any more.

ACIS if Plates Poly-plates are always temporarily transformed into ACIS elements for detailing to allow for better dimensioning of radii. The plate properties in the model are not affected by this.

Don’t scale The parts keep their original size and only the text is scaled for output on a printer /plotter.

Scale: Here, you set the scale of your details. Depending on the selection under ‘Don’t Scale Parts’ either the part or the text size is scaled. Please remember the hints under 'Detail Center/Generalities Concerning Scale and Dimensioning Styles'.

Detailing Style


Group Add

Dimensioning Dimensioning texts and lines are scaled according to the settings entered in the DIMENSIONING tab.

> US-Style Dimensioning is affected according to American default settings (AISC) if these differ from other default settings.

> Cross-Section Y At diagonal dimensioning according to American standard, the intersection point of the center line of the connected shapes and the shape axis of the supporting shape is viewed for the calculation of system points. Otherwise, this is the point on the centerline of the supporting shape which is situated next.

Position Flags Position flags are attached according to the settings entered in the POSITION FLAGS tab.

Weld Flags Welding symbols are attached according to the settings entered in the WELDING SYMBOLS tab.

Labels Additional label texts are attached according to the settings entered in the ADDITIONAL TEXTS tab.

Partial Views Tab Here, you specify which views of a part will be displayed and whether these are limited in their visual depth. However, you can also make use of the automatic process of the program, which determines the required views due to the processing.

Detailing Style


Group Partial Views

Automatic The program automatically displays the required views according to the existing detailing processes of the part. Thus, all detailing processes can be displayed and dimensioned.

Cut A cut is made in this view frame for any model views you like. Position, cut depth and displayed parts are determined by means of this frame.

Default You can choose the views to be generated from the six existing basic views. Here, you also pre-set the desired views for the overviews of detailed points; for standard overviews, however these settings haven’t any meaning,

> Selection Here, you pre-select which views have to be created during the detailing process. In the Detail Center, you also have the possibility to delete views or to add further views.

Min. Distance Here, you specify the distance of the views (incl. dimensions and text) if several views of a part are to be generated within one detail block.

Insertion Position Here, you specify the grip point for the later insertion of detail blocks. Select where to position the detail block from the 9 striking insertion points below-left up to above-right (also for 2D-Update).

Group Visual Depth

Max. Depth Here, you can indicate a visual depth up to which the subordinate parts are seized at construction group display. This filter can be switched on separately for the different views to limit the depth only at left and right views.

Limit for When displaying construction groups, the visual depth for the selected view is limited to the value specified under 'Max. Depth'. Please note, however, that unlike cut areas at views nevertheless the complete component part will be displayed. The specification of this value only serves as depth filter for seizing of the complete component part.

Detailing Style


Selection Class Tab The automatic assignment of detailing styles is available in the DetailCenter Express as well as in other commands of the Detail Center or of ProSteel 3D. Here, you can define where the corresponding detailing style has to be visible to limit the selection to a few reasonable styles.

Group Single Parts

Single Parts The detailing style is visible everywhere where single parts are concerned. Otherwise, it will not be displayed. If this option is deactivated, the visibility can be limited even further to certain types. However, if the style is e.g. only limited to end plates, it will also be displayed when the corresponding function doesn’t permit any filtering (e.g. other single parts).

> Straight Shapes The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of straight shapes.

> Bent The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of bent shapes.

> End Plates The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of end, base or other connection plates.

> Sheet Metal Plates The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of poly-plates (except for stiffeners).

> Stiffeners The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of stiffeners.

Detailing Style


Group Component Groups

Component Groups The detailing style is visible everywhere where it is a matter of component groups. Otherwise, it will not be displayed. If this option is deactivated, the visibility can be limited even further to certain types. However, if the style is e.g. only limited to supports, it will also be displayed when the corresponding function doesn’t permit any filtering (e.g. other shapes or groups).

> Straight Shapes The detailing style is only visible when the main part of the group is a straight shape.

> Bent The detailing style is only visible when the main part of the group is a bent shape.

> Supports The detailing style is only visible when the main part of the group is a straight shape and a support (longitudinal direction parallel towards the global Z-axis).

> Cross Girder The detailing style is only visible when the main part of the group is a straight shape and a cross girder (longitudinal direction parallel towards the global X/Y-plane).

Group Views

Views The detailing style is visible everywhere where it is a matter of views. Otherwise, it will not be displayed. If this option is deactivated, the visibility can be limited even further to certain types. However, if the style is e.g. only limited to anchor plans, it will also be displayed when the corresponding function doesn’t permit any filtering (e.g. other views).

> Standard The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of the model views from the working areas.

> Anchor Plans The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of anchor plans.

Others

Always selectable The detailing style is not submitted to a certain filtering and is visible everywhere.

Detailing Style


D.2.4 2D-Display

These dialog tabs offer the opportunity to specify the display type of the component parts (centerlines, drill holes, hidden edges, etc.), which line types have to be used and which special default settings have to be valid for the different detailing types.

Common Tab

Group Add

Visible Lines All visible lines are displayed. This field should always be checked.

Invisible The invisible lines are displayed according to their line type.

Bolts The put in bolts are depicted by a bolt symbol.

> Real... The bolts are depicted as real view with nut and bolt head.

Weldmint The welding joints imported to the model are depicted as weld symbol.

Elevation symbols The height indicators imported to the model are depicted.

Detailing Style


Cross-Sections The shape cross-sections are depicted with their exact radii – otherwise, the simplified depiction in the form of straight lines is selected.

> Dimensioning At dimensioning, all edges and radii of cross-section display are used. Otherwise, only the outside dimensions are depicted.

With Radii Arcs and circles are depicted as such AutoCAD elements – otherwise, they are approximated using many small continuous lines. The generation of actually curved lines will slightly affect on the overall processing speed.

Bearing Bar A symbol for the bearing bar direction is attached (which corresponds to the lengthwise direction of the grid) if it is a matter of plates having a grid.

> Symbol Size Here, you enter the size of the symbol, which is used for the direction of the plate grid.

Group Shape Shortening

With Shortening Shapes are “compressed” in areas without detailing and a shortening symbol is attached. Whether a shape can be shortened depends on its detailing processes and on the limits specified by you hereafter.

Symbol-Distance The gab in the shape or the distance between the lines if a shortening symbol with two lines is used.

Min. Shape Length Shortenings are to be attached starting at this length. You can use your page optimally by displaying the shapes as long as possible.

Min. Shortening The shape has to be shortened by at least this value to even activate any shortening.

Max. Number The maximum number of shortenings inserted into the shape.

Edge distances Shortenings cannot start at the edge or margin area but can only start this indicated distance from the edge. This prevents shortening a shape without detailing too much.

Detailing Style


Symbol Here, you select the symbol, which has to be inserted into the shape at shortening position. Single Line – The shortening symbol is a simple straight line. ZigZag Single Line – The shortening symbol is a serrated, wave-like line. Double Line – The shortening symbol is a double straight line with the gap set in the 'Symbol-Distance' input field. ZigZag Double Line - The shortening symbol is a serrated, wave-like double line with the gap set in the 'Symbol-Distance' input field. Gap without Line – There is no symbol depicted, but only a gap with the distance set in the 'Symbol-Distance' input field.

Group Others

Hatching Size Here, you specify the hatching scale. This is the line distance for line hatching.

Hatching Angle Here, you enter the angle of hatching.

Hatching Pattern Here, you enter an AutoCAD hatching pattern to be used for cross-section hatching.

Single Part Dialog Tab

Detailing Style


Group Add Cross-Sections

Standard Shapes Additional cross-sections are added to the views of standard shapes.

Special Shapes Additional cross-sections are added to the views of special shapes.

Roof-Wall Additional cross-sections are added to the views of roof-wall-shapes.

Combi Shapes Additional cross-sections are added to the views of combi-shapes.

Weld Shapes Additional cross-sections are added to the views of weld shapes.

At End Plates In the plan view of a base or end plate, the cross-section of the welded shape is displayed.

Position Transversal... In the selection list, you define on which side of a partial view the cross-section of the shape has to be displayed. Left – The cross-section is displayed on the left. Right – The cross-section is displayed on the right.

Group Others

Origin: The zero point reference of coordinate dimensioning of the single part is displayed as reference point or at American dimensioning option as special symbol for “Running dimension”.

> Symbol Size Here, you enter the size of the symbol.

Detailing Style


Component Groups Dialog Tab

Group Cuts

Display 2D-cuts (manual or automatic at e.g. stiffeners) inserted into the main part are added as additional view to the group. Here you have to differentiate between 2D-cuts in the model and 2D-cuts in the details: 2D-cuts inserted in the model only define whether and how a detail has to be cut at detailing process.

Only manual Only manually added cuts are displayed. Cuts automatically determined by the program are not depicted.

Identical 1x Cuts having an identical display are only depicted once.

Arrange Below The cuts are not depicted on the left and/or on the right of the main view (mostly the front view), but beneath the last views, one beside the other.

Symbol Outside Cut arrows are displayed outside of the last dimensioning chains. Otherwise, they are fixed directly at the part even in front of the dimensioning chains.

Labeling here, you indicate the cut designation (without the code letter for cut) that has to be used for labeling the cut views.

Detailing Style


Cut Symbol Here, you can select a template describing the display of cut labeling. These templates can be defined within the command “Insert 2D cut”.

Code Here, you enter the code letter (or number) that has to be used to describe the first cut of a group. All other cuts of this group will be counted accordingly in increasing order.

Group Neighboring Parts

Display The neighboring parts of a group are also depicted. These are the parts where the group is connected, which however don’t belong to this group any more.

Position Flag The position flags of the neighboring parts are also inserted in the view.

Detailing Style The detailing style used for displaying the neighboring parts.

Search Area The size of an imaginary box around the whole group. Everything inside of this box will be displayed as neighbouring part up to the edges of this box. You may define the box in the three input fields separately for X-, Y- and Z-direction of the group.

Group End Plates:

Display A single part detail of the end plates will be depicted with displayed connection shape on the corresponding side of the group, if end or base plates exist.

Detailing Style The detailing style used for displaying the end plates.

View Here, you specify the view direction of the end plate detail related to the group. Inside – The shape to be connected is depicted as cut. Outside – The shape to be connected is depicted as hidden.

Distance The distance of the end plate details towards the other views of the group.

Detailing Style


Group Others

Origin: The zero point reference of coordinate dimensioning of the group is displayed as reference point or at American dimensioning option as special symbol for “Running dimensions (RD)”.

> Symbol Size Here, you enter the size of the reference point or of the symbol.

Benchmark A mark is displayed at the group showing the alignment with regard to a global northern direction. In the global settings, the American dimensioning style has to be activated.

US-Mark-Numbering The US-part number or position number as well as the quantity of pieces is shown together with the longitudinal dimension chain. However, the US-part number has to exist already, i.e. the option is not activated unless an update has been made. In the global settings, the American dimensioning style has to be activated.

Mounting Position In the case of stiffeners and web angles, it is specified whether these are situated on the front or back side of the web or on both sides of the web (in case of identical parts). In the global settings, the American dimensioning style has to be activated.

Detailing Style


Views Dialog Tab

Group Part-Filter

Shapes Shapes are displayed in the view unless it is a matter of the types that are set separately in the filter. Normally, this option should be activated. Distinguishing between the different component parts is of course possible only if these have been generated with the associated functions as well. Otherwise, a web angle created as manually drilled angle steel would be interpreted as a normal shape.

Poly-Plates Poly-plates are displayed in the view unless it is a matter of stiffeners or bracing plates.

Stiffeners Stiffeners are displayed in the view.

Bracing Plate Bracing plates (gusset plates) are displayed in the view.

Web Angle Web angles are displayed in the view.

End Plates End plates are displayed in the view.

Base Plates Base Plates are displayed in the view.

Special Parts Special parts are displayed in the view (e.g. ACIS-3D solids).

Detailing Style


Only in Frame Only those parts are taken into consideration which are situated completely or at least up to their half within the work frame. Thus you can make a special selection out of the area – otherwise, all parts are shown which are situated on the level of the work frame (i.e. in the way you would see them in reality.

Base Plate at... Head and base plates are displayed if the option ‘Sketch’ or ‘System Lines’ has been selected under display variant. Otherwise, they are always displayed.

Use XRef The parts added to the model via XREF’s are displayed and dimensioned as well. The above mentioned display filters are also valid for these component parts. Please refer to your AutoCAD documentation where you will find a description how to work with XREF’s.

Min. Part Size Here, you can exclude small parts from selection by specifying the distance of the most distant and farthest removed, opposing corners. If the corner distance is smaller than the indicated value, the part will not be recorded. This setting is unimportant if the value 0 has been entered here. None of the parts are then filtered with this function.

Group Display Variant

Standard The overview is displayed as standard 2D-depiction where all hidden edges are correctly determined.

'Sketch' The construction components are only hinted at as sketch drawing. It is not absolutely necessary that this sketch drawing has to be seen from the beginning till the end of a component part. It is possible that only the center line is displayed.

> Offset Edge Here, you specify the distance the beginning of the sketch drawing has to have from the insertion point of the shape. If you indicated a relative length smaller than 100%, this is also the beginning of the center line.

> Rel. Length Here, you specify the length of the sketch drawing as relative value related to the shape length. The rest will only be displayed as center line.

Detailing Style


Objects These component parts are displayed as intelligent 2D-objects. At this method, however, the hidden edges are only displayed correctly in relation to the corresponding part. Hidden edges, which are created due to other components, cannot be calculated. This method is suitable if you want to attach position flags later. By means of shape characteristics, it is also possible to indicate individual depictions per component part if an exact display of hidden edges is not so important e.g. in overviews for discussions.

System Lines Only the center lines of shapes are displayed as static system, plates and similar component parts are not displayed.

Anchoring An anchor plan with alternatively two different scales is generated. Display of the base plates can thus be depicted in an enlarged display.

> With Supports In addition to the anchor details, the supports are also displayed as cross-section.

> As Object The supports in the anchor plan are displayed as intelligent 2D-Objects.

> Details 1: Here, you enter the scale of base plate details in the anchor plan. However, an anchor plan can only be generated if you have linked the view “Anchor Plan” in the component parts list with this style setting.

Group Visual Depth

View Frame The visual depths assigned to the work frames are used for views.

Dialog Default The visual depths specified in this dialog are used for views.

> Front/Back Enter the visual depths Front and Back, which have to be used for the views.

Max. Distance Enter the maximum distance another work frame is allowed to be removed from the current view to be interpreted there as construction axis for axis display and dimensioning.

Detailing Style


Dialog-Commands

FILTER

By clicking on this button, you can define a filter of your own from other parts properties apart from the previously defined filters of the group Part Filter. Then, a dialog opens for entering the filter condition.

Description... The shape description can be used as filter criterion. The

terms available for selection are displayed in the list.

Part Family The part family can be used as filter criterion. The part families available for selection are displayed in the list.

Include The part is displayed if it corresponds to another type in the second list (logical OR).

Exclude The part is not displayed if it corresponds to another type in the second list (neg. OR).

When you click on this button, the selected entry of the first list will be adopted in the second list.

When you click on this button, the selected entry in the second list will be removed again from this list.

Detailing Style


Construction Axes in Overviews The figure below shows the connections between current view and construction axes. In the current view (gray) work area 1 and the construction axes A, B and C would be displayed. The corresponding work frames contain the information about axis description and text display. As, however, the construction axis C is situated outside the displayed construction, it could be hidden with the “Axes only within” option. The axes of the small work area 2 would only be displayed if the smallest distance of the corresponding relevant work frame was smaller than the preset value of ‘Max. Distance’ for the visual depth. If different values have been indicated for the left and right axis description, the value is used which is next to the current view.

Detailing Style


Connection Details and Cranked Views or Cuts In addition to standard views on work areas, ProSteel 3D can also generate cranked views and detail point overviews (connection details). The kind of view is determined by the kind of work area defining the view. If a depth has been indicated for the work area, it is a matter of detail point overview allowing you to display several views on this area simultaneously (front view, plan view, etc.). Detailing is effected like that of a standard overview, i.e. all parts are exported as AutoCAD lines and dimensioned according to the settings for overviews. If a cranked cut has been inserted, you can display a cut though the model which is situated in different levels. You can hide undesired sections or refrain from an additional view. Depending on the position of the cutting line, the parts are cut or displayed as view.

The neighboring figure shows you the different variants: The standard front view shows the supports 1, 2 and 3 as view unless the visual depth of the work area reaches up to support 4. The cranked view only shows the supports 1 and 4 in the area of the indicated visual depth. If there were parts on the thick, black cutting line, they would be displayed as cut.

The detail point overview shows the construction 5 in the selected views (here front view and view from the right), the cutting depth results from the corresponding 3rd dimension of the cube.

Detailing Style


The result of detailing process is displayed in the following figure. The display of dimensions, position flags, etc. depends on the selected detailing style:

Detailing Style


Dialog Tab Line Display

Group Colour and Line Type

Definition Here, you select the source of the definitions for the display of Line Type. It describes the line type and the colour of the lines of a component part in the 2D-depiction. Detailing Style – The definitions result from the settings on this page. Configuration – The definitions result from the configuration file of ProSteel 3D. From File – The definitions result from a separate definition file.

Colour Enter here, which colour has to be used for the three kinds of lines of the component part (visible, invisible and center line). Use the AutoCAD-colour numbers for this.

Line Type Enter here, which line type, has to be used for the three kinds of lines of the component part (visible, invisible and center line).

Dialog-Commands

CHOOSE COLOUR

When you click on this button, the AutoCAD standard dialog for colour selection opens where you can choose the colour number graphically.

Dialog Tab Line Display Center Line

Detailing Style


Group Generalities:

Center Line The center lines are displayed for the parts selected on this dialog tab.

Offset: Here, you set the extension value by which the center line is extended beyond both shape ends.

Group Special Shapes

Special Shapes Center lines for special shapes are displayed.

Roof-Wall Center lines for roof-wall-shapes are displayed.

Combi Shapes Center lines for combi shapes are displayed.

Welded Shapes Center lines for welded shapes are displayed.

Group Others

Shape List By checking in the list you choose for which one of the different types of standard shapes the centerlines have to be displayed.

Detailing Style


Dialog Tab Drill Holes

Group Hole Axes

In View A hole view will display the axis.

> Projection Enter the extension of the axis beyond the outside edges of the shape.

In Plan View A plan view on the hole will display the two axes (horizontal and vertical).

> Projection Enter the extension of the axis beyond the hole display.

> Rotate by 45° The two axes lines are rotated by 45° to prevent dimension line overlaps.

Group Hole Display

Hidden... The hidden (invisible) holes are displayed using a dotted line in plan view. Otherwise, only the axes are displayed if these are chosen for display. However, if you selected 'Old Standard' the axes are always displayed.

Detailing Style


Real Holes The holes are depicted according to their diameter as either circular holes or hidden edges. Otherwise, only the axes are displayed if these are chosen for display.

> Filled The hole displayed is completely filled.

Old Standard The holes are depicted in a plan view with the former DIN steel construction symbol specifying the diameter.

> Symbol Size The symbol size according to old standard.

Detailing Style


D.2.5 Dimensioning

Here, you can indicate all of the settings for the dimensioning of the components. Since this is a rather complex area, the settings are distributed among several subordinate dialogs within this main group. In addition, you will find completing dialog boxes which can be opened from the different pages.

Dialog Tab Generalities

Group Dim Chains

Normal Customary relative dimension chains are attached.

Coordinates Dimension chains are attached with continuous dimensioning to a reference point (coordinate dimensioning).

Both Relative dimension chains and – here included – the corresponding coordinate dimensions are attached at the same time. You have the option to exclude certain parts of construction groups from coordinate dimensioning.

Associative The dimensioning is created as really associative dimensioning without text overwriting as far as possible. In case of manual manipulations dimensioning is automatically adapted to the measured values.

Detailing Style


Optimization The program will position the dimensioning texts in a better way according to the settings on the page ‘Optimization’. Optimization can be switched off later if you want to displace the dimensions manually according to another method or if you do not expect overlaps. You will then obtain the dimensions on the position where AutoCAD would place them as default position.

Complete (hor.) Always complete dimension chains lengthways to the component part are built. The missing dimensions are added to the overall length.

Complete (vert.) Always complete dimension chains transversely to the component part are built. The missing dimensions are added to the overall width.

Divide At hole dimensioning each individual hole diameter gets its own dimension chain. The dimensioned hole diameter then is indicated on the dimension line.

Coord. Extra Only one common coordinate dimension chain is attached per dimension chain block ((above, below, left or right of the part).

Weld Cracks Small welding cracks will be assigned their own dimensioning line. This is a minor option if ‘Divide Hole Rows’ has been selected because here a distinction is made between diameters anyway.

Diameter... At hole dimensioning the hole diameter is indicated on the dimension construction line. This is a minor option if ‘Divide Hole Rows’ has been selected because the hole diameter is indicated on the dimension line.

Label The things located by dimension chain (stiffeners, holes, etc.) are written as text to the dimension line.

> Text Size The text height of the dimension chain labels (mm).

Length of Construction Lines The construction lines have exactly the length specified in the input field 'Distance Construction Line'. If this field has not been checked, the dimension chains are cut at each other with the distance specified in the input field 'Length Construction Line'.

Detailing Style


Group Standard Dimensioning Style and Coordinate Style

Selection List Here you can select the dimensioning style (AutoCAD) to be used for the dimensioning in question. This style is going to control all properties such as text colour, text size, etc. For radii and angles the corresponding subordinate style of an AutoCAD dimensioning style can additionally be used.

Variant 1 / 2 Here, you can indicate two alternative styles to be assigned as style variant to different dimension chains. If you have selected the entry ‚Auto Smaller', a copy with smaller text sizes (factor 0.7) is generated from the basic style. If you have selected the entry ‚Auto Larger', a copy with larger text sizes (factor 1.4) is generated from the basic style. Style variants allow you e.g. to emphasize overall dimensions or to use smaller texts when space is limited.

Group Distances

Min. Distance Here, you enter the smallest distance to be dimensioned. If this distance is smaller than the value, it is added to the next dimension.

First Dim. Chain Here, you enter the distance from the outer limit of the component up to the 1st dimension line. If you selected the option ‘First Position Flags’ in the FLAGS dialog tab, this field contains the distance from the outermost position flag.

Between Dim.... Here, you enter the distance between the individual dimension lines.

Dim. Construction Line Here, you enter the length of the dimension construction lines, if you selected ’Fixed Construction Line Length’. Otherwise, enter the distance from the start of the construction line up to the previous dimension chain. In this case, entering the value 0 will not cut the construction lines at the previous dimension chain but they are extended to the point to be dimensioned.

Detailing Style


Drill Holes Dialog Tab

Group Holes in Plan View

Long. Direction Drill holes appearing in plan view (vertical drill holes) are dimensioned lengthwise of the component part. Vertical drill holes mean the drill holes you see as plan view when looking at the hole (“vertical to the screen”).

Transv. Direction Drill holes appearing in plan view (vertical drill holes) are dimensioned crosswise of the component part. Vertical drill holes mean the drill holes you see as plan view when looking at the hole (“vertical to the screen”).

> Hole Groups New dimension chains within the component part are created in case of modified transversal distances. Otherwise, a common dimension chain is positioned beside the component part. The dimensions of the first and last hole group, however, are drawn to the outside if they are near enough at the end of the component part.

> Axes Common axis lines are displayed within the hole groups if the ‘Divide Hole Groups’ setting has been checked.

> No at outside The dimensions of the first and last hole group are not drawn to the outside at ‘Divide Hole Groups’ setting. They are also positioned near by the hole group. This setting is e.g. reasonable if apart from the component part additional dimensions for secondary parts of component groups are to be expected.

Detailing Style


> As Back Pitch Symmetric hole distances around the center line are summed up to a common measure.

Only Visible Only those holes are dimensioned which are visible in the corresponding view. At a plan view for example, the holes of the shape’s bottom flange are not dimensioned unless they were visible due to gaps in the upper flange.

Individual Flange The drill holes of upper and bottom flange are dimensioned in an individual dimension chain each unless excluded from dimensioning by ‘Only Visible Holes’ command.

Diameter The hole diameter is written beside the hole groups. If the value does not change, the diameter is only indicated once per hole line or complete hole group.

> Text Size Enter the text size for diameter labeling.

> Distance Here, you can indicate the distance of diameter labeling from the edge of the hole. Positive values signify a labeling on the right above the center, negative values signify a labeling on the right below the center.

New Dimensions Here, you enter the distance from one hole group resp. drill hole dimensioning to the other at which a new (redundant) dimensioning has to be carried out. This permits a clearer dimensioning of far away positioned identical hole screen dimensions as the dimension chains resp. the indications of diameters are repeated.

Group Holes in View

Long. Direction Drill holes in view direction (parallel drill holes) are dimensioned lengthwise of the component part. Parallel drill holes mean the drill holes you see as view when looking at the hole (“parallel to the screen”).

As Back Pitch You enter the back pitches including the diameter of the parallel drill holes. Continous constant back pitches are displayed as a group.

> Marking Beginning and end of a group are displayed by a marking.

> Text Size Here, you enter the text size for back pitch labeling.

Detailing Style


> Distance Here, you can indicate the distance of back pitch labeling from the edge of the component part. Positive values signify a labeling outside the component part, negative values signify a labeling inside the component part.

New Dimensions Here, you enter the distance from one back pitch to the other at which a new (redundant) dimensioning has to be carried out. This permits a clearer dimensioning of far away positioned identical back pitches as the indications are repeated.

Dialog Tab Single Parts

Group Generalities

Coord. Transv. Coordinate dimensioning is also displayed in transversal direction of the component part (e.g. at hole groups).

Reference Point The dimensioning of drill holes is related to the reference point of the component part. Otherwise, it is related to the outside edges.

Style Variants In the list, you can see to which dimension chains the style ‘Variant 1’ or ‘Variant 2’ has been assigned by means of the variants. LIN-2 signifies e.g. that variant 2 has been selected for normal (linear) dimensioning.

Detailing Style


Group Dimension Chains

Length The length of the single part is dimensioned.

Width/Height The width or height of the single part is dimensioned (depending on the view).

Outer Contour Copes or other outside polycuts of the single part are dimensioned.

Inner Contour Inside polycuts of the component part are dimensioned (e.g. penetrations.

Radius Circle radii of component contours are dimensioned. If defined, the subordinate radius style of the selected AutoCAD dimensioning style is used.

> Center The center points of radii are checked and dimensioned in a separate linear dimension chain.

Cut Angle All angles are dimensioned which were created by line cuts or polycuts. If defined, the subordinate angle style of the selected AutoCAD dimensioning style is used.

Group Miscellaneous

Distance System The distances of the ends of the component parts are dimensioned related to the system points of the construction (these are the theoretical intersection points between the center axes of connected shape and the corresponding support shapes).

Gradient Measures of angle as triangle with indication of length and reference height instead of usual angle measures if US-dimensioning is used.

US-Cope Copes at the ends of the component parts are indicated with length and depth if US-dimensioning is used.

Detailing Style


Dialog-Commands

STYLE VARIANTS

Click on this button to open the dialog for the style variants. You can then assign a different style variant to the individual dimension chains. This subordinate dialog can also be accessed via the dimension settings for groups or views. Here, you can assign a style variant to (almost) any dimension chain, separately for standard linear dimensioning as well as the coordinate dimensioning.

List Int he List, you click on the desired dimension chain to which

you want to assign a style variant.

Variant 1/2: Here, you assign a style variant to the selected dimension chain. If you click e.g. on variant 1, the dimension chain receives the style defined by you in the basic dialog for the variant 1.

Standard The allocation of a style variant is cancelled and the dimension chain is displayed with the basic dimensioning style.

The allocation of style variants shows a more clearly structured dimensioning. Outer dimensions can be emphasized with larger text or different dimension ranges can be colored. You could also use dimension chains with tolerance specifications for hole dimensions or, in case you anticipate many “tight” dimensions, you could also work with smaller text. There are many ways to use this option to your advantage. If you want to vary only the text sizes, you can also use the setting “Auto” because this will automatically adjust the necessary text sizes (factor 0.7 or 1.4). If you would also like to change colors or select other text sizes, you have to select a different AutoCAD dimensioning style.

Detailing Style


Dialog Tab Groups

Group Generalities

Complete (hor.) All dimension chains are completed lengthways to the overall length of the group.

Complete (vert.) All dimension chains are completed crossways to the overall width of the group.

Flat Steel as... Flats (e.g. fishplates) are included in the dimension chains of the poly-plates and not dimensioned as shape.

Reference Point The dimensioning of subordinate parts is related to the reference point of the main part. Otherwise, it is related to the outside edges of the main part.



Length The overall length of the group is dimensioned.

Width/Height The overall width or height of the group is dimensioned.

System The distances between the group and the system points of the construction are dimensioned.

Diagonals Diagonal shapes are dimensioned over the longest length.

Detailing Style


> System The distances related to the system points of the diagonal are dimensioned additionally.

> Total Measure The distance from one system point to the other is dimensioned.

Manual Dim... The dimensioning points manually attached in the model are dimensioned as well according to their default settings.

Group Main/Subparts

Main Part In addition, the main part is dimensioned with the most important dimensions like a single part.

Coordinates The main part is dimensioned with coordinate measures if you define to dimension it like a single part of the group. Thus, you can limit coordinate dimensioning only to the weld measures of the subparts in case of mixed dimensioning of main and subparts.

Subparts The position of subparts is dimensioned.

> Dimension 1x If several views of the group are displayed, subparts are only dimensioned 1x per dimension in the most suitable view. Otherwise, the subparts are dimensioned redundantly in each view.

> Repeat Within this view, identical part dimensions are dimensioned only once in transversal direction. Otherwise, each subpart is again dimensioned redundantly.

> Coordinates Coordinate dimensioning of subparts is also attached in transversal direction if they are dimensioned with coordinate measures.

Main Part First The inner dimension chains of the construction group view are the dimension chains of the main part; otherwise the dimension chains of the subpart.

Group Miscellaneous

Connected Shape The system points of the connected shapes are dimensioned and the dimensioning of subpart or mainpart shape holes is related to this dimensioning.

> Reference Point The reference points of the connected shapes are used to determine the system points; otherwise, the center axis is used.

> Coordinates The connected shapes are additionally dimensioned with coordinate dimensioning.

Detailing Style


> Search Area Here, you can specify the maximum distance up to which a hole in the subpart/main part is assigned to the corresponding system point of the connected shapes.

Dialog Tab Groups Reference Points

Group Shapes

No dimension The position of the shapes in a group is not dimensioned.

Outer Edge The position of the shapes is dimensioned on the base of their outer edges.

Shape Center The position of the shapes is dimensioned on the base of the geometrical shape center (center axis).

Drill Holes The position of the shapes is dimensioned on the base of their drill holes, if existing. Otherwise, dimensioning is based on the outer edges.

Outer Edge/Hole The position of the shapes is dimensioned in a common dimension chain on the base of their outer edges and drill holes.

One Hole If the option Dimensioning on Hole or Dimensioning on Outer Edge/Hole is activated, the shape is only dimensioned on the base of the drill hole, which is situated extremely outside.

One Edge If the option Dimensioning on Outer Edge or Dimensioning on Outer Edge/Hole is activated, the shape is only dimensioned on the base of the edge that is situated at the very front.

Detailing Style


One Dim. Chain The length dimension chains of shapes are summed up to a common dimension chain, if they are situated on different sides of the part.

Coordinates The shapes are dimensioned with coordinate measures. Thus, you can exclude certain parts from coordinate dimensioning in case of mixed dimensioning.

Input Field Here, you can indicate the position of the generated dimension chain related to the other subpart dimension chains if these are situated on the same side of the part.

Group Polyplates

Settings All settings correspond to those described under shapes. Thus, they haven’t to be mentioned in detail once again. Here, you define the behaviour of the dimensioning for all polyplates existing in the construction (e.g. gusset plates) apart from the stiffeners. Please note that a separation of the stiffeners from other plates is only possible if these have been created using the stiffener command or as selection of additional component parts when creating plate connections.

Group Stiffeners

No dimension The position of the stiffeners in the group is not dimensioned.

Stiffener Center The position of the stiffeners is dimensioned on the base of the geometrical stiffener center.

Outer Edge The position of the stiffeners is dimensioned on the base of their outer edges.

One Edge If the option Dimensioning on Outer Edge is activated, the stiffener is only dimensioned on the base of the edge which is situated at the very front.

Coordinates The stiffeners are dimensioned with coordinate measures. Thus, you can exclude certain parts from coordinate dimensioning in case of mixed dimensioning.

Input Field Here, you can indicate the position of the generated dimension chain related to the other subpart dimension chains if these are situated on the same side of the part.

Group End Plates

Please note that a separation of the end and base plates from the other shapes is only possible if these have been created using the corresponding commands.

Detailing Style


No Dimension The position of the end plates in the group is not dimensioned.

Outer Edge The position of the end plates is dimensioned on the base of their outer edges.

Drill Holes The position of the end plates is dimensioned on the base of their drill holes, if existing. Otherwise, dimensioning is based on the outer edges.

Bent... The bent or folded end plate details are dimensioned as well like a single part.

One Dim. Chain The length dimension chains of end plates are summed up to a common dimension chain, if they are situated on different sides of the part.

Coordinates The end plates are dimensioned with coordinate measures. You can exclude certain parts from coordinate dimensioning in case of mixed dimensioning.

Group Miscellaneous

ORDER Click on this button to apply the order of the dimension chains indicated in the input fields. It is not possible to use the same order number several times.

Detailing Style


Dialog Tab Groups Cut

Please note that the dimensioning settings of subparts also influence the dimensioning of cuts. If e.g. the dimensioning of polyplates has been deactivated, no dimensioning will be effected in the cut, too.

Dimension Automatic 2D-cuts are dimensioned.

No Poly... Polyplates of cuts are not dimensioned even if they are activated in general.

No Stiffeners Stiffeners of cuts are not dimensioned even if they are activated in general.

Reference Point Dimensioning of cuts is related to the reference point of the main part.

Coordinates The values of cuts are dimensioned with coordinate measures if ‘Both’ has been selected for the dimension chain type. Thus, you can exclude the cuts from coordinate dimensioning in case of mixed dimensioning.

Reference Points In the shape properties, you can assign so-called reference points or axes to a shape. After insertion, they first are identical with the insertion axis of the component part. This permits you to force dimensioning on a specified reference to allow e.g. to relate all important hole dimensions symmetrically to the center axis or to “Upper Edge Steel” for plateform girders. In overviews, the most important dimensions of the construction are also directly displayed by means of these reference points. Since these reference points can

Detailing Style


be modified later, a shape can for example be inserted on its center line in the grid, dimensioning, however, can nevertheless be related to the upper edge of the shape.

System Points The system points here are the theoretical intersection points of the center lines of a shape and the shape to which it is connected. A logical link has to be activated between these component parts, which is the case in the most construction situations (such a link is e.g. also generated by the cut at welded diagonals of a roof truss). If a logical link doesn’t exist, a dependence can be defined later via a “manual link”.

Dialog Tab Views

Group Generalities

Collect... Similar dimension chains in horizontal and vertical direction are collected in one common dimension chain (e.g. all horizontal shapes and vertically dimensioned cross-sections). Even dimension chains situated on different sides are collected in one common dimension chain.

Elevation At coordinate measures in vertical direction, the reference height for Z=0 indicated in the settings of the Detail Center will be applied.

Detailing Style


To constr. Axes The dimensioning of component parts is related to the construction axes (work area views) running next to the parts. Axes display has to be activated in the label settings.

Only Hole At anchor plans, dimensioning of the base plate holes is only related to their drill holes and not additionally to the center of the base plate.

Min. Shape Length Here, you enter the minimum length of the component part from which the parts are dimensioned, if these are visible in one of the complete views. Parts, which are smaller than the indicated value, are not taken into account.

Min. Cross-section Here, you enter the minimum dimensions of the component part from which on the parts are still dimensioned, if these are visible as cross-section. Parts, which are smaller than the indicated value, are not taken into account.



Total Dimensions: The overall length and width or height of the view is dimensioned. Any possible construction axes situated outside will be taken into consideration at calculation of dimensions.

Construction Axes The existing construction axes (work frame axes) of the view are dimensioned. Axes display has to be activated in the label settings.

Outer Edge... The outside dimensions of the steel construction are dimensioned and related to the possibly existing outer construction axes.

Diagonals Diagonal shapes are dimensioned over the longest length.

> System The distances related to the system points of the diagonal will be dimensioned additionally.

> Overall Dimension The distance from one system point to the other will be dimensioned.

Manual Dim... The dimensioning points manually attached in the model are dimensioned as well according to their default settings.

Detailing Style


Group Filter Overall Dimension

Here, you have the possibility to exclude certain parts from the calculation of overall dimensions to prevent it from increasing e.g. by the projection of base plates.

Endplate hor... End and base plates in horizontal direction (width) are not taken into consideration.

Endplate ver... End and base plates in vertical direction (height) are not taken into consideration.

Polyplates hor... Polyplates and stiffeners in horizontal direction are not taken into consideration.

Polyplates ver... Polyplates and stiffeners in vertical direction are not taken into consideration.

Opposite Type hor... The shape type opposite to the view (i.e. at views the shapes in cross-section display and at plan view the shapes in view display) in horizontal direction is not taken into consideration.

Opposite Type ver... The shape type opposite to the view (i.e. at views the shapes in cross-section display and at plan view the shapes in view display) in vertical direction is not taken into consideration.

Detailing Style


Dialog Tab Views Reference Points

Group Supports

No Dimension The position of vertical shapes is not dimensioned in horizontal direction.

Outer Edge The position of vertical shapes is dimensioned on the base of their outer edges in horizontal direction.

Shape Center The position of vertical shapes is dimensioned on the base of their center axis in horizontal direction.

Edge/Center The position of vertical shapes is dimensioned in two separate dimension chains in horizontal direction, one on the base of their outer edges and the other on the base of their center axes.

Reference Point The position of vertical shapes is dimensioned on the base of their reference axis in horizontal direction.

Coordinates The vertical shapes are additionally dimensioned with coordinate measures in horizontal direction. Thus, you can exclude certain parts from coordinate dimensioning in case of mixed dimensioning.

Group Cross-Girders

No Dimension The position of horizontal shapes is not dimensioned in vertical direction.

Outer Edge The position of horizontal shapes is dimensioned on the base of their outer edges in vertical direction.

Detailing Style


Shape Center The position of horizontal shapes is dimensioned on the base of their center axis in vertical direction.

Edge/Center The position of horizontal shapes is dimensioned in two separate dimension chains in vertical direction, one on the base of their outer edges and the other on the base of their center axes.

Reference Point The position of horizontal shapes is dimensioned on the base of their reference axis in vertical direction.

Upper Edge The position of horizontal shapes is dimensioned on the base of the upper edge of the shape in vertical direction.

Coordinates The horizontal shapes are additionally dimensioned with coordinate measures in vertical direction. Thus, you can exclude certain parts from coordinate dimensioning in case of mixed dimensioning.

Group Cross-Sections (horizontal)

These are the shapes which are visible as cross-section in the view and which are dimensioned in horizontal direction.

Settings All settings correspond to those of the supports. Thus, they don’t have to be mentioned in detail.

Group Cross-Sections (vertical)

These are the shapes which are visible as cross-section in the view and which are dimensioned in vertical direction.

Settings All settings correspond to those of the cross-girders. Thus, they don’t have to be mentioned in detail.

Detailing Style


In the following figure, you will see an example for dimensioning a view including construction axes display. The first dimension chain from the top is showing the dimensioning of the shapes related to the construction axes. The second dimension chain is showing the dimensioning of the construction axes and the third is showing the dimensioning of outer edge steel (2600). The overall dimension (3000) is measured over the outside axes. The construction axes 1 and 3 could be hidden in the overviews settings and would not be dimensioned in this case.

Detailing Style


Dialog Tab Optimization

Group Text Position

No Alternating The text remains on its original height on the dimension line and is only optimized according to the other default settings.

Only Above The text is moved only above the neighboring text so that they overlap horizontally, but not vertically.

Alternate The text is moved above and below the dimension line so that they overlap horizontally, but not vertically.

Along Constr. Lines The text is moved across the construction lines if it does not fit in between above the dimension line (even if otherwise not colliding with any other neighboring dimension).

Avoid Text between... The text is supposed to be colliding and optimized if it does not fit in between above and below the dimension line (even if otherwise not colliding with any other neighboring dimension).

Outer Dimensions The two outer dimensions are moved beside the dimension line in horizontal direction.

Inner Dimensions The inner dimension texts are moved beside the dimension line in horizontal direction and inside of a neighboring dimension if the required space exists.

Detailing Style


Group Build Groups

Identical Dimensions Several consecutive identical distances are combined into one shared dimension. E.g. 3 dimensions à 100 are combined into one dimension with the dimension text 3x100.

Min. Number Here, you specify the number of identical dimensions from which on they are combined in a group.

Similar Dimensions Dimension chains containing few dimensions (e.g. one single drill hole) are integrated into another dimension chain. It may be that something different has been dimensioned this other dimension chain (e.g. outer contour). The overall dimensions are excluded from this.

Max. Number Here, you specify from which number of dimensions on a dimension chain doesn’t have to be mixed with another one.

Group Text Display

No Inch The inch signs are suppressed at dimensioning in the imperial system (inch/foot).

Text Size A dimension chain is automatically changed to the dimensioning style variant 1 Auto smaller (x0.7), if thus collisions can be avoided. If the dimension chain has already this style variant, no modification takes place. If a dimensioning style has been explicitely assigned to style variant 1, this style will be used instead (even if it wouldn’t have such a favourable text height – which might be).

Rotate Coord. The dimensioning style for coordinate measures is changed to get a dimensioning which can be optimized with each other and related to the linear measures (e.g. rotation by 90°). Otherwise, the AutoCAD-setting is used and a special optimization cannot be carried out.

Detailing Style


Dialog Tab Optimize Distances

Group Distances

Min. Distance Here, you enter a value indicating how close together dimension texts within a dimension chain may be without triggering the collision alarm.

Between... Here, you enter a value indicating how close together dimension texts of different dimension chains may be without triggering the collision alarm.

Edge Distance Here, you enter a minimum distance between the dimensioning of the hole group or subpart and the end of the component part which is admissible before it is moved outside.

Max. Together Here, you enter the maximum distance up to which subpart dimension chains in transversal direction at groups are combined to one single dimension chain.

Group Diagonals

Angle Here you enter the minimum and maximum angle the shape must resp. is allowed to have towards main dimensioning direction to be recognized as diagonal. This option permits you to prevent that e.g. a roof girder is dimensioned as diagonal.

Min. Length Here, you enter the minimum length the shape must have to be recognized as diagonal.

Detailing Style


Flat Steel Shapes of flat steel are not recognized as diagonal and excluded from diagonal dimensioning. You can thus prevent that e.g. a top chord of a haunch is dimensioned as diagonal.

The picture below shows the different optimization settings for dimension chains:

Detailing Style


D.2.6 Label Settings

Use this dialog tab to specify if and what type of position flag or welding symbol to attach to the construction parts. In addition, you indicate how the details and views have to be labeled.

Dialog Tab Position Flags

Group Generalities

Flag First The position flags are attached before part dimensioning so that they are near the part.

Only 1st View In case of several partial views of a detail, the position flags are only attached to the first view (except for possible 2D cuts and folded end plates).

Also Cuts Position flags are also attached to all 2D-cuts.

No Cross-Section Position flags are not attached to component parts, which are visible as cross-sections in the view.

Plate in View A position flag is also attached to polyplates and stiffeners in model-views (overviews).

Alignment Here, you select the aligment of the position flags in the detail drawing. Horizontal - all position flags are aligned horizontally.

Detailing Style


Group Position Flags

Main Parts A position flag is attached to the main parts of construction groups.

Subparts A position flag is attached to the subparts of construction groups.

Single Parts A position flag is attached to the component parts not belonging to a group.

Bolts A position flag is attached to the bolts of a construction group.

Template Here, you select the template for automatic distribution of position flags. The template controls what has to be displayed in the individual position flags, how the flag is structured and according to which criteria the distribution in the detail or in the view is effected. You create a distribution template in the positioning command and only load it here.

Dialog Tab Welding Symbols

Group Generalities

End Plates The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed in single parts views for base and endplates, if the connection shape is shown, too.

Groups The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed in group views.

Detailing Style


> Folded... The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed in-group views for folded end plates.

Group Welding Symbols

Template Here, you select the template for automatic distribution of welding symbols. The template controls what has to be displayed in the individual welding symbols, how the flag is structured and according to which criteria the distribution in the detail or in the view is effected. You create a distribution template in the positioning command and only load it here.

Dialog Tab Additional Texts

Group Detail Labeling

Partial View The name of the partial view is displayed.

Scale The detailing scale is displayed. If you have selected ‘Partial View’ and ‘Scale’, both are used to create an entry in the form of "Front View (M1: 10)".

Number The total quantity of component parts in the model is displayed. Of course the quantity of parts is only valid after previous positioning.

Name The name of the component part or view is displayed.

Detailing Style


Shape Length The length of the component part is displayed.

Material The Material designation of the component part is displayed. If you have simultaneously checked ‘Shape Name', 'Shape Length' and ‘Material' , all are used to create an entry in the form of "HE 200 B...7800 RST-37-2".

Modification The modification status of the component part is displayed.

Position No. The position number of the component part is displayed.

> Prefix Here, you specify which text has to be positioned in front of the position number.

Shipping No. The shipping number of the component part is displayed.

Note Comments are displayed, which have been assigned to the part e.g. with "Change Properties".

Text Style In the selection list, you choose the text style (script) to be used for displaying the text entries.

Group Language

Standard The drawing is exclusively labeled in the original language of the program installation.

One Language The drawing is labeled in the language chosen as ‘First Language’ in the selection list.

Two Languages The drawing is labeled in the two languages chosen as ‘First Language’ and ‘Second Language’ in the selection list. The two terms are displayed separately, divided by oblique stroke, e.g. "Ansicht A / view A". The selection 'Standard' as language corresponds to the original language of the program installation.

The translation of the terms is based on a translation database with a translation 1:1. If the corresponding term is not defined there, the original language of the program installation is used instead. If there are identical terms at bi-lingual labeling, only one term will be displayed.

Group Text Sizes

Normal Text Here you enter the text size for the label.

Text Scale Here, you enter the text size for the position number, view and scale text.

Text at Shape Here, you enter the text size for the text label at shapes in overviews.

Detailing Style


Dialog Tab Additional Texts Views

Group Construction Axes

Display The axes descriptions of the work frames perpendicular toward the current view are displayed. Text sizes and display form are adopted from the work frame properties.

> Axis Line The actual axis is also displayed as 2D-line in the corresponding view.

> Only Inner Only those axes are displayed which are situated within the determined overall dimensions of the view including a snap range.

Length Here, you enter the relative length of the axis line in (%) related to the overall dimensions. Normally, the axis line is running towards the outer edges of the display (= 100%). If you enter a value bigger than 100, the lines will be extended over these edges. If you enter a value between 1 and 100, the line will only partly be displayed from the bottom resp. from the left, e.g. to hint only at it in views.

Text Distance Here, you enter the distance of axes label towards the last outer dimension chain.

Display beyond... Here, you enter a snap range up to which the axes situated outside the overall dimensions are still displayed.

Group Shape Label

Detailing Style


Display Component part name and material are written to the corresponding shape at overviews.

> End Plates Base and end plates are labeled as well.

> Flat Steel Shapes out of flat steel are labeled as well.

> Plane The relative position of the upper edge or front edge of the shape is added to the corresponding view plane unless being situated at the same level.

Text Default Here you can indicate an additional text for the elevation. The variable $(E) will be replaced by the current measured value. The text O.K.=$(E) will then e.g. be displayed as O.K.=+50.

Display of Relative Elevation Shape labels can only be attached if the variant ‘Sketch’ or ‘System Lines’ has been selected as display mode of the overview. The determined text is then entered in the shape properties ’Note 2’ of the displayed component part, unless the corresponding part in the model has a separate entry there. Otherwise, the entry is taken from the component part in the model and the variable $(E) possibly existing there will be replaced. You can define the label for each component part individually. If a text was neither indicated in the shape nor in the detailing style, only the measured value will be added.

Detailing Style


D.2.7 Example – Detailing of a Single Part

The picture below displays the example of detailing a single part with optimized settings. The example is based on the following main settings: Front and plan view are processed in one detail. The parallel holes are created with the ‘Separate Hole Tracks’ option. The ‘Separated Hole Tracks’ option is activated. The ‘Shape Shortening with Zigzag Double-Line’ option is activated. The ‘Combine Same Dimensions’ option is activated; min. = 3. Length and width were specified with the variant ‘Auto Larger (x1.4)’. The effects of the settings can be seen in this detail; no further revisions were required:

Detailing Style


DetailCenter Express


D.3 DetailCenter Express

The DetailCenter-Express! is an extension of the Detail Center to carry out recurring detailing tasks as fast as possible. In the actual Detail Center, you can make exact detailing settings and you can decide for each component part separately whether and how it has to be detailed and placed on drawings. On the other hand, the DetailCenter Express! works off the complete detailing according to a pre-set pattern. Start such a detailing pattern with the preparation of the model for detailing and complete it with clearance work functions after insertion of the 2D-details in the workshop plans. You can define the patterns for different tasks by means of templates and then carry out the detailing with a single mouse click. As you perhaps know already from the installation assistants of this and other programs, the DetailCenter Express! will guide you through the necessary settings for the detailing pattern. You only can start detailing after having made all necessary settings. For this purpose, the dialog offers you different pages one after the other which can vary depending on your default settings. In this manual, we can therefore only describe any possible pages in the order of their being displayed. It can, also be that one or more pages don’t exist due to your default settings.





D.3.1 Start the DetailCenter Express

The model has to be saved under a valid drawing name first to be able to work with the DetailCenter Express! Now click on the EXPRESS button in the component parts list of the DetailCenter or select the context menu. Here, you click on the entry DetailCenter Express! And the following dialog opens:

Click on this button to display the previous page.

Click on this button to display the following page.

Click on this button to start detailing. Detailing will be worked off according to your current settings. In the selection pages, you can watch in a display what is in process at the very moment.

It is true that you can work with AutoCAD or other applications during detailing process, depending on the computing capacity of your hardware. We recommend, refraining from this! After the DetailCenter Express! has completed its work, you are informed about it in an info box.





D.3.2 Selection Pages

In the following, you will find a description of the different possible selection pages. The pages are displayed in the main dialog box after having been selected with the buttons MORE and BACK. Each following page depends on your previous settings. If the previous settings are modified, you can ignore already filled in pages again. Nevertheless, the program will remember the specifications for later activation. Click on the PROCEED button with the mouse and you can start the process at any time you like, if your specifications are complete.

Starting Page This page is always displayed first. Here, you will set which tasks have to be done for you by the DetailCenter Express!

Prepare Here, you specify which corrections have to be made first

before style assignments and detailing will be started.

Single Parts Here, you can connect loose single parts and group parts with detail styles.

Groups Here, you can connect groups with detail styles.

Views Here, you can connect views of work fields as well as plan and top views and anchor plans with detail styles.



Detailing here, you can have the parts detailed as detail blocks.

Single Sheet Here, you can insert detailed detail blocks into workshop plans or activate the single sheet drawing output of details. If single sheet drawing has been selected, the parts will be detailed in any case. Detailing therefore has not to be activated extra.

Clean Up Here, you can set which corrections still have to be made after end of detailing.

To give you an example: If you want to put out all stiffeners and plates as well as the groups as DIN A-4 single sheet drawings, independent of already existing style assignments, select the following entries on the starting page: Prepare Detailing (to delete former assignments), Connect Single Parts with Detail Style, Connect Groups with Detail Style and Insert Detail Blocks/Single Sheet Drawings. There you will make the further settings. Please note that the DetailCenter Express! always works off the complete component parts list. The list is worked on as if you had transferred the complete model for detailing.

Prepare Detailing On this page, you will set which tasks have to be done before starting all further steps.



Cancel Write Protection Any existing markings are cancelled. Thus you can be sure that all component parts will be seized by the following actions, if desired.

Delete All detail styles, which have already been assigned before, will be separated from the parts. Thus you can be sure that a detail style will be assigned only to the component parts selected in the DetailCenter Express!.

Reset All modify flags set by the program will be reset to initialize the model.

Delete links all pointers referring to detailed or inserted detail blocks entered in the model drawing will be deleted.

Delete Blocks Former detail blocks in the detail library of the model will be deleted.

If all fields on this page have been checked, your model drawing will be completely initialized. It is the same as if a detailing never took place before. Depending on the time of application of the DetailCenter Express! it is, however, also reasonable to exclude some points.



Detail Style for Single Parts On this page, you make the default settings, which single parts have to be connected with which detail styles. Both group parts and parts without group are treated here. The same defaults are valid for automatic connections and for the manual connections in the component parts list of the Detail Center.

Selection Lists Here, you choose the desired detail style to assign to the

corresponding component part type. The parts can of course only be recognized as such if they were created, with the corresponding ProSteel 3D functions.

At style selection, you can differentiate between the detail styles currently existing in the model drawing and the detail styles saved on the hard drive. If you select a detail style from the hard drive (marked with a [HD:] put first, e.g. [HD:] plates), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace the style possibly existing in the drawing.



Detail Style for Groups On this page, you make the default settings, which groups have to be connected with which detail styles. Only the groups as such are used for assignment, but not the corresponding single parts (non-recursive connection). The same defaults are valid for automatic connections and for the manual connections in the component parts list of the Detail Center.


corresponding group type. The type depends on the main part of the group.

At style selection, you can differentiate between the detail styles currently existing in the model drawing and the detail styles saved on the hard drive. If you select a detail style from the hard drive (marked with a [HD:] put first, e.g. [HD:] supports), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace the style possibly existing in the drawing.



Detail Style for Views On this page, you make the default settings, which views on the model have to be connected with which detail styles. The same defaults are valid for automatic connections and for the manual connections in the component parts list of the Detail Center.


corresponding view.

At style selection, you can differentiate between the detail styles currently existing in the model drawing and the detail styles saved on the hard drive. If you select a detail style from the hard drive (marked with a [HD:] put first, e.g. [HD:]view), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace the style possibly existing in the drawing.



Detail Styles Additional Tasks On this page you make further settings, which have to be valid for the connection with detail styles for single parts, groups and overviews.

Part Family Single Part At the connection of single parts, the program first

uses the style of a part family assigned to this part. If there isn’t any part family assigned, or if this part family hasn’t a detail style of its own, the standard assignment will be used.

Part Family Group At the connection of groups, the program first uses the style of a part family assigned to this group. If there isn’t any part family assigned, or if this part family hasn’t a detail style of its own, the standard assignment will be used.

Assignment An already existing style assignment of the part will not be overwritten. A detail style is only assigned to parts without any detail style.



Work Out On this page, you make the default settings, how the component parts have to be worked out. If you choose the automatic single sheet output, you don’t have to make any additional settings here.

Position once Only one detail block is created of each position number,

divided into single parts and groups.

Overwrite Detail blocks of the same part existing in the detail library are overwritten.

Overviews Overviews are worked out if a detail style has been assigned to them.

Groups Groups are worked out as group drawing if a detail style has been assigned to them.

Main Parts The main parts of groups are worked out as single parts.

Sub Parts The subordinate parts of groups are worked out as single parts.

Single Parts All single parts not belonging to a group are worked out.



Insert Details On this page, you make the default settings, how the worked out detail blocks have to be inserted into the drawing. In addition to the actual insertion task, the DetailCenter Express! also permits to fill in the frame field of the drawing frame as well as to create a parts list. You can select the drawing frame etc. on the following pages.

Single Sheet A drawing will be created for each single detail block.

> Scale At single sheet output, the existing detail scale is adopted to the drawing sheet (the default setting of the detail style is ignored).

> Sheet Size At single sheet output, a suitable drawing frame is searched for the existing detail block.

Arrange several details are automatically arranged on a drawing sheet according to your default settings.

Groups Groups are worked out as group drawing if a detail style has been assigned to them.

Main Parts The main parts of groups are worked out as single parts.

Subordinate Parts The subordinate parts of groups are worked out as single parts.

Single Parts All single parts not belonging to a group are worked out .



Frame Field The frame field of the drawing frame is filled with the corresponding specifications.

Belonging to on the drawing frame, a list is created displaying the information about belonging of the parts (e.g. in which groups a certain single part is contained).

Parts List A parts list of the displayed details is created on the drawing frame (parts list related to the drawing).

Mark Numbering At insertion, the mark number is directly created according to the current setting in the Detail Center.

For more detailed information about the drawing frames and how to prepare them for output of frame field and parts lists, please refer to the chapter 'Automatic Single Sheet Output'.

Single Sheet Output...Generalities On this page, you make the further default settings for the automatic single sheet output. Depending on the selected output type (optimized scale or optimized size) certain fields are not accessible. For more detailed information about single sheet output of ProSteel 3D, please refer to the chapter 'Automatic Single Sheet Output’.

Don’t scale The parts are displayed without scale. The detail style settings

are ignored.



Different... Different drawing frames can be set for groups and poly plates.

Vertical Format Details in vertical format can be equipped with another frame.

Scale File The file is displayed which is the base for the drawing scales if the option ‘Optimized Scale’ has been selected.

Frame File The file is displayed which is the base for the drawing frame definitions.

Mark Number File The file is displayed which is the base for the definitions of US-mark number if the ‘Use US-mark numbering’ option has been selected.

Output Path The folder is displayed where the completed workshop drawings will be saved.

If you click on the small button on the right beside the corresponding display, you can modify the files and paths of the defaults.

Single Sheet Output...Drawing Borders On this page, you select the desired drawing border(s) for the single sheet output.

Selection Lists Here, you choose the desired frame type for the output. Only

the borders defined in the sheet pattern file will be displayed. It is always the standard frame which will be used unless there is an exception for the corresponding detail.



Fill Frame Field...Drawing Number On this page, you make the default settings for filling in the frame field including the generation of a drawing number. You can also pre-set under which file name the completed workshop plans have to be stored.

Model Data The order data for the frame field are transferred from the

drawing information table of the models. Otherwise, another page will be displayed where you can specify the most important order data.

Store Drawing Number The file name of the workshop drawing is identical with the drawing number in the frame field. Otherwise, the current position number is used at single sheet output or a describing name at compilations.

Drawing Count Here, you enter the page number for the drawing which has to be created next.

User Variable Here, you can enter any text you like which will be entered into your drawing number, depending on whether you make use of the corresponding variable or not.

Drawing Number Here, you can indicate another definition of the number if you temporarily want to modify the default of your sheet pattern file.

Template Here, the current definition of the drawing number of the sheet pattern file is displayed for your information.

Sheet Number Here, you see the current continuous number for your information.



The variables at the drawing number permit you a mixed structure of fixed and current values. Please refer to the chapter 'Automatic Single Sheet Output' for a description of the drawing number template and the used variables.

Fill Header...Entries On this page, you enter the order data for the fill header. 'Adopt Model Data’ option has to be deactivated. When some data have been entered in a field, the corresponding input in the drawing information – if existing – will be overwritten. If it is a blank field, the specification of the drawing information will be used.

Input Fields Here, you can enter the desired data. Then, they are inserted

into the frame field.



Clean Up Detailing On this page, you make the default settings, which tasks have to be done after end of detailing or style assignment.

Remove All detail styles, which are not connected with a detail, will be

removed from the model drawing. Copies on the hard drive are saved.

Delete views Entries existing of manual assignments in the view list of Detail Center will be deleted.

Detail Blocks All inserted detail blocks existing in the detail library will be deleted. If this field is not activated, the detail blocks e.g. of the single sheet output can still be used for other purposes.

Save The model drawing is saved after completion of the DetailCenter Express! Otherwise, you have to save it manually to avoid that the information about the worked out and inserted details will be lost.



D.3.3 Single Sheet Output

The automatic single sheet output permits to create an individual drawing for each detail to obtain e.g. a handy compilation of all bracing plates on DIN A-4 sheets or a compilation of documents. Two variants are offered which have only one difference in procedure. The first variant is the optimized scale. Here, the program decreases scale until the detail is completely displayed in the selected drawing border. Scale setting of detail style is ignored and a file with the available scales is used instead. This avoids use of scales which are not based on practical work or which are not customary in the corresponding workshop. The second variant is the optimized size. Here, the component part is worked out as usual with the scale of the corresponding detail style. Then, the smallest drawing frame will be specified where this part can be completely displayed. If the optimization cannot be carried out due to unfavourable defaults (e.g. a 1:10 scale overview on a DIN A-4 sheet), the best possible variant will be carried out nevertheless and the program hints to the fact that the detail doesn’t match completely.

Scale File If you selected the Optimized Scale option, the scale selection of the program is based on the entries in the scale file. You can thus create specific files for different customers and be sure that no other scales will be used at the output. In the DetailCenter Express! you can create specific defaults with different files for your customers. The file is a text file having the extension .scl, which can also contain some comments marked with a semicolon at the beginning of the line. The default file is in the subordinate folder of your ProSteel 3D installation.



Structure of a Scale File The desired scales are entered per line one after the other, a special order is not required. ; ProSteel 3D for AutoCAD - Scale Definition File ; -------------------------------------------------------- ; Customer: Messrs. XYZ, Hamburg 1:2.5 1:5 1:10 1:20 1:50 1:100

Sheet Pattern File If you select the drawing borders of the selection pages or the Optimized Size option, this selection is based on the entries in the sheet pattern file. You can create specific drawing borders and insertion definitions for different customers and be sure that no other frames will be used at the output. In the DetailCenter Express! you can create specific defaults with different files for your customers. The file is a text file having the extension .frm, which can also contain some comments marked with a semicolon at the beginning of the line. The default file is pro_st3d.frm in the subordinate folder of your ProSteel 3D installation. Structure of a Sheet Pattern File The file is divided into the areas header, frame field attributes and the actual frame definitions. All entries consist of a group name in pointed brackets and the data group of keyword, equals sign and the following data. [GROUP NAME] Keyword1=Data1 Keyword2=Data2 ...

You needn’t fill in entries, which are not required, or the complete entry can be omitted.



1) Header Area, Group Name [HEADER] You enter a short name under the keyword Name (for later program options) and a short file description under the keyword Description. The description will then be displayed in the selection page of the DetailCenter Express! 2) Frame Field Attributes, Group Name [TITLEBLOCK] Here, you specify which current program data will be transferred into which block attribute of the frame field at running time. You can thus even specify your own defined frame fields with your own attributes. For more detailed information about how to assign block attributes to blocks, please refer to your AutoCAD- documentation. You can assign block attributes to the following keywords. Depending on the settings in the DetailCenter Express! these are filled with the current values (Express) or with the drawing information of the model drawing. In addition, you can connect some of the properties of the corresponding detail with block attributes. This allows you e.g. to refrain from a position flag or detail labelling at single parts and thus to obtain more space for display. FileName complete path of the created 2D-drawing (Express). Customer client (Express). ProjectName project name of the model ProjectNumber project number of the model JobName order (Express) or order name of the model. JobNumber order number (Express) or number of order number of the model. DrawingName component part description with position number (Express) or drawing name of the model. DrawingNumber drawing number (Express) or drawing number of the model. DrawingPage sheet number (Express). DrawingIndex drawing index (Express) or drawing index of the model. DrawingScale scale (Express). DoneBy 'done by' (Express) or 'signed by' of the model. Date 'done on' (Express) or 'signed on' of the model. CheckedBy 'checked by' of the model. CheckedDate 'checked on' of the model. ClearedBy 'cleared by' of the model. ClearedDate 'cleared on' of the model. Specification 1-4 'LV Pos 1' etc. of the model. Note 1–4 'comment 1' etc. of the model DetailPosNumber position number of the detail DetailShipNumber shipping number of the detail DetailName designation of the detail DetailMaterial material designation of the detail DetailLength length of the detail DetailWeight total weight of the detail DetailCount total number of the detail DetailNote note field 1 and 2 of the detail DetailFamilyClass component part family name of the detail



3) Drawing Number Definition, Group Name [DRAWINGNUMBER] Here, you define according to which pattern the drawing number and the file name of the drawing have to be structured. You can mix fixed and variable parts and build the designations of variables as you like, (in order to avoid e.g. identical names with used terms). In the first two entries Drawing Number Template and Filename Template you indicate the definition, consisting of fixed values and the variable symbols which are mentioned in the following. You may use your own template for the file name if your drawing number has to contain signs, which mustn’t be used in a Windows-file name. If you don’t fill in the field 'Filename Template', the specified drawing number will be used instead as file name. DrawingNumberTemplate definition for the drawing number FileNameTemplate definition for the file name ProjectNumberSymbol variable for the project number JobNumberSymbol variable for the order number DrawingNumberSymbol variable for the drawing number of drawing information DrawingPageSymbol variable for the continuous sheet number DrawingIndexSymbol variable for the modification index DwgNumberCodeSymbol variable for the frame code of the frame definitions PositionNumberSymbol variable for the position number of the detail GroupPositionNumberSymbol variable for the position number of the parent group ObjectNameSymbol variable for the component part name ObjectTypeSymbol variable for the component part type YearSymbol variable for the current year MonthSymbol variable for the current month (numeric, 1-12) DaySymbol variable for the current day (numeric, 1-31) DrawingTypeSymbol variable for the drawing-type UserVarSymbol variable for the free text from the fill frame field dialog DefaultObjectType text for component part type, Others except the following types ColumnObjectType text for component part type, Support BeamObjectType text for component part type, Horizontal support StiffenerObjectType text for component part type, Stiffener WebAngleObjectType text for component part type, Web angle StandardPlateObjectType text for component part type, Poly-plate ConnectionPlateObjectType text for component part type, Head-plate BasePlateObjectType text for component part type, Base plate MainPartDrawingType text for drawing type, single part drawing for main part of group SubPartDrawingType text for drawing type, single part drawing for subordinate part of

group GroupDrawingType text for drawing type, group drawing SinglePartDrawingType text for drawing type, single part drawing without group OverviewDrawingType text for drawing type, overview drawing



If you want e.g. to obtain a drawing number containing your company’s name "ABC", the year, the drawing type "BG" for groups or "ET" for single parts as well as the position number (each one separated by points, such as e.g. ABC.2002.BG1000), you have to define the following fields. All other fields don’t have to be filled in. DrawingNumberTemplate=ABC.#J#.#DWG##POS# FileNameTemplate=ABC.#J#-#DWG##POS# ...(additionally because of the points) PositionNumberSymbol=#POS# YearSymbol=#J# DrawingTypeSymbol=#DWG# MainPartDrawingType=ET SubPartDrawingType=ET GroupDrawingType=BG SinglePartDrawingType=ET

As already mentioned before, you can define the designations of the variables, as you like. Of course it is recommended to use special symbols there, too for better identification or in order to avoid a wrong replacing of text. (#POS# instead of only POS). 4) Frame Definitions, Group Name [NAME1], [NAME2] etc. Here, you enter which drawing frames are used and specify the insertion areas of details and parts list. Each available frame obtains an own group. The group names then will be displayed in the selection lists of the DetailCenter Express! . Please note: The keywords Path, SizeX, SizeY and Area1 have to be assigned with current values; otherwise the frame will not be accepted for selection. Path complete path of drawing frame; if you enter a file name without path, the file will be expected in the subordinate folder of ProSteel 3D SizeX the dimensions of the drawing frame in X-direction SizeY the dimensions of the drawing frame in Y-direction Area1 the insertion area of details as 2D-points; specify the lower left and the upper right corner of the area in the format (x1,y1)-(x2,y2) DwgNumberCode the code of the drawing frame; this code can be adopted into the drawing number ListStyle the name of parts list definition for the drawing parts list ListInsertPoint insertion point for the drawing parts list as 2D-point enter this point in the format (x, y).



The following two entries describe the position of the point related to the list (on the left at the top, etc.). The list is extended according to this default. ListHorizontalStart description of the position of the parts list’s insertion point in horizontal direction; Enter left or right. ListVerticalStart description of the position of the parts list’s insertion point in vertical direction; Enter top or down. If you define your own frames, please note that the lower left point of the drawing frame has the world coordinates (0, 0) and that you store the drawing in top view on the frame. The positive X-axis is showing to the right, the positive Y-axis to the top. Enter the frame field as a block with the name of the drawing file (i.e. as block 'dina4', if the drawing frame has to be saved as 'dina4.dwg'. Insertion Areas of a Sheet Pattern File The following example once again shows you the most important specifications of a frame definition:



Drawing List At single sheet output, a drawing list is automatically created as text file (*.txt) and as DBASE-file (*.dbf). The file is saved in the ProSteel 3D detail folder under the drawing name of the model. You can see the position of the corresponding part and the file name of the created drawing in this file. The drawing number, scale (and whether it is suitable) and drawing frame are displayed as well. The data depend on the selected type of single sheet output. DetailCenter Express! drawing list ---------------------------------- Output date: 13.02.2001 Output path: d:\ps2000\detail Output mode: Best scale Job number: Model drawing: e:\dwg\halle.dwg 1.) created group drawings Pos |Scale |Max |Dwg-Number |Dwg-File ====|======|====|=============|========== 100 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A3-Bl.7 |BG100.dwg 101 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A3-Bl.23 |BG101.dwg 103 |1:15 | |DWG-A3-Bl.20 |BG103.dwg 104 |1:10 | |DWG-A3-Bl.4 |BG104.dwg 105 |1:15 | |DWG-A3-Bl.18 |BG105.dwg 2.) created single part drawings Pos |Scale |Max |Dwg-Number |Dwg-File ====|======|====|=============|========== 1 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A4-Bl.6 |Pos1.dwg 2 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A4-Bl.22 |Pos2.dwg 5 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.3 |Pos5.dwg 6 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A4-Bl.17 |Pos6.dwg 7 |1:5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.16 |Pos7.dwg 8 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.14 |Pos8.dwg 12 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.8 |Pos12.dwg 14 |1:5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.1 |Pos14.dwg 15 |1:2.5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.21 |Pos15.dwg 16 |1:2.5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.2 |Pos16.dwg

As you can see, the groups Pos 100 and 101 as well as the single parts Pos 1,2 and 6 don’t match the pre-set frame size. The scale 1:50 was the smallest scale pre-set in the scale list.



Automatic 2D-Cut


D.4 Automatic 2D-Cut

Command Name: PS_Add2DCut This function helps you to define 2D-cuts in components of the model. When detailing, these cuts can be displayed and dimensioned automatically as separate details. You may exactly define where cuts are required unless they had been inserted automatically during modelling (see ->'Stiffener' command). This function doesn't create the cut itself. You only define where, which direction and how deep a cut has to be displayed later. In contrast to the manual cuts which are inserted in a finished detail by means of the command->'Insert 2D-cut', here you have the advantage of automatic positioning and dimensioning of the cuts. They will be up-dated together with a drawing-update. Add Cut After having loaded the function, you first have to select the shape, where a cut is to be inserted. Then, you have to click a point on the cutting plane. The cutting plane will always run through this point perpendicular to the center line. Finally, you are asked for depth and direction of cut, which will be defined by clicking on another point. On one hand, you indicate the view direction of the cut and on the other hand, you determine its depth (this point will also be perpendicular to the center line). The resulting cutting planes will be displayed dynamically during selection for control reasons. The depth of the cut decides how much of the components situated behind the cutting plane is to be displayed.

Automatic 2D-Cut


Modification of Cut Cuts can be modified or deleted from Shape Properties.

Actual ... From: Here, you see the number of cuts existing in the shape as well

as the number of the current cut.

Active: If this field is checked, the cut will be taken into account during detailing. It is possible to exclude a cut without having to delete it.

Cut Depth: Here, the depth of the cut can be modified. Alternatively, this can be done by using the AutoCAD-grips on the cut-symbol which are displayed when the cut is selected.

Alignment: If the Shape direction field is checked, the cut is runs from the indicated cutting plane in shape direction. If the Opposite direction field is checked, the cut is runs from the indicated cutting plane opposite to the shape direction. Cutting plane always remains at the same position.

Automatic 2D-Cut


Click on this button to delete the selected cut from the shape.

This button exchanges insertion point and back limit point. The cut is displayed from the other side.

If you defined more than one cut, you can change to the next cut by using this button.

If you defined more than one cut, you can change to the previous cut by using this button.

Automatic 2D-Cut


Cranked 2D-View


D.5 Cranked 2D-View

Command name: PS_CRANKEDVIEW You can insert cranked views into the model if you require cuts and views through your models that are not situated on one plane. During detailing, they are treated like standard plane views; they show, different depths of the model simultaneously in one view and allow hiding of un wanted or less interesting areas. Example for a cranked view (here only as view): In the view, the supports A1, B1 and C2 are displayed.

Add Cut After starting this function, you first have to click on the start of polyline (intersection line) and then add the other points of the intersection line. Please pay attention that the line doesn't intersect nor that it is “running backwards”. In addition, the segments have to be perpendicular to each other. Otherwise, you don't obtain a satisfactory result. Terminate the entry by pressing the right mouse key if you do not want to add any further points. Now, you are prompted to specify the direction and depth of projection by clicking on another point (in relation to the start). All areas of the component parts, which are intersected by the polyline, are later displayed as cut – all areas which are situated within the intersection depth, are displayed as standard projection. Then, the following dialog appears which is also opened in case of modification of a cranked view via ProSteel 3D properties.

Cranked 2D-View


Name: The name of the cut.

Depth: Here you specify the projection depth of the view.

Height: Here you specify the height of projection of the view. All areas that are situated outside of this height are not displayed.

Colour: Here you specify the colour of intersection line.

3D-Display: The height of projection will be displayed as well so that you can check the coverage area.

Display Depth: The depth of projection will be displayed as well so that you can check the coverage area. Together with '3D-display' you obtain a three dimensional display of the cranked view.

The parts that are within the coverage of the cut are displayed. All other parts are hidden.

The hidden parts are displayed again.

North symbol


D.6 North symbol

Command name: PS_BENCHMARK This function allows you to add a benchmark to your model, which may be evaluated later in different ways. At the moment, US-benchmark-symbols are available to help with the assembly of girders by indicating their alignment during installation. The point of the compass, which indicates north, is situated at the left side of the symbol or above if it is aligned horizontally (or at the upper end if it is aligned vertically).

North symbol (Reference) When the function is loaded, you first have to define the benchmark of construction. Click on the insertion point (reference point) first, then on another point for the benchmark. A north symbol will be created at the insertion point. Then, the following dialog will be displayed for further definition of the symbol and display in the shapes:

North symbol


Options: In the input field Elevation above, you can enter a reference height corresponding to the model coordinates, z=0. Select the layer on which the benchmark has to be displayed in the Layer selection list. In the input field Block path, you may indicate a path to previously defined benchmarks if you don't want to apply the built-in symbols. Click on the File Select button and a Windows file selection dialog will be displayed where you can select the block folder. Alternatively to the built-in symbols, you can also use any block as a symbol. The Y-axis of this block then corresponds to northern direction; it will be inserted with the corresponding rotation.

Symbol: If the field Symbol is checked, the built-in symbols will be used for displaying the north arrow. You can select the desired symbol in the selection list. In the input field size, the scaling of the symbol can be defined.

Block: If the field Block is checked, an external block will be used for displaying the north arrow. The scale factor of the block is entered in the input field Scale. Normally, the blocks of the folder entered in the input field Block path will be used. Then, you may select the existing drawings as blocks which have to be used. If the field "Display only DWG Blocks" is checked, you can select the blocks already contained in the drawing as blocks which have to be used. Select the block which has to be used as north symbol in the selection list block.

The above-mentioned inputs describe the display of benchmark in the model (which may exist only once), whereas the following dialog page describes the display of alignment in the shapes. On one hand, the benchmark has to be inserted into the model and, on the other hand, the option 'Benchmark' has to be selected in shape properties, otherwise the alignment of a shape cannot be displayed (see ->‘Insert shapes/Properties‘).

North symbol


Horizontal Alignment

Here, it is possible to select either the built-in symbols or external blocks. As the proceeding is the same as already mentioned concerning the actual benchmark, we don't repeat these settings here, but only describe the additional options. Settings The display for the alignment symbol for the points of the

compass is set here. In the input field End Offset, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and the left resp. lower end of the shape. In the input field Center distance, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and the center of the shape. In the input field Colour, you enter the colour of the symbol as AutoCAD-colour number.

Horizontal is valid for horizontal girders and vertical is valid for vertical girders.

North symbol


Vertical Alignment

Settings The display for the alignment symbol for the upper edge of the

component is set here. In the input field End Offset, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and the left lower edge of the shape. In the input field Offset, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and the upper edge of the shape. In the input field Colour, you enter the colour of the symbol as AutoCAD-colour number.

User-defined Symbols You have to define an AutoCAD-block in your model drawing or as external drawing (wblock) containing the block attribute “LABEL” to apply user-defined symbols. This attribute is filled with the current text for alignment.

North symbol


Shape Labelling

Annotations: Enter the text which is to be displayed in the represented

symbols in the input fields for the points of the compass and for Upside.

DetailCenter…: The global view of the DetailCenter can be set here. Check the corresponding point of the compass in order to set the global view.

North symbol


Manual Dimensioning Points


D.7 Manual Dimensioning Points

Command Name: PS_INSERT_MANDIM Some steel constructions are very complex so that the system is not always able to determine the suitable dimensioning automatically. Often it is even not possible to find all suitable points because important reference measures such as, weld check measures, or similar values have to be defined individually and are not automatically known to the system. For this purpose, you can define dimensioning points directly in the model for the derivation of group drawings or overviews; the system has to be forced to dimension them. In contrast to the subsequent manual dimensioning of 2D workshop drawings, the advantage of this function is that they can be updated at an automatic 2D-update.



View: Here, you specify how the dimensioning points have to be depicted in the 3D-model. Only Points – Only the two dimensioning points and a short connecting piece will be depicted. With Line – Apart from the dimensioning points, the connecting line is displayed as well. This facilitates checking of the corresponding measured points. With Text – The directly measured dimension is additionally displayed as check text. Please note that this doesn’t have any influence on the depiction in the 2D-plans.The dimensioning points there are subsequently replaced by a usual standard measure of ProSteel 3D.

Only Points Here, you specify the size to be used for depiction of the two measured points.

Layer: Here you specify on which layer the object has to be inserted.

Executive in… The command is carried out as a loop. You can insert several manual-dimensioning points one after the other without having to call the function again each time.

Group Options

Horizontal A measure is created in dimensioning direction of the group or of the overview that runs from the first to the second point.

Vertical A measure is created perpendicular to dimensioning direction of the group or of the overview that runs from the first to the second point.

Direct A direct (e.g. diagonal) measure is created in the group or overview, running from the first to the second point.

In Groups The dimensioning point is evaluated in the group to which it has been assigned.

In views The dimensioning point is evaluated in the overview drawing where it is included.

By highlighting both entries an identical dimensioning point can appear both in a group drawing and in an overview..

Click on the OK button to add a dimensioning point to the model. You first have to click on the group this dimensioning point has to be assigned to and then the first and second point of the distance to be dimensioned.



Selection of Views In principle, dimensioning points have to be assigned to a group, even if they only are to appear in an overview drawing. Decide in which 2D view the measure has to be depicted by the current view or by the current UCS when the points are attached in the model. Later, the points are only evaluated in this or in the opposite view direction to the model (overview) or to the group.



Manual Component Part Link


D.8 Manual Component Part Link

Command Name: PS_MANUAL_LINK The logical links are required for dimensioning and recognition of neighbouring parts. These are created during most ProSteel 3D processing functions. However, if there isn’t any link between two component parts, a so-called “manual link” can be placed between the parts. The only task of this link is to create a dependency; it hasn’t got any additional function. To create a manual link, first select the main part of the connection (this should be the connected part). Then select the connecting part (e.g. the support). The designation ‘main part’ has nothing to do with the main parts of groups – it may be any part.

XXX

Seite A/1 - 2 Handbuch ProSteel 3D

Global Scale


D.9 Global Scale

Command Name: PS_SCALE Like AutoCAD, ProSteel 3D works in drawing units according to the scale less method, a natural scale of 1:1 being assumed (i.e. a drawing unit corresponds to one millimetre natural size). Any detailing with respect to the 2D shop plans, however, is prepared in a scale you entered beforehand. However, if you want to attach e.g. position flags later – that have been entered in the original size (mm) in the pre-settings – you must set a scale in order to ensure uniform sizes of these elements and a uniform aspect of your drawings. This so-called Global Scale basically corresponds to the later plot scale of your drawing. When the program needs a scale and no special scale is entered, the global scale will be adopted. When using the command, the following prompt is displayed in the command line

Previous ProSteel 3D Scale = 1.0000 Please enter the new default scale 1: ?

The current scale is displayed. Now enter the new scaling factor to be used for your work. When you enter e.g. the value 10, the default scale 1:10 will apply. Do not confuse the global scale with the length scaling. The global scale refers to the later printout of the drawings and scales text sizes, symbol sizes, etc. However, if you would like to use scale subsequently and if you have reduced the shapes according to scale, you usually plot using a scale of 1:1 (global scale = 1) and work with a length scaling. Enter both values when dimensioning manually.

Global Scale


Drawing Border


D.10 Drawing Border

ProSteel 3D allows you to easily insert drawing frames in different formats and scales. The program package comes loaded with several sample frames and borders. You can also add your own frames and borders. A drawing border is inserted as a scaled block corresponding to the drawing scale. The matching original blocks are filed in scale 1:1. After having defined a title block with block attributes within a border, you can fill it in using the command ’Drawing Info’. A dialog box gives you access to several well-sorted border variations. The data are filed in a tree structure. The standard version already includes the main entries A0-A4. You can either delete them or add further entries. The actual entries can only be entered as subordinate item under a main item.

Drawing Border


Click this button to generate a new entry.

Click this button to create a gusset below the currently selected gusset.

Click this button to delete a selected entry of a drawing.

Click this button to delete the selected gusset and all subordinate entries belonging to it.

Scale The drawing border is inserted in the scale entered here.

Activate Limits If this field is checked, limit is put on edges of the border to avoid drawing outside of the border You can enter limit parameters by clicking ASSIGN button.

Here, you load the selected entry and the drawing block into the model area.

Here, you load the selected entry and the drawing block into the paper area.

Creation of Entries Select the main point and either press the right mouse button for the subordinate menu or the Create button. Then, the following dialog opens:

Drawing Border


Block Path Enter the path to the block to be inserted.

Width Enter the width of the block if you want to work with active limits. If the field ‘Active Limits’ has been checked, these values are preset as limits with the specified scale. It is of course possible as well to specify different values for the limits.

Height Enter the height of the block if you want to work with active limits. If the field ‘Active Limits’ has been checked, these values are preset as limits with the specified scale. It is of course possible as well to specify different values for the limits.

Comment Here, you can enter a comment for identification.

Permits interactive block selection.

Permits size selection by means of a dialog.

After these data have been inserted, a new subordinate entry is displayed in the tree, which still has to be named. Then, the entry is created and can be used immediately.

Drawing Border


Manual Cut


D.11 Manual Cut

This command is used to insert a cut into 2D details. The prerequisite is that the details are still intelligent details. From object selection, the program independently recognizes which objects can be cut and which objects only represent the borders of the cutting arrows (e.g. dimensioning). This means that the cutting arrows are in any case attached outside of dimensioning if you select e.g. a completely dimensioned group including the measures. The following dialog opens after selection of the command. There, you can make the settings for label and depiction of cutting symbols:

Label Here, you enter the text without the cutting code that has to

be used as designation. Enter e.g. Cut.

Sign Enter the desired cutting code such as e.g. the letter A.

Text Style Select an AutoCAD-text style for the labels.

Layer Select the AutoCAD-layer the text and the cutting symbols have to be created on.

Manual Cut


Line Type Select the line type to be used for the depiction of the cutting line.

Colour... In the input fields for Symbol and Text you enter the colour of the cutting arrow and of the text. You can either specify the colour directly by entering the AutoCAD colour number, or you click on the desired input field and then on the SELECT button. Then, the AutoCAD dialog for colour selection is displayed where you can select the colour directly.

Text Size Here, you enter the size of the label text.

Hatch Scale Here, you can specify a scaling factor for the hatch to modify the density of the hatching.

Create Block A common block is formed consisting of the cutting arrows and the codes. Otherwise, they are still single lines and text.

Keep Resolution If this option is activated, the resolution depiction of possible shapes is not modified. Inner edges remain e.g. If this option is deactivated, all shapes are set on with Radii.

Dialog-Commands

LINE

Click on this button to create a cut through component parts along a line to be selected.

Select the parts to be depicted, then the cutting line. Then, you have to indicate the depth of the cut. If you press ESC here, only a cut at the corresponding position will be made. Otherwise, the parts will be cut at the position and the projection of the rest will be displayed. After having created the cut and after having attached the cutting code, you can place the result anywhere you like.

OBJECT

Click on this button to create a cut on the base of a cut object. This may be a view frame or an offset cut. You only have to select the object; selection of the parts is carried out

automatically.

UCS

Click on this button to create a cut of 3D component parts at the current UCS. After selection of the parts, the cut is created at the XY-plane of the current UCS.

Manual Cut


Depiction of the Cut You can generate the cutting code either via a generated graphic or via blocks to be selected.

Group Symbol

Symbol The cutting code is created as a symbol consisting of cutting arrow and code.

Continued The two partial lines are connected through the cut part.

By Side The cutting code is written beside the cutting arrow; otherwise it is written above the cutting arrow.

Arrow Size Specify the size of the arrow.

Distance/Length Here, you specify the distance of the cutting lines, from their beginning to the utmost bordering edge (e.g. the dimensioning), and what has to be the length.

Block

Block A freely selectable block is used for the cutting code instead of a cutting arrow. In the input fields Top Block and Down Block you see the selected block path; you can assign a block drawing by clicking on the SELECT button.

Example of a Cut at a Group

Manual Cut


The edge of the cut is located in front of the left stiffener and the depth of the cut extends beyond the head plate – you see all of these parts from the right; the shape is cut and the drill holes are invisible.

Manual Dimensioning


D.12 Manual Dimensioning

The ProSteel 3D dimensioning commands allow dimensioning of component parts and groups automatically in the drawings as well as manual dimensioning with useful help functions. For example, the overall views of the model may be dimensioned for an overview. However, it is also possible to dimension individual component parts or groups and then create details manually in cases where automatic detailing is not suitable for your application. In addition, all major standard functions of regular AutoCAD dimensioning are available for revision or modification of 2D workshop drawings. The dimensioning functions are principally based on the settings for detailing style (dimensioning), therefore general settings like AutoCAD dimensioning style, optimization, etc. have to be executed in the respective dialog box. The detailing style dialog can also be accessed using the dialog box described below and then the style can be modified or a new detailing style can be created. HINT: Please take care that the settings of scale and scaling of the component part are correct. Please refer to the chapter “Detailing” and carefully read through the chapter “Dimensioning Style”.

Manual Dimensioning


Group Settings

Alignment Here, you set the general direction of dimensioning. Horizontal – The dimension chain is always running in X-direction. Vertical – The dimension chain is always running in Y-direction. Line – The dimension chain is running in the same direction like a pre-set line. To carry out the function, click on the line determining the direction. You can use this method to dimension e.g. along a cut edge. As picked – The dimension chain is running in the direction specified by the two points first picked. This is e.g. reasonable if you want to dimension diagonal holes in a gusset plate. Like Part – The dimension chain is running in the same direction like the length direction of a component part. This is the optimal method to dimension along a diagonal shape by clicking on the shape. Arc Dimension – You can dimension the length of an arc. Angle Dimension – You can dimension an angle.

Manual Dimensioning


Origin Here, you specify which origin is used for alternative coordinate dimensioning. Auto – The dimensions are preferably related to the lower left point of the reference part’s coating or to that of the group’s main part. If it doesn’t exist, they are related to the current UCS. Default – The dimensions are related to any point specified by you. UCS-Origin – The dimensions are related to the origin of the current UCS. Part – The dimensions are related to the lower left point of the reference part’s coating or to that of the group’s main part. Start Dimension Chain – The dimensions are related to the beginning of the dimension chain.

Reference Point Here, you specify whether a reference part has to be used for dimensioning. This is necessary to evaluate shape shortenings correctly. However, the part has to be an intelligent 2D part’. No – A reference part is not used for dimensioning and all lengths are evaluated in the measured length. Default – A pre-set part is used as reference part. Thus, you don’t have to select it each time you apply this command. This option helps you to dimension more complex groups. Select – You are always prompted for the reference part, which then has to be selected.

With Radius... At arc dimension, the reference radius is additionally entered as well into the dimension.

Position... You can choose the position of the dimension chains at automatic parts dimensioning. If this field is not checked, the settings of detail style are valid for the distances of dimension chains.

Continuing... A dimension chain can be built continuously by clicking on individual points. If this field is not checked, you have to continue dimensioning single distances and you can obtain a dimension chain with gaps.

Scale auto... The settings for scale and object scaling are automatically determined by the global scale and by the reference part. If your work has been logical according to ProSteel (either un-scaled details and global scale for plot or scaled details and scale 1:1 for the plot), incorrect default settings are avoided.

Manual Dimensioning


Parts Not... The parts to be dimensioned are not scaled. Thus, the original measured lengths can be used. However, if the field has not been checked, all measured lengths are multiplied with the indicated scale under 'New Scale'.

New Scale The scale used for converting the measured lengths and text sizes depending on the settings for part scaling under ‘Parts Not…’ Here, you enter e.g. the value 10 if you have selected the ‘scale 1: 10 with object scaling’ at detailing. The details now have been decreased by factor 10.

Group Fence Chains

Work Frame The dimensions of the work frames are evaluated as fence points and dimensioned in a dimension chain.

Shape Center Starting and end points of the shapes are created as fence points and dimensioned in a dimension chain.

Shape Edges The corner points of the coating are evaluated as fence points and dimensioned in a dimension chain.

Overall Dim. An additional dimension chain is created stretching over the overall dimensions of the fence chains.

Group Coordinate Measures

At Total... Normally, the coordinate measures for overall dimensions are omitted at automatic detailing or part dimensioning. If this option has been selected, these are displayed as well to allow e.g. in overviews to specify the position of component parts related to a reference point by means of the overall dimensions of these parts.

Always positive If this option has been checked, always positive coordinate measures are indicated. You can obtain a relative dimensioning around a reference point when the direction is not important.

Display Zero... If this option has been checked, the coordinate measure having the value “0” is displayed in a dimension chain. Deactivation is reasonable if the origin (reference) is only indicated once.

Display First... If this option has been checked, the first coordinate measure is displayed in a dimension chain. Deactivation is reasonable if you want a connection with an existing dimension chain or an identical starting point has only to be indicated once.

Manual Dimensioning


Display Last... If this option has been checked, the last coordinate measure is displayed in a dimension chain. Deactivation is only possible if you have a dimension chain of normal measures and simultaneously existing coordinate measures.

Others

Info Window Depending on the selection, you are informed about the type of dimension chains, global scale of the drawing, pre-selected origin of coordinate dimensioning and pre-selected component part for part reference.

Detailing Style Here, you select the detailing style controlling the settings for dimensioning style, optimization, etc. At automatic part dimensioning, you also specify the points of a part or of a group to be dimensioned in the detailing style. Therefore, at identical detailing style the result of automatic detailing and automatic part dimensioning are in no way different.

Manual Dimensioning


Dialog-Commands

SINGLE PART

Click on this button to dimension a shape or any plate automatically. The relevant points for dimensioning are determined according to the settings in detailing style and the dimension chains are attached. You have to click on the part to be dimensioned. If the ‘Choose Position’

option has been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any position you like. For pre-selection of dimensioning direction, the option ‘As Part’ is recommended for most cases, you can, however, specify other directions as well.

GROUP

Click on this button to dimension a group automatically. The relevant points for dimensioning are determined according to the settings in detailing style and the dimension chains are attached.

You have to click on any part of the group you like. If the ‘Choose Position’ option has been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any position you like. For pre-selection of dimensioning direction, the option ‘As Part’ is recommended for most cases, you can, however, specify other directions as well.

END PLATE

Click on this button to dimension an end plate automatically. The relevant points for dimensioning are determined according to the settings in detailing style and the dimension chains are attached.

You have to click on the end plate first and then the connecting shape (this is the shape to which the end plate belongs). If the ‘Choose Position’ option has been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any position you like. For pre-selection of dimensioning direction, the option ‘As Part’ is recommended for most cases, you can specify other directions as well.

INSERT DIMENSION

Click on this button to insert new dimensions in an existing dimension chain. The other dimensions will be adapted. Select all dimensions belonging to this chain. Then you have to pick a

dimension as reference dimension for the position of the dimension chain. If this demand is only confirmed with RETURN, the first dimension of your previous selection will be used.

Manual Dimensioning


Now the program filters the dimensions, which are not situated in a line with this reference dimension. Dimensions of other dimension chains may also belong to your selection (e.g. due to “Crossing” the selection). Now, the dimension chain will be reconstructed and you can then insert the new dimensions.

DELETE DIMENSION

Click on this button to delete a dimension from an existing dimension chain. The other dimensions will be adapted. Selection of the dimension chain and of dimensions is identical with the dialog command INSERT DIMENSION it has not to be described once

again.

MODIFY DIMENSION CHAIN

Click on this button to modify the style of a dimension chain, e.g. to convert it from normal dimensions to coordinate measures or to modify the detailing style.

Selection of the dimension chain and of dimensions is identical with the dialog command INSERT DIMENSION; it does not have to be described once again.

SINGLE DIMENSION

Click on this button to attach a single dimension.

Linear Dim: Click on the first and second dimension point as well as the

position of the dimension line. The dimension is aligned according to the direction. Depending on the settings for direction and part reference, you still have to click on a reference line and/or a reference part.

Arc Dimensions: Click on the center of the arc first and then the starting point and end of the arc (the end will be corrected correspondingly). Afterwards, you pick the dimension line position. An arc is principally looked on anti-clockwise from beginning to end.

Angle Dim.: Click on the vertex of the angle first and then the end of the first and second side. After you pick the dimension line position. An angle is principally looked on anti-clockwise from beginning to end.

Manual Dimensioning


DIMENSION CHAIN

Click on this button to attach a dimension chain out of several dimensions. Click on the position of the dimension line first and then the points to be dimensioned.

The dimensions are aligned according to the direction. Depending on the settings for direction and part reference, you still have to click on a reference line and/or a reference part. If you selected the option ‘As Picked’ for the direction, the first two dimension points determine the direction of the dimension chain. If you selected the option ’Continuing Dimension Chain’, you are dimensioning according to the AutoCAD-dimensioning function ‘Continue’. If this option has not been activated, you continue indicating pairs of points for all dimensions following the first one. You can obtain an interrupted dimension chain with several dimensions.

FENCE CHAIN

Click on this button to create a fence chain dimensioning. The dimensions are aligned according to the direction. Depending on the settings for direction and part reference, you still have to click on a reference line and/or a reference part.

CHANGE DETAIL STYLE

Click on this button to open the dialog for setting parameters for the detail style. If you move to another style in the ‘Detailing Style’ selection list, the display in the detail style dialog will be updated as well.

LOAD DETAIL STYLE

Click on this button to load a detail style from the hard drive into your drawing. Select the desired style file (*.sty) in the file selection dialog (*.sty).

A new loaded detail style at the same time is the current detail style of dimensioning and it is displayed in the ‘Detailing Style’ selection list.

SPECIFY ORIGIN

Click on this button to define the origin (reference point) of coordinate dimensioning for the time of a ProSteel 3D session. Click on the corresponding point in your drawing.

This is reasonable if dimensioning has to be made e.g. within an overview or a more complex group. Select the setting Default under ‘Default Origin’ if all following coordinate measures have to be calculated related to this reference point.

Manual Dimensioning


SPECIFY REFERENCE OBJECT

Click on this button to define the reference object for shape shortening etc. for the time of a ProSteel 3D session. Click on the corresponding part in your drawing.

This is reasonable if dimensioning has to be made e.g. within a more complex group. Select the setting Default under ‘Part Reference’ if all following actions requiring a reference object have to be related to this selected part.

Dimension Chains During the acquisition of the measurement points the dimension chains are able to capture the points correctly even if the dimensions have been indicated in a different sequence or if the dimensions overlap. The picture below illustrates the interconnections:

Example (1) shows a dimensioning using the ’Continuing Dimension Chain’ option and the following sequence: First, click the distance C/F, then point D, and finally point A. Example (2) shows the result if the first dimensioning is like (1) and the next input is the dimensioning of the distance from the dotted line to point B. The ‘Combine Identical Dimensions from 3 on’ option in the detail style is active as well (since A/B, B/C and C/D were created!) Example (3) shows a dimension chain without the ‘Continuing Dimension Chain’ option. The following was dimensioned: the distance A/C and then D/E. A new measurement of the distance B/F would now divide the distance of 400 and create a second measurement from point E to F.

Manual Dimensioning


Alignment and Coordinate Dimensioning Some variants of dimensioning are admitted especially in combination with overviews due to the possibility to specify the reference points for coordinate dimensioning and the alignment of the dimension chains differently. The picture below shows two dimension chains with coordinate measures. The dimension chain (a) has been related to the UCS origin (a1) and the first and last coordinate measure has been deactivated. The dimension chain (b) has been fixed to a free reference point (b1) and negative coordinate measures have been admitted. These now can serve as relative height indicators. In addition, a dimension chain (c) has been attached the position of which is determined by the first two measurement points (c1) and (c2). Then, the two holes (c3) have been added as further measurement points. This would also have been possible by modification via the INSERT DIMENSION dialog command.

Manual Dimensioning


Fence Chain Dimensioning Fence chain dimensioning is a semi-automatic dimensioning mode, where the program determines the relevant points for dimensioning in several different objects. Once this is done, you can position the dimensioning lines via pre-settings for ‘Fence Chain Dimensioning’ you can select the dimension chains and the reference points. With the settings for ‘Direction’ you have determined the general dimensioning direction. This figure gives you an example for fence dimensioning:

Select the object – here shapes and works frames (B) - then highlight the points set under ‘Fence Chain Dimension’. You can manually add more fence points by clicking the area. At the end, you can remove the fence points selected by clicking.

The program then prompts you to determine the insertion points for the dimension lines for highlighted dimension chains. Depending on the selection, the dimension chains for shape edges (a), shape centers (c), work frames (b) and the overall dimension (d) are then inserted and extended to the outer edge of the overall dimension.

Manual Dimensioning


Elevation Flags


D.13 Elevation Flags

Command Name: PS_KOTE Using this command, you can insert elevations for component parts in the display windows. This command may also be used to insert length and width distances as elevation symbols. The parameters length, width, and height correspond to the related parameters of the work frames.

Current Layer The elevation is inserted on the current layer instead of on the

layer indicated in the configuration.

No Dynamic The dynamic of the flag is switched off after insertion. This is meant for application in 2D-mode.

Scale Indicates the scale used for insertion of the elevation symbol in the drawing.

The distance in Z-direction is indicated in the elevation.

The distance in Y-direction is indicated in the elevation.

The distance in X-direction is indicated in the elevation.

Elevation Flags


A symbol is created within a group, which will be output as elevation at later detailing.

Click on the button representing the desired measurement and the elevation can be inserted. First click on the definition point (measuring point), then you can position the elevation symbol (ORTHO is activated automatically) and finally, you position the dimension text (ORTHO is deactivated again when it was in the OFF-position before the function was selected).

Specification of the Origin Coordinates

X, Y, Z-Coordinate Enter the coordinates of origin for Length (Y), Width (X) and

Height (Z) measurements. The picked points will then be referenced to these coordinates. Usually you enter the origin of the corresponding work frame.

The coordinates can also be defined in the drawing using the mouse.

Elevation Flags


Elevation Depiction

Style Selection Use this box to select the style to be applied for the depiction.

Background Enter the AutoCAD-colour number for the background colour of the preview monitor.

SAVE Click on this button to save the current settings.

LOAD Click on this button to load a template out of the template management and thus use it again.

Create Geo... The depiction of elevations is specified by preset parameters in this dialog.

Block Geometry An AutoCAD block specifies the depiction of elevations. Any block can be selected.

Block Path In this field, you specify from which directory the blocks for selecting the geometry of the elevations have to be read.

Bitmap You can set an own bitmap for a style for easy recognition. This bitmap then is displayed in the selection box as well.

Elevation Flags


Geometry Definition

Line Type Lines means that the elevation symbol is represented as a line

triangle. Filled Triangle means that the elevation symbol is represented as a partly filled triangle.

Default Format You can indicate a certain text format with a variable $(V) for the measurement to the elevation. The variable then is replaced by the current value.

Text Style Presets the text style to be used for depiction of the texts in the elevation.

Group Options

Guide Line The elevation has a guideline to the definition point.

Dynamic The elevation is visibly displayed during insertion process.

Bottom Side The elevation symbol is turned upside down (point to the top, e.g. for the indication of lower edges).

Elevation Flags


Thousand sep The thousand position is separated from the other digits by a point, i.e. 2.500 instead of 2500. If you require the digits after the decimal point, this option should be deactivated.

Group Sizes

Symbol Size the size of the elevation symbol.

Text Size size of text of elevation data

After Dec. The number of digits after the decimal point of the calculated value.

Group Colours

Colours Use the fields Line and Text to set the corresponding colour for the height object. -1 as value means that the presetting is used.

In the following, you can see an example of different elevations:

Elevation Flags


Style Management Your elevation styles are maintained in this part of the dialog. New styles can be created; existing styles can be loaded, updated or even deleted.

Press the above-displayed symbol to create a new elevation

style. The style then will be saved by means of presetting in the directory for elevation styles as a file having the ending *.sty-file. Now you can work with this style on all other pages of this dialog.

If you want to work with a special style, which is not in the drawing, but stored on the hard drive, you can load it using this function. Select the corresponding *.sty-file in the directory of elevation styles and load the file. The style will be available at once.

If you don’t require a style any more in the drawing, use this function to remove it.

Elevation Flags


Click on this button to modify the order of the display. The order in the display of the style list is not sorted. You can specify your own sorting. For this purpose, use the two arrow buttons to move the highlighted style towards the top or towards the bottom of the order.

If you want to update the styles loaded in the drawing, use this function for this purpose. All styles in the drawing are replaced by the styles stored on the hard drive.

Elevation Flags


Short2d


D.14 Short2d

Since shapes are shown in full scale during detailing, they may sometimes be very long and not fit in the drawing. Under certain circumstances, you might deliberately want to have some “out-of-scale” shapes (lengthwise) in your drawing, e.g., if large areas of the components do not have any drill holes or similar features. This command allows you to shorten finished shapes in a way that areas with many details remain unchanged and a break is inserted in an insignificant area. The figure below shows the original shape and then the shortened display (slightly enlarged).

Select this command and you will be first prompted for the shape to be shortened which you have to click. Then you are prompted for the starting and end point of the shortening which you can either enter or pick. If you press the ESC-key instead, the shortening is automatically determined and carried out as it is the case for detailing. If you want to dimension the shape manually later, you can then consider the shortening as well.

Short2d


2D-Cutout


D.15 2D-Cutout

Command name: PS_CUT_OUT Using this command, you can cut any 2D lines at a polyline at the same time. After selecting the command, you have to pick the points of the polyline. The same command functions are available as when drawing a polyline. Then, all of the lines extending past the polyline are cut off at this line.

2D-Cutout


2D-Cutout

ProConcrete 3D Page E - 1

E MISCELLANEOUS

[?replace page in pdf file with Miscellaneous image page?]

Misellaneous

Page E - 2 ProConcrete 3D

User-Defined Component Parts

ProConcrete 3D Page E.1 - 1

E.1 User-Defined Component Parts

E.1.1 Special Parts

It may be that you don’t want to display detailed component parts, but you need the corresponding parts list information nevertheless. Or, you want to display certain elements, which have not been created with ProSteel 3D, as a block and you want their parts list data in your model as well. By using the special shape command, you can add parts list information to any existing component parts. You only have to select the parts in question. After having selected the command, you can select the component parts directly or you can create a block from these parts by pressing ESC. Then, you select the parts and define the insertion point of the block. After that, the following dialog appears:

Here, you can enter your parts list data and then, this part will be recognized as ProSteel 3D component part. You can modify this property using the properties command. You can use it at positioning and in the parts list as well. However, a 2D-depiction cannot be generated when no volume parts are contained.

Page E.1 - 2 ProConcrete 3D

BlockCenter


E.2 BlockCenter

BlockCenter is an effective tool for creation and management of any blocks within ProSteel 3D. If you are working e.g. with system constructions which together with individual adaptations form your final project, BlockCenter gives you fast access to these prepared constructions. As it is a matter of ProSteel3D-blocks, the behaviour of these construction groups after insertion is the same as if they have just been created out of individual components. Of course it is also possible to manage any 2D-blocks by means of the BlockCenter or to add these blocks to your shop drawings (e.g. special labelling fields for your customers, recurring details of construction, and so on). Within the BlockCenter, you will find a great number of useful functions for your working with blocks. In addition, there is also an efficient database included allowing a classification and later search for the required 3D- or 2D-blocks. Here, you see the two BlockCenter dialogs (navigation dialog on the left, selection dialog on the right) together with a ProSteel 3D-drawing:


BlockCenter


E.2.1 Structure of the BlockCenter

Very similar to the DetailCenter, the BlockCenter, too, consists of dialogs which may either be docked on the left or on the right of AutoCAD or which may be positioned anywhere on the screen. When the function is loaded, two dialogs are displayed. The dialog on the left only serves for navigation, whereas the dialog on the right serves for selection of the blocks. Then, all functions are loaded via context menus of the right mouse button, except for the basic settings of the BlockCenter. These are reached via the tool button on the upper left of navigation dialog. If one of the two dialogs isn't needed for current work, it can be hidden temporarily. It can be activated again by means of the remaining dialog. BlockCenter function isn't finished unless both dialogs are closed or navigation dialog is closed by means of the "Close"-button (x) on the upper right of the dialog.

Navigation Dialog In a tree structure, all existing block directories or groups are listed in navigation dialog. You can either choose a display reflecting the directory structure of your hard disk or a user-defined display. Sorting of the user-defined display can be designed freely to a large extent and then saved as a template (see function ->'Template'). In addition, you may set different display filters. Navigation dialog is used when: - The current block directory (or block group) is modified - A directory is created or removed from hard disk - Blocks are created - The database structure is revised - The sorting of the display is changed. If a block group (e.g. system construction XYZ) has been selected, you also could hide this dialog to gain more space for construction on your screen.


Selection Dialog In selection dialog, all blocks existing in the selected directory (or in the selected block group) are listed. They are displayed together with the drawing name and a preview. Of course it depends on the settings of sorting and filters in navigation dialog which block drawings are finally offered for selection. Selection dialog is used when: - a block is inserted into a drawing - an existing block is modified or deleted - the search data (classification) of the block are entered or modified The figures of preview are created by AutoCAD during saving of a drawing and show this drawing including current zoom setting at the moment of saving. Apart from scaling of size, you don't have any further influence on the display within the BlockCenter.

Database In contrast to other ProSteel 3D-functions, where all required data are stored in the drawing, BlockCenter is working with an additional database. The advantage of this database is that the blocks, especially if there are a great number of blocks, available at once after the function has been loaded. Neither a prolonged search in the directories nor a query of drawing data is necessary any more. In addition, user has a greater influence which drawings are integrated into the BlockCenter and which ones are not integrated. The database format was developed for the BlockCenter and permits fast access to all data required for sorting and selection. The additional content of the database (user-defined database fields) can be designed as you like. You may decide yourself which data fields are used to classify your blocks for selection and search and how they have to be named. Different properties of the block drawing are already taken from the drawing when a block is created (or even at a later time) and entered in previously defined database fields. Some search criteria will be available at once. If these fields are not required, they can of course be removed from the database.

BlockCenter


E.2.2 Creation and Edition of Blocks

There must be blocks contained in the BlockCenter to be able to work with it. Blocks are individual drawings existing on the hard disk, which then may be inserted into other drawings. It is possible to insert existing drawings or to create new blocks by means of the BlockCenter.

Creation Select the option directory structure as display for the creation of a block. Now check the directory where the block has to be stored in navigation dialog and select the entry create block via context menu. Select all components of the model which have to be adopted in the block and pick the main insertion point of the block. Finally, you are asked for the alignment of the block to allow insertion with correct alignment afterwards: When you select ESC, the correct UCS will be used. Alternatively, it is possible to pick a point on the later x-axis as well as a point on the x/y-plane. Please note, however, that at later insertion the block will automatically always be aligned in a way that the coordinate system pre-defined here is corresponding with the current drawing UCS. It is however possible to define alternative insertion points and alignments. Now, a new drawing will be created and displayed containing the selected component parts. This drawing can be modified further as you like: you can e.g. add other ProSteel- and AutoCAD-elements or additional insertion points. Hint: As long as this drawing has not been saved, it cannot be adopted into the database. It is possible to cancel block creation. It is not before the block drawing has been stored once – which can also be done when you quit this function – that the block will be finally adopted into the database and be displayed as preview in selection dialog.

Selection Select an appropriate sorting in the settings and then check the desired block group in navigation dialog by clicking on it. Depending on the setting, this may either be a directory or any user-defined sorting criteria. Within navigation dialog, you may scroll up and down the tree structure, as you are accustomed to doing in Windows-Explorer.


If you click on a new entry, selection dialog will be filled with small preview figures as well as with the file names of available blocks. Only those blocks are displayed, which have been adopted into the database and which meet the possibly activated filter condition. There may be other drawings included in the directory. Select the desired block by clicking the preview figure in selection dialog. Above the selection list, additional information on the selected block will be displayed which can also be defined freely.

Modification When you want to open an existing block for working or looking on it, select the entry Edit block in the context menu after block selection. The block drawing now is opened as new drawing that can be modified. If you want to keep the modification, the drawing has of course to be stored.

Delete Select the entry delete block in the context menu after block selection to remove a block from the database. Now, you can determine whether you only want to delete the entry in the database or also the complete drawing on your hard disk. If you don't delete the drawing, it is possible to adopt it again into the database at a later time. Any additionally entered data of this block are of course lost because they have been stored in the database and not in the drawing. Additional insertion points, are kept, because they are stored in the drawing as visible objects.

Create and Delete Directories Further directories e.g. new blocks may be created directly from the BlockCenter. Select the option directory structure as display structure and check the directory beneath which the new directory has to be created in navigation dialog. Now, select the entry create directory in the context menu and a small dialog box will be opened where you have to enter the name of the new directory. To remove a directory, select the directory to be deleted in navigation dialog and click on the entry delete directory in the context menu.

BlockCenter


E.2.3 Insert Blocks

At first, select the desired block in selection dialog and then, click on the entry insert block in the context menu. Now, you can see a preview of the block, „hanging on the cross-hairs“, and you have to click on the insertion point of the block. This insertion point is the main insertion point of the block determined during block creation. Alignment is effected in a way that the block coordinate system, which was also determined during block creation is corresponding with the current UCS of the target drawing. Press ESC-key instead, if you want to cancel the insertion.

Additional Insertion Points You can add further insertion points to a block that is used instead of the main insertion point. E.g. it is possible to insert a construction at all outer points. When the block is inserted into a drawing afterwards, you can jump from one insertion point to the other by mouse click and select the desired point. Additional insertion points can be determined directly during creation. It is, however, also possible to insert them later during edition of a block. As this is a matter of visible ProSteel 3D auxiliary objects which will be deleted automatically after insertion, you can also copy, move or delete existing insertion points by means of the standard functions of AutoCAD. Each of these insertion points is displayed as small 3D-ball the size of which is user-defined. To add insertion points, open the block drawing for edition (resp. block creation is still activated) and select the entry add insertion points in the context menu. Now you can add insertion points by clicking on a point until you end the function by pressing ESC. The alignment at later insertion then corresponds to the main alignment of the block.

Insertion Points with Alignment In addition, you can store the later alignment for each insertion point at the point itself to increase the available alignment variants. Otherwise, only the block alignment determined during block creation would be available. The block can be rotated directly during insertion. If you want to add insertion points, which at the same time contain an individual alignment, click on the entry insertion points with alignment in the context menu. After clicking on the point, you have to pick another point on the later x-axis as well as a point on the x/y-plane. Here, too, you can add points until you quit the function by pressing ESC.


Insertion via Additional Insertion Points When you defined additional insertion points for the block, you can select them one after the other. After insertion of the block by means of its main insertion point, the block is moved to the next insertion point by pressing the left mouse button. You may follow the result directly on the screen. After having reached the last insertion point, the block will again be moved to the main insertion point with the next mouse click and you can start right from the beginning.

BlockCenter


E.2.4 Display of Block Structure

The basic settings of the BlockCenter, and especially the kind of sorting, can be pre-defined in the pre-settings. An appropriate sorting avoids losing track if there is a greateer number of blocks. When you click on the button on the upper left of navigation dialog, the following dialog box will be opened:

Group Block Directory

Block path here, you see the basic directory of the blocks to be managed by the BlockCenter. These blocks are stored in subdirectories. In this basic directory, you will also find the database file so that you could work with different block directories (and databases). To modify the directory, click on the button on the right of the display. Then, you can determine the directory anew via file selection dialog. Please note that the blocks may only be in subdirectories of this basic directory.

Standard fields... Here, you determine the behaviour at a database update. The meaning of the options Do not replace, Always replace and Only replace blanks is described in detail in chapter 'Update database'.


Group Options for Insertion

Group objects at insertion of blocks, the program ignores all block elements not belonging to a group. This option is, however, only valid for special insertion variants planned for future versions.

Insertion points here, you specify the ball diameter with which the additional insertion points will be displayed.

Pattern Rotation Angle

Here, you specify the angle of rotation of the block about the insertion point.

Group Display

Preview Here, you can set the height of preview windows in the display dialog.

Directory... In navigation dialog, the block groups are displayed depending on the directory structure on the hard disk. You always have to use this sorting for the creation of new blocks, because otherwise you won't be able to determine a target directory for the block file.

User... It is possible to create an individual sorting for the navigation dialog depending on the contents of the user-defined database fields. Sorting then will be made in an hierarchic structure in the order which is displayed in the list on the right.

ARROW RIGHT Click on this button to add a property field to the list. Then, a dialog box will be opened where the existing database fields are displayed. Select the desired field out of this list.

ARROW LEFT Click on this button to remove the checked field from the list.

Display All At user-defined sorting, the blocks, which cannot be clearly assigned, will be displayed as well. This is the case when the corresponding field doesn't exist in the database or when it is empty. Then, the block will be assigned to a default field of the sorting level in question.

Incomplete At all sorting, only those blocks will be displayed the database fields of which have not been completely filled in. Thus, it is easy for you to find out whether all database fields which are used for a possible search exist with valid entries.

BlockCenter


Use Filter At sorting, the blocks are filtered depending on user-defined criteria. Only those blocks will be displayed which meet the filter condition (and of course the sorting condition). A specific selection is made possible.

Display Filter Here, you see the currently selected filter template. Click on the small button on the right of the information field to select a template. Please refer to chapter 'Display Filter' for a detailed description of how to create a filter template.

User-defined Sorting One important strength of the BlockCenter is the user-defined sorting according to any user-defined criteria. Fur this purpose, you can define your own database fields and fill them later with data of the corresponding block. In the settings, you may now specify a hierarchy according to which the blocks have to be displayed at a user-defined sorting. Here an example to make things clear:

Let us assume that – among others – you created database fields for the shape, for the whole pattern and for the 'Schubknagge' to classify prepared root points and you indicate exactly these fields in this order as sorting. If you now switch over to user-defined sorting, the tree-structure in the navigation dialog will be as follows: the contents of the field 'shape' will be displayed on top level, the contents of the field 'hole pattern' will be displayed on the following level below, and so on. For each data input, e.g. in the field 'shape' (e.g. HEA140 and HEA160) an entry will be created on the same level in the tree-structure and blocks with identical contents will be sorted there (similar to the directories and sub-directories on the hard disk). This helps you to find out similar blocks at a great number of blocks.

To avoid slightly differing entries for the same thing, all data existing for this field will be displayed in a list at data input. Assignments can be made, too. This helps you to avoid that once you enter e.g. HEA140 and once you enter HE140A.


BlockCenter


E.2.5 Database of Block Data

Working with the database is divided into four essential parts: definition of data fields, input of actual block data, maintenance of the database and use of the data for display and filter.

Definition of Data fields Click on the entry Edit Fields in the context menu of navigation dialog to add your own fields to the database or to Edit existing fields. The following dialog box will be displayed:

Group Field Definition

List Here, you see the field names of already defined data fields. If you want to edit or to delete one of the fields, click on it for selection.

Field Name Here, you enter the field name of the new database field. Field names always consist of capital letters (small letters will be automatically transformed) and already existing names are ignored. It is useful to enter reasonable field names as these are displayed in the selection dialogs for sorting and search. For each field a description may be added as auxiliary text for the other dialogs.


Dialog Text Here, you specify the labelling of the input field for field data in the input dialog for block data.

Description Here, you may specify a describing auxiliary text for the database field, which will be displayed in the other dialogs at selection of this field. As you should use concise and easy field names, you can add more information to the field by this way.

Display: The data of the database field will be displayed in selection dialog after selection of a block. This helps limiting the display to some essential fields in the case that there is a great number of data fields.

Group Data

Text Field Data are evaluated as mere text. Sorting is made in alphabetical order so that the entry "11" would be sorted in front of the entry "2".

Integer Data are evaluated as integer. Here, the entry "B2" would be sorted in front of the entry "A11" because the numerical part has priority.

Floating Point Data are evaluated as float. If the imperial unit system is used, the units inch and foot will be displayed correctly.

Floating Point (fix) Data are evaluated as float. If the imperial unit system is used, the units will not be displayed in inch and foot (e.g. for angles).

Command Names of the Dialog

INSERT

Click on this button to add the defined database field to the database or to modify an existing one. Please note that it is not possible to modify a field name. If you select

an existing field and you modify the field name, the program assumes that a new field has to be created.

DELETE

Click on this button to remove the selected database field from the database. Please note, however, that all existing block data referring to this field will be deleted as well.

BlockCenter


Input of Block Data After having defined the database fields, you can enter the corresponding data for each created block. In order to do so, click on the entry Edit block data in the context menu of display dialog or double-click on a preview window in the display dialog. Then, a dialog box opens where you can enter the data. It can remain open even if another block is selected. In this dialog, you will find a list of existing database fields. The size of the dialog depends on the number of fields.

Enter the desired data in the input fields or select an entry from the list of existing data by clicking on the arrow on the right of the input field. When working with the lists, you avoid different entries for the same thing, which facilitates later searching.


MODIFY

Click on this button to take over your entries or to modify already existing data.


Pre-defined Data fields To facilitate the acquisition of standard data, certain pre-defined data fields (standard fields) will be created at the creation of blocks, the contents of which can be automatically taken from the drawing. These data fields are managed in the same way like any standard user-defined data fields and therefore can be modified or deleted, too. If one or more of these data fields are deleted, they won't be taken into consideration any more at database update or at the creation of blocks. To restore these fields, it is necessary to re-structure the database or to create the field manually together with the exact name.

Automatic Creation of Database At first start of the program or at modification of block directory, it may be that there isn't yet any database existing. In this case, a blank database is always created to adopt blocks. The program offers you to search in the block directory including all sub-directories for drawings and to adopt them into the database. This allows you to manage even earlier created blocks via the BlockCenter. When you give a negative answer to this query, only those blocks are displayed which will be created later with the help of the BlockCenter – even if there are still other drawings in the directories. It is possible to create a complete new database at any time you like.

New Creation of Database At any time, it is possible to replace the existing database by a new one without having to delete the database file. Just click on the entry Create database new in the context menu of navigation dialog. Now, the program searches in all subordinate directories for drawings to be adopted into the database. Important hint: Please note, however, that all user-defined data fields and the corresponding existing contents will be lost! A new database will be created containing all drawings and blank standard fields existing in the directory.

BlockCenter


Update of Database Click on the entry Update database in the context menu of navigation dialog to update an existing database. In this case, the program searches for drawing files, which don’t exist any more in the block directory, and removes them from the database. At the same time, new drawing files and sub-directories will be adopted into the database. At update of the database, the entered data and modifications of data fields are kept. You may define via pre-settings what has to be done with the standard fields during update. When the option 'Don't replace standard fields' was selected, no entries in the standard fields will be modified, i.e. new drawings won't be examined either. When the option 'Always replace standard fields' was selected, all drawings will be searched for standard data and any possible modifications will be lost. When the option 'Only replace blank standard fields' was selected, newly added drawings will be examined, as their standard fields are still blank. All others won't be taken into consideration. When some standard fields were removed from the database, they won't be restored during update. By means of update, it is, however, possible to make sure that modifications in the block files will cause an update of the remaining standard fields. The program assumes that deleted standard fields won't be required any more. Please note that each drawing in question has to be opened for update in order to determine the drawing data. This process may require some time until it is finished.


Display Filter Another strength of the BlockCenter is the display filter according to certain search criteria. Before the blocks are displayed in the selected sorting, the program first checks whether each single block meets the filter conditions on the basis of its database entries. For this purpose, logical links may be created between the existing data fields and their contents. There is no limit concerning the complexity of the query. Different filter combinations can be stored as templates and then defined as activated filter in the settings for the sorting.

You may e.g. specify that only blocks having holes will be displayed if they have 4 enforced holes. Then, the neighboring figure will show you the result of filtering at a given sorting according to shape, hole pattern and if they are enforced. To be able to work reasonably with the filters, user should have a certain mathematical understanding of logically linked notions. It is very easy to create a filter condition never producing any positive result at all in combination with the existing data – a corresponding check doesn't take place.

Boolean operators Simple queries only consist of one comparing condition such as e.g. whole pattern = 4. It is, however, the logical link between several comparing conditions, which is really interesting. Therefore, you may specify a logical operator by means of which the next inserted comparing condition shall be linked with the existing condition. To facilitate input, previous pairs are automatically put into brackets, in case of a change of the operator. It is possible to create search queries such as (A AND B) OR (A AND C) in an easy way. A, B and C here are variables of simple comparing conditions of data field, operator and content. An existing term can be manually put into brackets, too, if the condition is not in pairs. The following condition serves as example: ((A AND B) OR C) AND D.

BlockCenter


Define Filter To define a filter term click on the entry Edit display filter in the context menu of navigation dialog. The following dialog box will be opened:

Group comparable term

List Here, all user-defined database fields are displayed which may be used for the search criteria. Each field may be used as often as you like. Select the desired field by clicking on it in the list. Then, the field name will be displayed on the right. In the information line, the auxiliary text for this field will be displayed containing more detailed information on the data field.

Display fields here, user presets an individual comparing condition consisting of field name, comparing operator and block data. Logical operators to form the complete filter condition can combine several comparing conditions.

> Left The current database field, which can be modified by clicking on it in the list.

> Operator Here, the comparing operator is selected linking the database field and the block data (content of the field) to build a comparing condition.


> Right Possible block data (contents of the field) of the selected data field in a dropdown-list. Impossible comparing conditions will be avoided.

After all three components of a comparing condition were preset; you can add this condition to the complete filter condition by clicking on the INSERT button. Depending on the existing conditions and selected logical links, appropriate brackets are set by the program.

Group Filter Condition

Display field the complete filter condition, if need be, as logical link consisting of several comparing conditions. If a comparing condition has already been inserted, the activated logical operator of the following comparing condition will be displayed as well.


OPERATOR AND

Click on this button to select the logical operator AND as logical link for the following comparing condition.

OPERATOR OR

Click on this button to select the logical operator OR as logical link for the following comparing condition.

BRACKET

Click on this button to force the program to put the existing filter conditions into brackets manually. Brackets are always necessary when the complete result of a (partial)

condition has to be linked with another, as the combination of (A AND B) OR C is different to A AND (B OR C).

INSERT

Click on this button to add the current comparing condition to the complete filter condition.

BlockCenter


DELETE

Click on this button to delete the comparing condition, which was added last.

DELETE ALL

Click on this button to delete the complete filter condition.

Use Filter Templates As you already know from nearly all other ProSteel 3D functions, the filter conditions, too, may be stored as template. Then, the filter can be used in the settings of the display via the name of this template. Don't forget that this is only a hint. If the filter template is modified, the display template, in which this filter was used, will probably produce another result, too.


Dispatch Blocks


E.3 Dispatch Blocks

Command Name: PS_DISPATCH Use this command to distribute as many AutoCAD blocks as desired evenly across a shape length and add their insertion points as markings to the shape (e.g. for NC output). Of course, you can just add markings without inserting a block. In addition, the function allows for the parametric generation of thread bolts or similar solids of revolution at simultaneous distribution similar to the distribution of blocks described above. E.3.1 Insertion of Blocks

Alternatively, you can also make distribute existing self-created AutoCAD-blocks. Then you have to select the second page. The specifications concerning the parametric dimensions are omitted of course. The block is inserted exactly as you created it. Please note that the current UCS has to agree with the UCS of the block to grant a correct alignment of the block. The proceeding is identical as well. The only difference consists in the fact that no generated parts are inserted but the individually specified block. Therefore this is a very flexible command.

Dispatch Blocks


The options concerning the distribution are identical with the distribution of thread bolts. So you can refer to this chapter for more detailed information.

Hole Dia Sign You can specify a code for the drill holes to be created. This code serves for selection of special NC-programs being able to recognize this code.

Block path This is the path to the block to be inserted.

List List of saved blocks from the database

Dispatch Blocks


E.3.2 Further Options and Data Base

As it is the case with many other ProSteel 3D functions, here too it is possible to make some standard default settings directly under ‘Assignments’ for the component parts to be inserted.

Data Base Select the database to be used.

Seize Parts The component parts are seized for the parts list.

Monitor Backgr. The colour of monitor background

Data Base Definition You can define a database with pre-defined thread bolts resp. paths to the blocks before you can optimally utilize the distribution command. Any thread bolts or blocks indicated there are then displayed in the selection list. This DBASE-file (e.g. bolts.dbf) has to be indicated in the configurations.

Dispatch Blocks


Meaning of the Data Base Fields TYPE indicates the entry type (1 = thread bolt, 2 = block)

NAME name of the thread bolt or block

BLOCKPATH complete path to the block (only for type 2)

HOLEDESCRI drill hole code (only for type 2)

HOLEDM diameter of marking hole

HOLELENGTH depth of marking hole

LENGTH length of thread hole (only for type 1)

DM diameter of thread hole (only for type1)

FOOTDM diameter of thread hole foot (only for type1)

FOOTHEIGHT height of thread hole foot (only for type1)

HEADDM diameter of thread hole head (only for type1)

HEADHEIGHT height of thread hole head (only for type1)

NIPPELDM diameter of thread hole nipple (only for type1)

NIPPELLENG length of thread hole nipple (only for type1)

Auxiliary Tools


E.4 Auxiliary Tools

E.4.1 Collision Check

An important task of modern CAD systems is to avoid errors during construction. First and foremost this is to avoid collisions. This functions serves for the detection and display of collisions within any kind of component parts. There are various reasons for collisions to occur. In addition this function helps you to check whether bolts can be mounted or not. The check is made on the base of the parts volume. If a collision is detected, the collision volume is displayed on screen and the component parts in question are highlighted. Then, you can zoom on all collisions one after the other and check the positions concerned.

Min. Volume Minimal collision volume, from which on the collision is seized

as such. The display is made in mm^3. This avoids that your attention is distracted from important things by collisions, which are due to minimal tolerances.

Display Scaling Factor by which the zoom window is increased when you zoom on the found parts to get a survey on the whole situation.

Actual/Max. Display of the current collision solid and the total amount of found solids.

Auxiliary Tools


Use this button to start collision check. You are prompted to select all parts to be checked. All colliding components now are highlighted with a colour defined in the settings, and the collision solids are displayed. You can of course select a complete model. Please note that the required time increases with the square of the number of selected component parts. The reason is that each part has to be checked with each other part. Therefore, it is often more reasonable to check only a certain junction point at a time.

Use this button to remove the highlighting of the parts and to delete all found collision solids as long as they are situated on the collision layer.

Use this button to select the next found collision solid for examination.

Use this button to select the previous found collision solid for examination.

Auxiliary Tools


E.4.2 Center of Gravity

Use this function to calculate the center of gravity of any parts. Select the part in question and the calculation is started. A ball in the model and numerically in the dialog line visually displays the result. There, you obtain information about the defined volume, the exact coordinates of the center of gravity (in world coordinates) as well as the total weight of the parts. Please note that different specific weights are not taken into consideration. The program assumes that all parts are made of steel.

Auxiliary Tools


Auxiliary Tools


E.4.3 Move Objects

Use this function to simulate moving of any parts along a line, poly-line or spline. This can be applied for visualizations or to check whether parts can be assembled. The objects are moved along a guideline in a set speed. In addition, you can choose whether you only want to move the parts or whether they have to be rotated as well.

Resolution Enter here into how many parts the guide lines have to be

divided regularly. The higher the value, the more regular and the more fluent the simulated movement will be.

Delay Wait in milliseconds after each single movement. This value controls the speed of the simulated movement.

Move and.. The objects are not only moved along the guide line, but also rotated around this line. This means, if you have a sharp bend in the line, the part will be rotated along this bend.

After pressing the OK button, seize the guide line first. This may be a line, poly-line, spline or an arc. Then seize the parts and the simulation starts.

Auxiliary Tools


Auxiliary Tools


E.4.4 Convert ADT shapes

Command name: PS_CONVERT_ADTSHAPES This function is only available in a specific version of ProSteel 3D for Autodesk Architectural Desktop (ADT). This AutoCAD application is specifically designed for architects and contains a variety of steel shapes. With a call to this function you can convert the ADT shapes into ProSteel 3D shapes for further use of the ProSteel3D manipulation functionality. After a call to the function you should choose the ADT shapes that should be converted. If ProSteel 3D finds a corresponding shape in its database then the ADT shape is deleted and is replaced with the ProSteel 3D shape.

Auxiliary Tools


Notes


E.5 Notes

Notes


Pro Concrete v 18

Documents

thread hole

sheet metal

negative values

divide hole

single sheet

prosteel 3d

theoretical

imperial unit